Polycom RealPresence Group Series

ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE 6.2.
2 | August 2021 | 3725-63706-018A
Polycom RealPresence Group Series
Getting Help
For more information about installing, configuring, and
administering Poly/Polycom products or services, go to
Polycom Support.
Plantronics, Inc. (Poly — formerly Plantronics and Polycom)

345 Encinal Street
Santa Cruz, California
95060
© 2021 Plantronics, Inc. All rights reserved. Poly, the propeller
design, and the Poly logo are trademarks of Plantronics, Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
Contents
Before You Begin..............................................................................................14
Related Poly and Partner Resources................................................................................14
Privacy Policy....................................................................................................................15
Getting Started................................................................................................. 16
High Definition Video Conferencing.................................................................................. 16
User Interface Customization............................................................................................17
Security Setting Management........................................................................................... 17
Call Setting Configuration................................................................................................. 18
Powering On and Off.........................................................................................................18
Power On the System............................................................................................ 18
Power Off the System.............................................................................................18
Powering On the RealPresence Group 700 System.............................................. 19
Navigating the System...................................................................................................... 19
Access the System Web Interface..........................................................................19
Changing a Password............................................................................................ 20
Search the Web Interface.......................................................................................20
Setting Up System Hardware.......................................................................... 21

Mount and Position the System........................................................................................ 21
Setting Up a Microphone...................................................................................................22
Available Microphone Inputs by System................................................................ 22
Set Up Third-party Microphones............................................................................ 22
SoundStructure Digital Mixer..................................................................................23
Setting Up the Polycom StereoSurround Kit..................................................................... 23
Adding a Touch Monitor.................................................................................................... 24
Touch Monitor Support........................................................................................... 25
Adding a Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 Conference Phone.......................................... 26
Running the Setup Wizard...............................................................................27

Run the Setup Wizard Locally...........................................................................................27
Run the Setup Wizard from a Remote Location................................................................27
Configuring General System Settings............................................................29

Name the System..............................................................................................................29
Enter Contact Information................................................................................................. 29
1
Contents
Set the Location................................................................................................................ 30

Set the Language..............................................................................................................31
Set the Date and Time...................................................................................................... 31
Displaying Participant Names Continuously in a Call....................................................... 32
Configure Participant Name Display...................................................................... 32
Using a Provisioning Service..........................................................................34

Enable a Provisioning Service.......................................................................................... 35
Configure a Provisioning Service...................................................................................... 35
Disable a Provisioning Service..........................................................................................36
ZTP Web Service Solution................................................................................................ 36
Certificates and Security Profiles within a Provisioned System........................................ 36
Set Up Multitiered Directory Navigation............................................................................ 37
Activating System Options..............................................................................39

System Software Options..................................................................................................39
View System Software Options.............................................................................. 40
Obtain Software or System Option Keys................................................................40
Create a Single Key File to Update Multiple Systems............................................41
Key File Formats.................................................................................................... 41
Activate System Options........................................................................................ 41
Microsoft Interoperability................................................................................ 43
Skype for Business-Hosted Video Conferencing.............................................................. 44
Register a System with Skype for Business......................................................................44
Configure the Skype for Business Directory Server............................................... 48
Org ID Authentication ............................................................................................ 48
Upload Logs to the Skype for Business Server......................................................48
Managing System Software Through Skype for Business Server.................................... 49
Configure System to Upgrade or Downgrade Software Through Skype for
Business Server................................................................................................ 49
Configure the Directory Services Contact List.................................................................. 50
Dial Plan Normalization.....................................................................................................50
Enable Dial Plan Normalization..............................................................................50
Support for Location-Based Routing in Skype for Business Hosted Calls........................ 51
Skype for Business Content Sharing................................................................................ 51
VbSS Support in Skype for Business Environments.............................................. 51
Calendaring Service.........................................................................................54
Enable the Calendaring Service........................................................................................54
2
Contents
Join Scheduled Meetings.................................................................................................. 56
Configuring Network Settings.........................................................................57

Connecting to a LAN......................................................................................................... 57
LAN Status Lights...................................................................................................57
Configure LAN Properties...................................................................................... 58
Configure IP Address (IPv4) Settings.....................................................................61
Configure IP Address (IPv6) Settings.....................................................................62
Configure DNS Server Settings..............................................................................63
LLDP and LLDP-MED Support......................................................................................... 64
LLMP-MED Information Discovery......................................................................... 64
Behavior When LLDP is Enabled........................................................................... 64
Enable LLDP Using a USB Storage Device........................................................... 64
Enable LLDP in the Web Interface......................................................................... 65
IP Network Settings...........................................................................................................65
Configure H.323 Settings....................................................................................... 65
Configure the System to Use a Gatekeeper...........................................................66
SIP Settings............................................................................................................67
RTV and Skype-Hosted Conference Support........................................................ 71
AS-SIP Settings................................................................................................................ 71
Enable AS-SIP Settings......................................................................................... 72
Configure AS-SIP Settings for MLPP..................................................................... 72
Add an AS-SIP Service Code.................................................................................72
Delete an AS-SIP Service Code.............................................................................72
Defining AS-SIP Outbound Precedence Call Defaults........................................... 73
Multilevel Precedence and Preemption (MLPP)............................................................... 73
Define MLPP Network Domains.............................................................................73
Add an MLPP Network Domain..............................................................................74
Alternative Network Address Type (ANAT).............................................................74
Multipoint Conference On a RealPresence Collaboration Server..................................... 75
Enable Call Escalation of Point-to-Point Calls........................................................75
Web Proxy Auto-Discovery Protocol................................................................................. 75
Sample PAC file......................................................................................................76
Enable Web Proxy..................................................................................................76
Configure Web Proxy Settings............................................................................... 77
Update Proxy auto-config (PAC) File......................................................................77
Verify Proxy auto-config (PAC) File........................................................................ 77
Verify Proxy auto-config (PAC) File Status............................................................. 77
Limitations.............................................................................................................. 78
Configure Network Quality Settings.................................................................................. 78
Lost Packet Recovery and Dynamic Bandwidth Settings.......................................80
3
Contents
Simplified ISDN Dialing..................................................................................................... 81

Configure Gateway Call Type Settings...................................................................81
Securing the System........................................................................................82

Configure Security Profiles................................................................................................82
Maximum Security Profile Requires Default Value Changes................................. 83
Managing System Access.................................................................................................84
Enable External Authentication.............................................................................. 84
Configure Local Access..........................................................................................85
Configure Remote Access......................................................................................86
Local Accounts....................................................................................................... 88
Detecting Intrusions.......................................................................................................... 92
View Connections to Your System in a Sessions List....................................................... 93
Secure API Access........................................................................................................... 93
Enable Secure API Access.................................................................................... 94
Disable Secure API Access....................................................................................94
Access the API with SSH....................................................................................... 94
Port Lockout...................................................................................................................... 95
Configure Port Lockout Settings.............................................................................96
Allow List........................................................................................................................... 96
Enable an Allow List............................................................................................... 97
Add IP Addresses to an Allow List......................................................................... 97
Call Encryption.................................................................................................................. 98
Configure Encryption..............................................................................................99
Configuring Encryption Settings for SVC Calls...................................................... 99
Set the Transport Protocol for SVC Calls............................................................. 100
Set Up AES Encryption for SVC Calls..................................................................100
Verify H.323 Media Encryption............................................................................. 100
802.1x Authentication......................................................................................................101
Supported 802.1x Configurations.........................................................................101
Configure 802.1x Authentication.......................................................................... 101
Firewall/NAT Traversal.................................................................................................... 102
Basic Firewall/NAT Traversal............................................................................... 103
Configure the H.460 Firewall/NAT Traversal........................................................ 103
Security Certificates........................................................................................................ 105
How Certificates are Used....................................................................................106
Certificate Signing Requests................................................................................ 106
Configure Certificate Validation Settings.............................................................. 110
Install Certificates..................................................................................................111
Certificate Revocation...........................................................................................112
Remove a Certificate and CRL.............................................................................113
4
Contents
Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol................................................................. 114

Set Up a Security Banner................................................................................................116
Set a Meeting Password..................................................................................................117
Visual Security Classification...........................................................................................117
Enable Visual Security Classification....................................................................118
Enable Room and Call Monitoring...................................................................................118
Monitor a Room or Call.........................................................................................119
Enable Video Shapshot During a Call.................................................................. 119
Send a Message to a System...............................................................................119
Configure the OCSP Method................................................................................119
Configuring Call Settings.............................................................................. 121

Configure Call Settings................................................................................................... 121
Setting Call Preferences for SVC....................................................................................123
Configure SVC Dialing Options............................................................................ 124
Enable SVC Preference (H.264) for Calls............................................................ 125
Enable Automatic Answering of SVC Point-to-Point Calls................................... 125
Set Preferred Call Speeds.............................................................................................. 126
Configure the Recent Calls List.......................................................................................127
Set Call Answering Mode................................................................................................127
Set the Maximum Call Length......................................................................................... 128
Set a Multipoint Viewing Mode........................................................................................128
Enable Flashing Incoming Call Alerts............................................................................. 129
Turn Off Flashing Alerts........................................................................................129
Setting Up Audio-Only Calls............................................................................................129
Enable Audio-Only Calls...................................................................................... 129
Disable Audio-Only Calls......................................................................................129
Select the Call Type Order for Audio-Only Calls.................................................. 130
Place an Audio-Only Call from the System Web Interface................................... 130
Enable Show Content in Audio-Only Call.............................................................130
Displaying Participant Names Continuously in a Call..................................................... 131
Configure Participant Name Display.................................................................... 131
Configure System Display Name During Call................................................................. 131
Registering with a Directory..........................................................................132

Enable H.323.................................................................................................................. 132
Configure the Polycom GDS........................................................................................... 133
Configure the LDAP Directory Server............................................................................. 134
Managing Favorites Contacts and Groups......................................................................134
Types of Favorites Contacts.................................................................................135
Create a Favorites Contact.................................................................................. 135
5
Contents
Create a Favorites Group.....................................................................................135

Edit a Favorites Group......................................................................................... 136
Delete a Favorites Group..................................................................................... 136
Importing and Exporting Favorites....................................................................... 136
Setting Up Speed Dial.....................................................................................................137
Enable Speed Dial................................................................................................137
Add Speed Dial Contacts..................................................................................... 137
Image File Requirements for Speed Dial Contacts.............................................. 138
Upload an Image File for Speed Dial Contacts.................................................... 138
Remove Speed Dial Contacts.............................................................................. 138
Kiosk Mode...........................................................................................................138
Setting Up and Configuring Directory Servers................................................................ 139
Configuring a Directory Server............................................................................. 139
Configuring Audio Settings...........................................................................141

Configure General Audio Settings...................................................................................141
Configure Audio Input Settings....................................................................................... 142
3.5 mm Audio Input.............................................................................................. 145
Audio Output Settings..................................................................................................... 145
Configure Audio Output Settings..........................................................................145
Set the Speaker Volume.......................................................................................146
Stereo Settings................................................................................................................147
Test StereoSurround....................................................................................................... 147
Polycom Acoustic Fence.................................................................................................148
Configure the Acoustic Fence.............................................................................. 148
USB and Bluetooth Headsets......................................................................................... 149
Configuring Video Settings........................................................................... 150

Monitor Resolution Rates for RealPresence Group Series Systems.............................. 150
Full-Motion HD................................................................................................................ 151
Maximize HDTV Video Display....................................................................................... 152
Monitor Profiles............................................................................................................... 152
Configure Monitor Profile Settings........................................................................152
Prevent Monitor Burn-In.................................................................................................. 156
Adjust Brightness for Room Lighting...............................................................................156
Monitors with CEC.......................................................................................................... 157
Enable CEC Controls........................................................................................... 157
Disable CEC Controls.......................................................................................... 157
Configure Video Input Settings....................................................................................... 158
Configure RS-232 Serial Port Settings............................................................................161
Configuring Monitor Settings...........................................................................................162
6
Contents
Configure Monitor Settings...................................................................................162

Third-Party Touch Panel Controls................................................................................... 163
Configure Secondary Monitors for Content.....................................................................164
Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System..................................... 165

Improve Camera Tracking Performance......................................................................... 166
Camera Presets.............................................................................................................. 166
Configure Far-End Camera Control................................................................................ 166
Enable Users to Pin an Active Speaker .............................................................. 167
Integrating RealPresence Group Series with Polycom EagleEye Cube HDCI............... 167
Position the EagleEye Cube HDCI Camera......................................................... 167
LED Indicators......................................................................................................167
Configure Camera Settings.................................................................................. 168
Camera Tracking.................................................................................................. 168
Participant Count CDR Details............................................................................. 169
EagleEye Cube HDCI Camera Software Updates............................................... 170
Factory Restore the EagleEye Cube HDCI.......................................................... 170
Setting Up a Polycom EagleEye IV Camera................................................................... 171
EagleEye IV Camera Orientation......................................................................... 171
Replace the EagleEye IV Camera........................................................................171
Polycom EagleEye Director II Camera System...............................................................172
Position the EagleEye Director II Camera System...............................................173
Indicator Lights..................................................................................................... 175
View System Status for EagleEye Director II Camera System.............................176
EagleEye Director II Camera System Diagnostics............................................... 176
Perform a Factory Restore................................................................................... 178
Setting Up a Polycom EagleEye Producer System.........................................................178
Calibration............................................................................................................ 179
Camera Tracking.................................................................................................. 179
Set Up the Polycom EagleEye Director.......................................................................... 185
Positioning the Polycom EagleEye Director......................................................... 185
Adjust the Room View.......................................................................................... 187
Calibrate the EagleEye Director Cameras........................................................... 187
Camera Tracking in the Local Interface................................................................188
Transfer EagleEye Director Logs......................................................................... 189
EagleEye Director Software Updates...................................................................189
Perform a Factory Restore for the EagleEye Director..........................................190
Troubleshooting EagleEye Director Camera Calibration......................................190
Troubleshooting EagleEye Director Camera Tracking......................................... 190
Setting Up Polycom EagleEye Acoustic Camera............................................................190
7
Contents
Configuring Remote Control Behavior.........................................................193

Configure Remote Control Behavior............................................................................... 193
Programming the Remote Control.................................................................................. 194
Set the Remote Control Channel ID.....................................................................195
Set the Remote Control Channel ID for a Specific System.................................. 195
Confirm the Channel ID........................................................................................195
Recharge the Remote Control Battery................................................................. 196
Remote Control Operation on RealPresence Group 700 Systems...................... 197
Enabling Mobile Devices as Controllers...................................................... 198

Enabling RealPresence Mobile....................................................................................... 198
SmartPairing Prerequisites...................................................................................198
Configure SmartPairing........................................................................................ 198
Enabling Content Sharing............................................................................. 200

Configure Content Sharing..............................................................................................200
Adjust Audio Level for Content........................................................................................201
Connecting a Computer.................................................................................................. 201
Configure Monitor 1 as the Content Monitor................................................................... 201
Configure Monitor 2 as the Content Monitor................................................................... 201
Setting Up a Polycom Content Display Application.........................................................202
Download and Install Polycom People+Content Technology............................... 202
Closed Captioning...........................................................................................................202
Enter Closed Captions on the System Web Interface.......................................... 203
Enter Closed Captions Using Equipment Connected to a Serial RS-232 Port.....203
Dial-Up Connection to the System's RS-232 Serial Port......................................203
Enable VisualBoard Content Sharing..............................................................................204
Prerequisites for the VisualBoard Application................................................................. 204
Configure the Polycom UC Board................................................................................... 204
Sharing Content During Calls..........................................................................................205
Configuring DVD Player Settings.................................................................................... 205
Adjust DVD Audio Settings for Content................................................................206
Configuring Call Recording...........................................................................207

Polycom RealPresence Media Suite Recording............................................................. 207
Enable Recording Controls.................................................................................. 207
Recording Calls Remotely....................................................................................207
Configure Monitor Settings for Recording on a RealPresence Group 700 System........ 209
8
Contents
Customizing the Local Interface................................................................... 210

Change the Background Image on the Home Screen.................................................... 210
Change the Startup Image on the Home Screen............................................................ 211
Set Up the Address Bar...................................................................................................211
Calling............................................................................................................. 213
Call a Favorite Contact....................................................................................................213
Call a Speed Dial Contact............................................................................................... 213
Call a Recent Call Contact.............................................................................................. 214
Place a Call..................................................................................................................... 214
Searching Directory Contacts to Call.............................................................................. 214
Browse Global Contact Entries to Call............................................................................ 214
Place a Cascaded Call....................................................................................................215
Placing an Audio-Only Call............................................................................................. 216
Large Conference .......................................................................................................... 216
Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device....................................217

Positioning the RealPresence Touch Device.................................................................. 217
Run the RealPresence Touch Device Setup Wizard (OOB)........................................... 217
Power Off the RealPresence Touch................................................................................ 218
Wake the RealPresence Touch....................................................................................... 218
Enable the RealPresence Touch Device.........................................................................219
Set the Language............................................................................................................219
Pairing the Device........................................................................................................... 219
Pairing States....................................................................................................... 219
Pair For the First Time..........................................................................................220
Pair to a Previously Paired System...................................................................... 220
Unpair a RealPresence Touch..............................................................................220
Remove a System from the Paired System List...................................................221
Managing the RealPresence Touch Device.................................................................... 221
Disable TLS..........................................................................................................222
Open a Remote Management Window................................................................ 222
Pair Using RealPresence Touch Web Interface................................................... 222
Unpair Using the RealPresence Touch Web Interface......................................... 222
Change the RealPresence Touch User Name and Password..............................222
Configure Network Settings..................................................................................223
Enable Recent Calls and Speed Dial................................................................... 225
Security Certificates for RealPresence Touch.................................................................225
Customize the RealPresence Touch Screens.................................................................225
9
Contents
Choose the Home Screen Icons.......................................................................... 226

Choose the Place a Call Screen Icons.................................................................226
Change the Background Image............................................................................227
Setting Up and Configuring Directory Servers for the RealPresence Touch...................227
Set Up Directory Servers for the RealPresence Touch........................................ 227
Enable Microsoft Skype Mode for RealPresence Touch................................................. 229
Enable Skype for Business Mode................................................................................... 229
Disable Skype for Business Mode.................................................................................. 230
Updating Software...........................................................................................................230
Dynamic Polycom Touch Device Software Updates............................................ 230
Managing Polycom Touch Device Software on Your Server................................ 231
Update Software from the Web Interface............................................................. 232
Update Software from the Local Interface............................................................232
Update RealPresence Touch Software from a USB Storage Device................... 233
Update the Software and the Factory Restore Partition From a USB Storage
Device............................................................................................................. 233
Troubleshooting the RealPresence Touch Device.......................................................... 234
View System Details and Connection Status....................................................... 234
View Call Statistics............................................................................................... 234
Download RealPresence Touch Logs.................................................................. 234
Transfer RealPresence Touch Logs to a USB Storage Device............................ 235
Manually Reboot a RealPresence Touch Device................................................. 235
Restart a RealPresence Touch Device.................................................................236
Restart a System from a RealPresence Touch Device........................................ 236
Perform a Factory Restore on the RealPresence Touch......................................236
Perform a Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device....................................237
Test the Software Download URL........................................................................ 237
Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device...............................................238

Positioning the Polycom Touch Control...........................................................................238
Set Up the Polycom Touch Control................................................................................. 238
Enable the Polycom Touch Control................................................................................. 239
Configuring the Software.................................................................................................239
Configure LAN Settings........................................................................................240
Configure Location and Time Settings................................................................. 241
Configure Admin ID and Password...................................................................... 242
Powering On the Polycom Touch Control....................................................................... 242
Power Off the Polycom Touch Control............................................................................ 242
Wake the Polycom Touch Control................................................................................... 243
Pairing States for the Polycom Touch Control.................................................................243
Pairing the Polycom Touch Control Device..................................................................... 244
10
Contents
Pair the Polycom Touch Control Device............................................................... 244

Pair to a System After Setup................................................................................ 244
Unpair the Polycom Touch Control Device...........................................................244
Managing the Polycom Touch Control Remotely............................................................ 245
Open the Remote Management Window............................................................. 245
Transfer Polycom Touch Control Logs to a USB Storage Device........................ 245
Updating the Software.....................................................................................................246
Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site for the Polycom Touch Control..246
Update Software Manually from the Web Interface..............................................247
Update Software Automatically in the Web Interface........................................... 247
Update Software Automatically in the Local Interface..........................................248
Update Software Manually in the Local Interface.................................................249
Update Software from a USB Storage Device..................................................... 249
Set a Software Version as Current for the Polycom Touch Control......................250
Remove a Polycom Touch Control Software Version...........................................250
Troubleshooting on the Polycom Touch Control Device..................................................251
Polycom Touch Control Indicator Light.................................................................251
View System Details.............................................................................................251
Perform a Factory Restore on the Polycom Touch Control.................................. 251
Perform a Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device on the Polycom
Touch Control.................................................................................................. 252
System Maintenance......................................................................................254
Managing System Profiles.............................................................................................. 254
Store a Setting Profile.......................................................................................... 254
Upload a Profile....................................................................................................254
Perform a Factory Restore of a System............................................................... 255
Delete Data and System Files..............................................................................257
Controlling the System Fan Speed................................................................................. 257
Configure the System Fan Speed........................................................................ 257
Restoring and Resetting a System..................................................................................258
Logs................................................................................................................................ 258
View Log File Status.............................................................................................258
Configure System Log Management....................................................................258
Configure System Log Level and Remote Logging..............................................259
Retrieving Log Files........................................................................................................ 261
Download System Log Files.................................................................................261
Transfer System Log Files....................................................................................261
SNMP Reporting.................................................................................................. 262
Upgrading System Software........................................................................................... 265
Preparing to Upgrade........................................................................................... 265
11
Contents
System Software Updates....................................................................................265

Downgrading System Software.......................................................................................270
Determine the Software Version...........................................................................270
Delete System Settings........................................................................................ 270
Troubleshooting............................................................................................. 271
General Troubleshooting.................................................................................................271
View Remote Sessions on the System........................................................................... 272
Placing a Test Call...........................................................................................................273
RealPresence Group System Indicator Lights................................................................ 273
EagleEye Producer Indicator Lights................................................................................274
Audio and Video Tests.................................................................................................... 275
Audio Meters........................................................................................................ 276
Set Audio Meter Levels........................................................................................ 277
System Diagnostics.........................................................................................................277
Access Diagnostic Screens in the Web Interface.................................................277
Access Diagnostic Screens in the Local Interface............................................... 277
Viewing System Details on the Local Interface............................................................... 280
Access the Information Screen............................................................................ 280
Access the Status Screen.................................................................................... 281
View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call With the Remote Control....283
View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call with the Remote Control........... 283
View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call on the Polycom Touch
Control.............................................................................................................284
View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call on the Polycom Touch Control. 284
Provisioning Service Registration Failure....................................................................... 284
Call Detail Report (CDR).................................................................................................284
Enable the Call Detail Report............................................................................... 288
Download a Call Detail Report (CDR).................................................................. 288
Troubleshoot a Manual System Software Update...........................................................288
Knowledge Base............................................................................................................. 288
Before You Contact Polycom Technical Support.............................................................289
Locate the System Serial Number........................................................................289
Locate the Software Version................................................................................ 289
Locate Active Alert Messages.............................................................................. 289
Locate the IP Address and H.323 Extension Settings..........................................289
Locate the LAN Status......................................................................................... 289
Locate Diagnostics on the Local Interface........................................................... 290
Contacting Technical Support......................................................................................... 290
Polycom Solution Support.................................................................................... 290
12
Contents
System Panel Views.......................................................................................291

Polycom RealPresence Group 300 System....................................................................291
Polycom RealPresence 500 System...............................................................................294
Port Usage...................................................................................................... 301

Inbound Ports for RealPresence Group Series...............................................................301
Outbound Ports for RealPresence Group Series............................................................ 305
Security Profile Default Settings...................................................................312

Maximum Security Profile Default Settings..................................................................... 312
Changing Maximum Security Profile Default Values............................................ 324
Other Restrictions When Using the Maximum Security Profile............................ 325
High Security Profile Default Settings............................................................................. 325
Changing High Security Profile Default Values.................................................... 336
Medium Security Profile Default Settings........................................................................336
Changing Medium Security Profile Default Values............................................... 346
Low Security Profile Default Settings.............................................................................. 347
Call Speeds and Resolutions........................................................................ 358

Point-to-Point Call Speeds.............................................................................................. 358
Multipoint Call Speeds.................................................................................................... 358
High-Profile Call Speeds and Resolutions...................................................................... 359
Multipoint Resolutions for High Definition Video............................................................. 360
Resolution and Frame Rates for Content Video............................................................. 361
13
Before You Begin
Topics:
• Related Poly and Partner Resources

• Privacy Policy
The Polycom RealPresence Group Series Administrator Guide is for administrators who need to install
system software, options, and accessories, and to configure, customize, manage, and troubleshoot
Polycom® RealPresence® Group Series systems.
This guide covers the RealPresence Group 300, RealPresence Group 310, RealPresence Group 500,
and RealPresence Group 700 systems.
This guide provides concepts and general guidance to the system administrator. Polycom expects the
administrator to be a mid-grade IT professional who is experienced in system administration.
Please read the Polycom system documentation before you install or operate the system. The following
related documents for systems are available at Polycom Support:
• Polycom RealPresence Group Series Setup Sheet : Describes the contents of your package, how
to assemble the system and accessories, and how to connect the system to the network. The setup
document is included in the system package.
• Polycom RealPresence Group Series Quick Tips : Quick reference on how to use basic features
• Polycom RealPresence Group Series User Guide : Describes how to perform video conferencing
tasks in the system local interface
• Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference Guide: Provides cable information and
API command descriptions
• Polycom RealPresence Group Series Regulatory Notices : Describes safety and legal
considerations for using Polycom RealPresence Group Series systems
• Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release Notes
Polycom recommends that you record the serial number and option key of your system here for future
reference. The serial number for the system is printed on the unit.
System Serial Number: ____________________________________________
Option Key: ____________________________________________________
Related Poly and Partner Resources

See the following sites for information related to this product.
• The Poly Online Support Center is the entry point to online product, service, and solution support
information including Video Tutorials, Documents & Software, Knowledge Base, Community
Discussions, Poly University, and additional services.
• The Poly Document Library provides support documentation for active products, services, and
solutions. The documentation displays in responsive HTML5 format so that you can easily access
and view installation, configuration, or administration content from any online device.
• The Poly Community provides access to the latest developer and support information. Create an
account to access Poly support personnel and participate in developer and support forums. You can
14
Before You Begin
find the latest information on hardware, software, and partner solutions topics, share ideas, and
solve problems with your colleagues.
• The Poly Partner Network is a program where resellers, distributors, solutions providers, and unified
communications providers deliver high-value business solutions that meet critical customer needs,
making it easy for you to communicate face-to-face using the applications and devices you use
every day.
• The Poly Services help your business succeed and get the most out of your investment through the
benefits of collaboration.
Privacy Policy
Poly products and services process customer data in a manner consistent with the Poly Privacy Policy.
Please direct comments or questions to [email protected]
15
Getting Started
Topics:
• High Definition Video Conferencing

• User Interface Customization
• Security Setting Management
• Call Setting Configuration
• Powering On and Off
• Navigating the System
High Definition Video Conferencing

RealPresence Group Series systems offer the following high-definition (HD) capabilities:
• Send people or content video to the far site in HD
• Receive and display video from the far site in HD
• Display near-site video in HD
• Full-motion HD
Systems with HD capability can send video in wide-screen, HD format. To send video in HD format, use
any model of Polycom camera that supports HD video and a Polycom system capable of sending 720p or
better video.
When the far site sends HD video, RealPresence Group Series systems with HD capability and an HD
monitor can display the video in wide-screen, HD format. The HD 720 format supported by these systems
is 1280 x 720, progressive scan format (720p). RealPresence Group Series systems with 1080 capability
can receive 1080p progressive format and can display 1080p progressive or 1080i interlaced format.
Near-site video is displayed in HD format when you use an HD video source and an HD monitor.
However, near-site video is displayed in SD if the system is in an SD or lower-resolution call.
To use HD for a multipoint call, keep the following requirements in mind:
• The call must be hosted by a system or a conferencing platform that supports HD such as Polycom
RealPresence Collaboration Server 1500 or 2000.
• The system host must have the appropriate option keys installed.
• All systems in the call must support HD (720p at 30 fps) and H.264.
• The call rate must be high enough to support HD resolution.
• The call cannot be cascaded.
16
Getting Started
User Interface Customization

You can use the RealPresence Group Series system web interface to configure how information is
displayed for end users on the Home screen of the system local interface.
Home Screen Icons appear in the lower center of the system local interface, three at a time. By default,
users see the icons shown in the following table in this location.
Icon Name
Camera
Opens the Camera Control screen.
Place a Call
Opens the Place a Call screen, where you can
manually dial a call, or can select a contact name from
a list.
Content
Appears only when a content source is detected.
Security Setting Management

To configure your RealPresence Group Series system security settings using the system web interface,
use a supported browser with cookies enabled. For a list of supported browsers and version numbers,
refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release Notes .
To access the system web interface, open a web browser and enter the IP address of the system using
the https protocol; for example, use the format https://10.11.12.13.
Caution: The HTTPS protocol ensures that the configuration of all login information (such as user
names and passwords) is transmitted using an encrypted channel, including those user
names and passwords used to communicate with third-party systems on your network. Using
HTTPS severely limits the ability of anyone on the network to discover these credentials. For
this reason, all attempts to use the system web interface via HTTP are redirected to the
HTTPS interface.
You can find security settings and passwords in the system web interface at Admin Settings > Security.
Settings are under different sections of the security interfaces. In accordance with local laws and
regulations, not all security settings are available in all countries.
Related Links
Access the System Web Interface on page 19
17
Getting Started
Call Setting Configuration

The RealPresence Group Series system call settings screen allows you to determine which settings are
available to users when they place and answer calls in the system local interface.
Powering On and Off

After you have connected all of the equipment that you will use with the RealPresence Group Series
system, connect the power cable and power on the system. Note that Polycom RealPresence Group 300,
310, 500, and 700 systems do not have what you might think of as a power button—they have a power
proximity sensor. Instead of pressing an actual button that moves, you touch the sensor (or near the
sensor) that indicates power on the front of the system.
Note: Make sure that the system is powered off before you connect devices to it or before you unplug
the power cable. Do not unplug the power cable when the system is powered on.
Power On the System

You can use the remote control or the power sensor to power on the RealPresence Group 300, 310, and
500 systems.
Do one of the following:
• If the system is asleep, using the remote control, press any button or pick it up to wake the system.
• Press on the remote control.
• Touch the power sensor on the front of the system.
The Polycom screen is displayed within about 10 seconds.
Related Links
Configure Remote Control Behavior on page 193
Power Off the System on page 18
Power Off the System

You can use the remote control or the power sensor to power off the RealPresence Group 300, 310, and
500 systems.
• Press and hold on the remote control.
• Touch and hold the power sensor on the front of the system.
The indicator light changes color and blinks, indicating that the system is shutting down. Release the
power sensor when the indicator light changes color.
Related Links
Power On the System on page 18
18
Getting Started
Powering On the RealPresence Group 700 System

You can use the remote control or the power sensor to power off the RealPresence Group 700 system.
The RealPresence Group 700 system can be powered on and off with the remote using the same buttons
as shown for the other RealPresence Group Series systems; however, the RealPresence Group 700
system supports a low-power standard that limits the power supplied to the camera when the system is
powered off. So, if the EagleEye IV or EagleEye III camera is receiving its power only from the HDCI
connector attached to the system, it will not have an active IR receiver capable of powering on the system
using the handheld remote when in the Power Off state.
• Provide direct power to the EagleEye III or EagleEye IV camera with the optional EagleEye camera
power supply, 1465-52748-040. This allows the IR sensor to remain in a Power On state, so that the
camera is capable of receiving IR commands from the remote control.
• Position the RealPresence Group Series system so that the IR receiver on the front of the system
has a line-of- sight to the remote control.
• Use a third-party IR extender to extend the IR signal from the room to the IR receiver on the front of
the system.
Navigating the System

You can navigate the RealPresence Group Series system using the system web interface.
Access the System Web Interface

You can use the system web interface to perform many of the same calling and configuration tasks you
can perform on the local interface.
To configure your browser to use the system web interface, you must do the following:
• Use a supported browser.
• Configure your browser to allow cookies.
Login credentials are user IDs and passwords that identify the user and define the user's ability to access
the system. You can configure both local and remote access for users.
The system web interface supports the most commonly used web browsers. For a list of supported
browsers, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release Notes at Polycom Support.
Note: For security purposes, Polycom recommends that you follow best practices when logging into the
Polycom® RealPresence® Group Series system web interface. Use an updated browser version
and do not browse the internet while logged in to the system.
Procedure
1. Open a web browser and enter the system IP address.
2. Enter the username (the default is admin).
3. Enter the password, if one is set.
Related Links
Security Setting Management on page 17
Run the Setup Wizard from a Remote Location on page 27
19
Getting Started
Changing a Password
Polycom recommends that you change the default Admin ID and the default password for your
RealPresence Group Series system. Keep the following naming conventions in mind:
• The string “root” cannot be used as an ID.
• ID and password strings are not case sensitive.
Note: Make sure you can recall the admin password if you set one. If you forget the password,
you must use the restore button to run the setup wizard again to access the Admin
Settings in the system web interface and reset the password.
Search the Web Interface

In a text box just under the IP Address bar on the RealPresence Group Series system web interface
Place a Call screen, you can enter a search term to receive a list of system web screens. For instance, if
you type Call, the system generates a list of screens that match your search term, such as Call
Settings, Recent Calls, and Time in Call.
Procedure
1. In the Search box, type a text string.
2. Select any of the search results to go directly to that screen in the system web interface.
20
Setting Up System Hardware
Topics:
• Mount and Position the System

• Setting Up a Microphone
• Setting Up the Polycom StereoSurround Kit
• Adding a Touch Monitor
• Adding a Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 Conference Phone
Mount and Position the System

This manual provides information to supplement the setup sheets provided with your RealPresence
Group Series system and its elective peripherals. A printed copy of the setup sheet is provided with each
system. PDF versions of the setup sheets are available at Polycom Support.
RealPresence Group Series systems are designed to be placed on tabletops or in equipment racks. If the
system or any accessories are installed in an enclosed space, such as a cabinet, ensure that the air
temperature in the enclosure does not exceed 40°C (104° F). You might need to provide forced cooling to
keep the equipment within the operating temperature range.
Note: Keep ventilation openings free of any obstructions.
Procedure
1. Do one of the following:
• If you plan to place the system on a table or open shelf, attach the self-adhesive feet to the
bottom of the system.
• If you plan to mount a RealPresence Group 700 system in an equipment rack, install the
mounting brackets, as shown in the following figure.
•RealPresence Group 300, 310, and 500 systems use a different type of mounting bracket.
For more information, refer to Polycom Support or contact your Polycom distributor.
2. Place the system in the desired location, keeping in mind the following pointers:
• Position the system so that the camera does not face toward a window or other source of
bright light.
• Leave enough space to connect the cables easily.
• Place the camera and display together so that people at your site face the camera when
they are looking at the display.
21
Setting Up a Microphone
To receive and send audio, you must connect and configure both microphones and speakers. For specific
details regarding how to connect audio inputs and speakers, refer to the appropriate RealPresence Group
Series system setup sheet. For information about required audio cables, refer to the Polycom
RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference Guide.
Related Links
Set Up Third-party Microphones on page 22
System Panel Views on page 291
Available Microphone Inputs by System

Make sure that the system is powered off before you connect audio devices to it. The number of audio
inputs varies based on the RealPresence Group Series system you are using.
Related Links
Microphone Inputs for RealPresence Group 300/310/500

The RealPresence Group 300, RealPresence Group 310, and RealPresence Group 500 systems have
one microphone input, as shown in the following figure.
Microphone Inputs for RealPresence Group 700

The RealPresence Group 700 system has two microphone inputs. You can freely configure the way you
connect devices to a system, as long as you do not exceed the limits mentioned in the following sections.
If you are using the RealPresence Group 700 system, you can connect devices to either or both inputs as
long as you stay within the guidelines for the total number of devices allowed for the system.
Set Up Third-party Microphones

You can connect third-party microphones directly to audio input 1 on a RealPresence Group Series
system, or through a line-level mixer to the AUX audio input on any system. You can configure a system
to use non-Polycom microphones.
22
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video/Content > Audio > Audio
Input.
2. Select Playback to Far Sites, Mute Controlled, if available.
3. If echo cancellation is preferred, select Playback to Far Sites, Mute Controlled, Echo
Cancelled, if available.
4. Speak into the microphones that are connected to the audio line inputs. The audio meter should
peak at about 5 dB for normal speech.
5. Select Save.
Related Links
Setting Up a Microphone on page 22
Available Microphone Inputs by System on page 22
SoundStructure Digital Mixer on page 23
SoundStructure Digital Mixer

You can connect several microphones to a system through a Polycom audio mixer. Connecting a
Polycom audio mixer to RealPresence Group Series systems provides flexibility in audio setup. The
SoundStructure C-Series mixer connects to the digital microphone connector on a system, and no
configuration is necessary.
When incorporating a SoundStructure digital mixer, remember the following:
• Connect a SoundStructure digital mixer using the digital microphone input on the room system.
• Adjusting the volume on a system changes the volume of the SoundStructure digital mixer that is
connected.
• The following configuration settings are not available on a system when a SoundStructure digital
mixer is connected: Audio input 1 (Line In), Bass, Treble, Enable Polycom Microphones, Enable M-
Mode™, and Enable Keyboard Noise Reduction.
• The system Line Output is muted when a SoundStructure digital mixer is connected.
• All echo cancellation is performed by the SoundStructure digital mixer.
The digital mixer allows you to provide a microphone for each call participant in a boardroom. For
connection details, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference Guide.
Related Links
Setting Up the Polycom StereoSurround Kit

The Polycom StereoSurround kit is designed for use with RealPresence Group Series systems. It
includes two speakers and a subwoofer.
When a system is configured for Polycom StereoSurround, the audio inputs and outputs are all treated as
stereo. Otherwise, all audio inputs and outputs are mono.
When you set up the system for StereoSurround, the left microphone and speaker should be on the left
from the local room perspective. Place the speaker connected to the audio system's right channel on the
right side of the system, and the other speaker on the left side. The system reverses the left and right
23
channels for the far site, as shown in the following illustration. This ensures that the sound comes from
the appropriate side of the room.
For best results, place the speakers about 60° apart as seen from the center of the conference table, as
shown next.
If you use the subwoofer in the Polycom StereoSurround kit, place it beside a wall or in a corner near the
speakers, as shown next.
Adding a Touch Monitor

RealPresence Group systems have touch user interface capability when connected to touch-capable
monitors. The local user interface works with both touch interaction and the RealPresence Group Series
24
system remote control. When the Polycom® VisualBoard™ Application or Skype for Business content is
playing, the touch is redirected to those interfaces for control and annotation. When these tools are
minimized to show the main user interface, or when a notification comes up, touch is directed to the
primary monitor so that user can control the user interface.These are the supported monitor scenarios:
• Single touch monitor: If only one touch monitor is detected, touch interactions are enabled by
default. You can now interact with the primary user interface using touch. When VisualBoard or
Skype for Business content is playing, the touch is redirected to those interfaces for control and
annotation. When these tools are minimized to show the main user interface, or when a notification
is displayed, touch is directed to primary so that user can control the primary user interface.
• Two or more monitors: For multiple monitor setups, and if at least one monitor is touch, touch
interaction is not enabled by default.
◦ If the touch monitor is attached as primary, and is configured as a touch monitor, touch
interaction is enabled on that monitor to control the primary user interface.
◦ The Diagnostic configuration setting appears only if there is more than one monitor attached
to the system, and there is at least one touch monitor attached.
To enable the touch monitor interface on RealPresence Group 300 and RealPresence Group 310
systems, you must activate the dual monitor option key in the system's web interface.
All of the systems provide one serial port to allow you to control the system through a touch-panel using
the API. The RealPresence Group 700 system also provides one serial port, but depending on your
system's capabilities, you might be able to use the RS-232 serial port to control the system through a
touch panel using the API.
When the USB interface is connected to a RealPresence Group Series system, a touch option appears
on your touch monitor screen. If the USB interface is either disconnected or switched away from the
system, it reconfigures to not use the touch capability, assuring the system is available to users.
Ensure that the system is powered off before you connect devices to it.
Touch Monitor Support

The VisualBoard application supports several different touch monitors for use with RealPresence Group
Series systems. For a list of supported monitors, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
Release Notes at Polycom Support. To enable the touch monitor interface on RealPresence Group 300
and RealPresence Group 310 systems, you must activate the dual monitor option key in the system's web
interface.
Install a Second Monitor for Use With the VisualBoard Application

To install a touch or standard monitor as a second monitor, follow the steps in this section. For
RealPresence Group 310 systems, you must have a dual option key installed to use a second monitor
with the system. Polycom recommends the use of digital output for content (DVI-D or HDMI) instead of
analog (VGA or YPbPr) when using the VisualBoard application. Digital content produces the optimum
results with alignment of the VisualBoard application.
Procedure
1. Connect the video cable by doing one of the following:
• Connect one end of an HDMI cable to the HDMI Input port on the monitor. Connect the other
end of the HDMI cable to the Monitor 2 HDMI Output port on the system.
•
If your monitor has only a DVI input port, use a DVI-HDMI adaptor to connect it to the HDMI
output port of the system.
2. Connect the touch monitor to the system.
25
If you are using a Polycom UC Board sensor with your current content monitor, the sensor is
connected to the system.
a. Connect one end of a USB cable to the USB port on the touch monitor.
b. Connect the other end of the USB cable to the USB port on the system.
A USB storage device can also be installed in the second USB port on the system for
importing and exporting slides, images, or photos.
3. To connect cables from the monitor 2 or the touch monitor to the system, refer to the next figure.
Adding a Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 Conference

Phone
When you connect a Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 conference phone to a RealPresence Group Series
system, the conference phone becomes another way to dial audio or video calls. The conference phone
also operates as a microphone, and as a speaker in audio-only calls. For more information, refer to the
following documents at Polycom Support:
• Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 Conference Phone Connected to a Polycom RealPresence Group
System in Unsupported VoIP Environments Integration Guide
• Polycom SoundStation IP 7000 Conference Phone Connected to a Polycom RealPresence Group
System in Unsupported VoIP Environments User Guide
26
Running the Setup Wizard
Topics:
• Run the Setup Wizard Locally

• Run the Setup Wizard from a Remote Location
When you power on your RealPresence Group Series system or enter the IP address for the first time,
the setup wizard detects the system's IP connections and leads you through the minimum configuration
steps. The setup wizard is also called the out-of-box (OOB) wizard. The setup wizard is available during
initial setup, after a software update or system reset with system settings deleted, or after using the
restore button.
You can install the system software in either of two ways:
• In the room with the system — Use the remote control to navigate the screens and enter
information. You can use the number pad on the remote control to enter text. Point the remote
control at the camera to control the system.
• From a remote location — If you know the IP address of the system, you can access and configure
the system by using the system's web interface.
Related Links
Run the Setup Wizard from a Remote Location on page 27
Run the Setup Wizard Locally on page 27
Run the Setup Wizard Locally

You must launch and run the setup wizard to begin configuring your RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
» After you power on the system for the first time and the setup wizard launches, navigate the
screens and perform the required steps to configure the system.
The setup wizard allows you to set an Admin ID and password, where you can limit access to the
Admin Settings. The default Admin ID is admin and the default admin password is the 14-digit
system serial number on the Settings > System Information > Information > System Detail
screen in the local interface or on the back of the system.
Related Links
Running the Setup Wizard on page 27
Run the Setup Wizard from a Remote Location

You can launch and run the setup wizard from a remote location to begin configuring your RealPresence
Group Series system on the system web interface. If you know the IP address of the system, you can
access and configure it using the system web interface.
Procedure
1. Enter the IP address of your system in the system web interface.
27
Running the Setup Wizard
2. Navigate the screens and perform the required steps to configure the system.
After the system starts up from the setup wizard (OOB) wizard, you might be unable to gain
access to system web interface for up to a minute. This can occur after the IP address displays on
the local interface.
Related Links
Running the Setup Wizard on page 27
Access the System Web Interface on page 19
28
Configuring General System Settings
Topics:
• Name the System

• Enter Contact Information
• Set the Location
• Set the Language
• Set the Date and Time
• Displaying Participant Names Continuously in a Call
Name the System

The RealPresence Group Series system name displays on the screens of far-end sites during a call.
The system interface supports the 16 language fonts listed in the following figure. Other languages might
not display correctly. It is recommended that the first character of a system name must be a letter or a
number. The system supports double-byte characters.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings >
System Name.
2. In the System Name field, enter a name and click Save.
Enter Contact Information

Enter contact information for your RealPresence Group Series system so that users know whom to call
when they need assistance.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > My Information >
Contact Information.
2. Configure the following settings.
29
Setting Description
Contact Person Specifies the name of the system administrator.
Contact Number Specifies the phone number for the system

administrator.
Contact Email Specifies the email address for the system

administrator.
Contact Fax Specifies the fax number for the system

administrator.
Tech Support Specifies the name of the person who provides

technical support.
City Specifies the city where the system administrator is

located.
State/Province Specifies the state or province where the system

administrator is located.
Country Specifies the country where the system

administrator is located.
Help Desk Number Specifies the phone number of the help desk,
displayed on the RealPresence Touch device only.
After this setting is configured on RealPresence
Touch device, users can tap Call Help Desk to
place an audio-only call to the help desk.
Set the Location

Specify the country and country code where the RealPresence Group Series system is located.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > My Information >
Location.
2. Configure these settings.
Setting Description
Country Specifies the country where the system is located.

Changing the country automatically adjusts the
country code associated with your system.
Country Code Displays the country code associated with the

system location.
30
Set the Language

You can select from 16 different languages to display in the RealPresence Group Series local and system
web interfaces.
Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Language and select
the language to use in the interface.
Set the Date and Time

On either the system web interface, you can set the date and time settings for your RealPresence Group
Series system.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Date and Time >
System Time.
2. Configure these settings:
Setting Description
Date Format Specifies how the date is displayed in the interface.

Note: This a web-only setting.
Time Format Specifies how the time is displayed in the interface.
Auto Adjust for Daylight Saving Time Specifies the daylight saving time setting. When
you enable this setting, the system clock
automatically changes for daylight saving time.
Note: This a web-only setting.
Time Zone Specifies the time difference between GMT

(Greenwich Mean Time) and your location.
Time Server Specifies whether the connection to a time server is

automatic or manual for system time settings. You
can also select Off to enter the date and time
yourself.
Primary Time Server Address Specifies the address of the primary time server to
use when Time Server is set to Manual.
Secondary Time Server Address Specifies the address of the time server to use
when the Primary Time Server Address does not
respond. This is an elective field.
31
Setting Description
Current Date and Current Time • If the Time Server is set to Manual or Auto,
these settings are not displayed.
• If the Time Server is set to Off, these settings
are configurable.
3. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Date and Time > Time
in Call.
4. Configure these settings:
Setting Description
Show Time in Call Choose one of the following options:

• Elapsed Time: Amount of time in the call.
• System Time: Current time set on the system.
• Off: Time doesn’t display.
When to Show Choose one of the following options:

• Start of the call only
• Entire call
• Once per hour: At the beginning of the hour for
one minute.
• Twice per hour: At the beginning of the hour
and halfway through the hour for one minute.
Show Countdown Before Next Meeting When enabled, a timer displays and counts down
to the next scheduled meeting 10 minutes before it
starts. (If another timer is already showing, the
countdown replaces it.)
The countdown displays only when you enable the
calendaring service.
Displaying Participant Names Continuously in a Call

Administrators can configure a system to display participant names throughout a conference call.
This setting is available on RealPresence Group Series 500 and 700 systems for multipoint calls only.
Configure Participant Name Display

You can allow participants in a multipoint call to see participant names throughout the call.
Procedure
Call Settings.
2. At Display Participant Names in Multipoint Video, select one of the following:
32
• Auto: After participants join a call, their names are displayed for 10 seconds (default).
• Always: Participant names are displayed throughout a call.
3. Select Save.
33
Using a Provisioning Service
Topics:
• Enable a Provisioning Service

• Configure a Provisioning Service
• Disable a Provisioning Service
• ZTP Web Service Solution
• Certificates and Security Profiles within a Provisioned System
• Set Up Multitiered Directory Navigation
If your organization uses a RealPresence Resource Manager system or a BroadSoft BroadWorks® Device
Management System (DMS) system, you can manage systems in dynamic management mode. In
dynamic management mode, the following might be true:
• Polycom systems are registered to a standards-based presence service, so presence states are
shared with Contacts.
• Polycom systems have access to a corporate directory that supports LDAP access.
• The Domain, User Name, Password, and Server Address fields are populated on the Provisioning
Service screen.
• Provisioned settings are read-only in the system web interface. Settings that are dependent on
provisioned values are read-only or unavailable.
• The system automatically checks for and runs software updates every time it restarts and at an
interval set by the service.
• You can upload a provisioned bundle from an already configured system. When systems request
provisioning, the bundle and automatic settings are downloaded.
• With administrative permissions, you can change a system’s settings after a bundle is applied (a
new bundle also overwrites manual settings).
• If a registered system fails to detect the service when it restarts or checks for updates, an alert
displays on System Status.
• If the system loses registration with the service, it continues to use the most recent configuration it
received.
• If a Polycom Touch Control is connected to a provisioned RealPresence Group Series system, a
RealPresence Resource Manager system can receive status updates from the Polycom Touch
Control and can provide software updates to the Polycom Touch Control. For supported
RealPresence Resource Manager versions, go to http://support.polycom.com/PolycomService/
support/us/support/service_policies.html and click the Current Interoperability Matrix link.
If you use BroadSoft DMS provisioning, note the following points:
• Bundled provisioning is not supported.
• Provisioning uses the same XML-based profile used for dynamic provisioning.
• Provisioned fields are read only.
Related Links
Enable PKI Certificates on page 110
34
Enable a Provisioning Service

You can register your RealPresence Group Series system with a provisioning service in one of the
following ways:
• Running the setup wizard, which indicates if your system detects a provisioning service on the
network.
The setup wizard is available during initial setup, after a system reset when you delete system
settings, or when you factory reset the system.. For information about configuring the RealPresence
Resource Manager system so that Polycom systems detect and register with it, see the Polycom
RealPresence Resource Manager System Operations Guide.
• You can enter the registration information and attempt to register by going to the Admin Settings in
the Polycom system web interface.
Note: A valid host name must start with an alphabetic character and include only alphanumeric
characters or dashes. The length should be from 1 to 63 characters.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Provisioning Service.
2. Select Enable Provisioning.
Configure a Provisioning Service

After you enable the provisioning service, the RealPresence Group Series system should complete the
following fields automatically. If the system does not complete the fields automatically, get the information
from your network administrator. Multiple Polycom systems can be registered to a single user.
Procedure
2. At Enable Provisioning, select the checkbox.
3. Configure these settings for automatic provisioning.
Setting Description
Server Type Specifies the type of provisioning server. Select

RPRM or DMS.
• RPRM is the RealPresence Resource Manager.
• DMS is the Broadsoft BroadWorks Device
Management System.
Domain Name Domain for registering with the provisioning

service.
User Name System user name for registering to the

provisioning service.
35
Setting Description
Password Password for registering with the provisioning

service.
Server Address Address of the system running the provisioning

service.
4. Select Save or Update.

The system tries to register with the RealPresence Resource Manager or with a DMS system
using NTLM authentication.
5. Verify that Registration Status changes from Pending to Registered.
It might take a minute or two for the status to change.
Related Links
Set Up Multitiered Directory Navigation on page 37
Disable a Provisioning Service

You can disable a provisioning service on the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
2. Disable the Enable Provisioning setting.
ZTP Web Service Solution

The ZTP solution is a cloud-based web service designed to simplify the deployment of Polycom devices.
The Polycom ZTP console is a web interface that you can use to create and manage profiles and device
associations. The ZTP solution is intended as a one-time step at initial deployment. Usually, end
customers require a supplier or skilled installer to deploy devices out-of-the-box. The ZTP web console
enables you to create provisioning profiles so that you can associate with one or more devices. These
profiles enable end customers to install the devices themselves. The profiles also provide a central
provisioning server address that automatically redirects multiple customer devices to your provisioning
server. In addition to setting the provisioning server address, you can use the solution to provision
RealPresence Group systems that are running version 5.0 software or later.
For information about deploying the solution, refer to the Polycom Zero Touch Provisioning Guide at
Polycom Support.
Certificates and Security Profiles within a Provisioned

System
When your RealPresence Group Series system is provisioned through the RealPresence Resource
Manager system and you use PKI certificates, consider the following information. Be sure to enable
provisioning after you follow the procedures applicable to each Security Profile type.
• To use the Maximum Security Profile with provisioning:
36
◦ The RealPresence Resource Manager system must be using Maximum Security Mode.
◦ You must manually assign the Maximum Security Profile to the system during installation
using the setup wizard, or afterwards using the system web interface.
◦ You must use full PKI and observe the following procedures before you enable provisioning
on the system:
1. You must install a signed client certificate on the system to enable the provisioning
connection to be authenticated by the RealPresence Resource Manager system.
2. Decide whether to automatically validate web clients by enabling the Always Validate
Peer Certificates from Browsers setting. If you do enable the setting, you'll need to
install a signed server certificate and all of the CA certificates needed to validate
browser certificates for all web clients. Then configure the certificate revocation
method.
3. Decide whether to validate servers by enabling the Always Validate Peer
Certificates from Servers setting. If you do enable the setting, you must install of the
CA certificates needed to validate server certificates from all remote servers. Then
adjust the certificate revocation method accordingly. For example, you might need to
load additional CRLs if you use the CRL revocation method).
• To use the Medium or High Security Profile with provisioning:
◦ The RealPresence Resource Manager system must be using commercial mode.
◦ You must manually assign the Medium or High Security Profile to the system during
installation using the setup wizard, or afterwards using the system web interface.
◦ Configure PKI according to your company's guidelines.
• To use the Low Security Profile with provisioning:
◦ The RealPresence Resource Manager system must be using commercial mode.
◦ You can enable provisioning in the setup wizard. All provisionable settings are taken from the
RealPresence Resource Manager system.
Set Up Multitiered Directory Navigation

You can use the RealPresence Resource Manager to navigate the RealPresence Group Series system
directories or contacts. Contacts are displayed in a hierarchical format, where you can select the top
directory and search for contacts within each level of the directory hierarchy.
This feature is supported using a RealPresence Resource Manager server (LDAP) and does not include
standalone LDAP servers or other global directory servers.
The following limitations apply to this feature:
• You can use RealPresence Resource Manager 7.1 and higher only.
• You can search and navigate up to three directory levels.
• You cannot use the Polycom Touch Control to navigate the system LDAP directories.
• This feature is supported on dynamically-managed video conferencing systems only.
Procedure
1. Go to Admin Settings > Servers > Directory Servers and make selections for each setting.
2. Go to Admin Settings > Servers > Provisioning Service and enable provisioning.
37
Related Links
Configure a Provisioning Service on page 35
Setting Up and Configuring Directory Servers on page 139
38
Activating System Options
Topics:
• System Software Options
System Software Options

System software options unlock certain features available for your system model. These options provide
additional functionality, such as multipoint video conferencing, Skype for Business interoperability, and
1080p video.
In the system local interface, activated system options have checkmarks next to them. The following
system options are available for your RealPresence Group Series system. Some options are not available
for certain systems. For example, RealPresence Group 300 and 310 systems do not support Multipoint
Video Conferencing.
• Multipoint Video Conferencing: This option enables your system to make video calls to more than
one site at a time. It also enabled you to make H.323 audio-only or SIP audio-only multipoint calls.
All H.323 audio-only and SIP audio-only connections count toward the number of sites in a call.
Multipoint calls require a multipoint conferencing unit (MCU) or a hosting system. Depending on
your system's configuration, you might be able to host multipoint calls.It is available for
RealPresence Group 500 and RealPresence Group 700 systems. To activate this feature, you must
purchase and install a key code.
• Telepresence Interoperability Protocol (TIP): This option improves the interoperability of systems
in environments with certain Cisco telepresence systems. To activate this feature, you must
purchase and install a key code.
• Skype for Business Interoperability License: This option enhances the video experience by
enabling the following Microsoft features for all RealPresence Group Series systems:
◦ Real-time video (RTV) provides higher resolutions during video calls when integrated with
Skype for Business Server 2015.
◦ The Microsoft version of H.264 SVC delivers a continuous presence style experience.
◦ Simulcast H.264 streams are now supported, allowing RealPresence Group Series systems
in SVC-enabled Skype calls to transmit multiple streams of the local video depending upon
the capabilities of the far-end systems. For example, far-end systems displaying high
resolution images receive high resolution images from the system, while simultaneously far-
end systems displaying low resolution images receive low resolution images from the system.
◦ Centralized Conferencing Control Protocol (CCCP) enables seamless participation in
multipoint video conferences hosted on Skype's audio/video server.
◦ The Skype AVMCU Spotlight feature enables the system to display only the broadcaster's
video when a participant is made the broadcaster in a call.
◦ RealPresence Group Series systems support Forward Error Correction (FEC) DV0 and DV1
in Skype for Business Server 2015 and Skype for Business 2015 client environments for both
H.264 SVC and RTV endpoints. The scheme introduces recovery packets on the transmitter
which recover lost video packets on the receiver. Enabling or disabling the Lost Packet
Recovery feature in the system web interface does not affect the negotiation of FEC.
◦ IPv6 is supported in Skype for Business Server 2015 and Skype for Business 2015 client
environments with IPv6 networks.
39
To activate this feature, you must purchase and install a key code.
• Advanced Video 1080p: This option makes encoded/decoded 1080p video and content available
to systems. To activate this feature, you must purchase and install a key code.
For information about integrating with Skype for Business Server 2015, refer to the Polycom Unified
Communications Deployment Guide for Microsoft Environments at Polycom Support.
Related Links
Activate System Options on page 41
Microsoft Interoperability on page 43
View System Software Options

You can view options supported on your RealPresence Group Series system in the system web interface.
Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Options.
Obtain Software or System Option Keys

A key is a number that unlocks certain features or gives you the ability to update your RealPresence
Group Series system.
To activate features or update software, you must obtain a key that’s valid only with your system. You can
obtain software or option keys for a single system or for multiple systems. If you don’t have a support
agreement, contact an authorized Poly dealer to get a key.
The following types of keys are available:
• Software keys are valid for the software updates you are installing as well as for any point,
maintenance, or patch releases that may later become available.
• Option keys activate software options and are valid across all software releases.
Procedure
1. Go to Polycom Support.
2. Go to Licensing & Product Registration > Activation/Upgrade at Polycom Support.
• Log in with your email address and password.
• Register as a new user.
• To update one system, select Site & Single Activation/Upgrade. Follow the onscreen
instructions to enter your system serial number and license. Go to the Upgrade tab to
confirm the version upgrade key code.
• To update multiple systems that are covered by a software service agreement, select Batch
Upgrade and choose your product. Follow the onscreen instructions to upload the text file
that contains your system license and serial numbers (or serial numbers only).
• To activate features for multiple systems covered by a software service agreement, select
Batch Activation. Follow the onscreen instructions to upload the text file that contains your
system license numbers and serial numbers (or serial numbers only). You are sent a text file
containing the requested keys for each system.
40
Related Links
Activate System Options on page 41
Preparing to Upgrade on page 265
Create a Single Key File to Update Multiple Systems

After you receive your key files from Polycom, you can create a single key file to upgrade multiple
RealPresence Group Series systems.
Procedure
1. Open the key files with a text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Copy the contents of one file to the end of the other file.
Repeat, as necessary.
3. Save the combined file with the name sw_keys.txt.
You now have a single text file that contains all of your keys for software updates. Use the keys in the file
to upgrade the applicable systems.
Key File Formats

Most key files use this format:
License Number <TAB>Serial Number<TAB>Key

For example, a text file with update license numbers, serial numbers, and
keys might look like this:
U1059-3131-6042-3609<TAB>8213190FFAE7D5<TAB>UBA5-1D6E-EB00-0000-0192
The following example shows a software update key file:
U1000-0000-0000-0000-0003<TAB>82041003E070B0<TAB>U8FB-0D4E-6E30-0000-0009
U1000-0000-0000-0000-0004<TAB>820327024193AK<TAB>U982-4507-5D80-0000-0009
The following example shows an option key file:
K1000-0000-0000-0000-0001<TAB>82041003F082B1<TAB>K15B-DC2D-E120-0000-0009
K1000-0000-0000-0000-0002<TAB>82041503E093B0<TAB>K27E-30F9-2D20-0000-0009
RealPresence Group Series systems covered by a software service agreement use a slightly different key
file format. The following is an example of a software update key file for such a system:
U<TAB>82041003F082B1<TAB>U7B6-698E-1640-0000-02C1
U<TAB>82041503E093B0<TAB>UCC1-C9A6-FE60-0000-02C1
U<TAB>82041003E070B0<TAB>UEC6-FDA0-8F00-0000-02C1
U<TAB>820327024193AK<TAB>U7B7-D6BD-3610-0000-02C1
Activate System Options

To activate certain features on your RealPresence Group Series system, you must use the system's web
interface to enter an option key. If you want to activate your system options without upgrading your
41
software, you do not need to download software or run the software update. The only thing you need is
the appropriate option key.
Procedure
1. Open the system web interface.
2. Navigate to Admin Settings > General Settings > Options.
3. In the Key field, enter the option key and click Save.
Related Links
System Software Options on page 39
Obtain Software or System Option Keys on page 40
42
Microsoft Interoperability
Topics:
• Skype for Business-Hosted Video Conferencing

• Register a System with Skype for Business
• Managing System Software Through Skype for Business Server
• Configure the Directory Services Contact List
• Dial Plan Normalization
• Support for Location-Based Routing in Skype for Business Hosted Calls
• Skype for Business Content Sharing
This chapter provides information for system administrators on interoperability with Microsoft products
and features. Assistance from Polycom Microsoft Integration Services is mandatory for Skype for
Business 2015 integrations. For additional details, refer to http://www.polycom.com/services/
professional_services/index.html or contact your local Polycom representative.
Some of the functionality that RealPresence Group Series systems support when integrated with
Microsoft includes the following:
• During active calls, the Skype for Business application and desktop sharing lets Skype clients share
content with RealPresence Group Series systems
• AES encryption automatically encrypts calls to other systems that have AES encryption enabled
• Real-time video (RTV) in Skype-hosted calls provides higher resolutions during video calls when
your system is integrated with Skype for Business Server 2015. This feature requires enabling the
Skype for Business Interoperability License key enabled on your system. The following functionality
is enabled using a RealPresence Group Series system or a RealPresence Touch device.
• Skype for Business 2015 media encryption in calls with systems that have encryption enabled
• Start video as an audio-only participant during point-to-point and conference calls
• Add additional contacts as audio-only participants to a meeting
• Accept or decline a video stream request
• Accept or decline incoming calls forwarded from a contact
• Restart a RealPresence Group Series system from a RealPresence Touch device
• Restart the RealPresence Touch device
For more information on these Microsoft features, refer to the Polycom Unified Communications for
Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at Polycom Support.
For information on limitations of this feature, see the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release Notes
for your software version at Polycom Support.
Related Links
System Software Options on page 39
43
Skype for Business-Hosted Video Conferencing

Skype for Business-hosted conferencing is supported only when Polycom endpoints are registered to
Skype for Business and the Skype for Business Interoperability License is enabled on the RealPresence
Group Series system. If you want to use the call management features, pair your system with a Polycom®
Touch Control or Polycom® RealPresence Touch™.
When using Skype for Business-hosted video conferencing, keep the following points in mind:
• When in a Skype for Business-hosted call, the system displays a Busy presence state and rejects
any incoming calls.
• When in a Skype for Business-hosted call, other multipoint calling methods, such as internal
multipoint hosting, RealPresence Collaboration Server (RMX) or RealPresence DMA hosted
conferencing, and Conference on Demand, are disabled.
• In SVC multipoint calls hosted on Skype for Business Server, you can view multiple far-end sites in
layouts. Note that when using RealPresence Group Series systems, layouts vary by model. On
RealPresence Group 300, 500, and 700 systems, you can view a maximum of five far-end sites.
In Skype for Business-hosted conferences, systems require a Polycom Touch Control or RealPresence
Touch to do the following:
• View conference participants
• Add participants to the conference
• Organize and initiate conferences with
• RealPresence Group Series and Skype for Business clients and groups
Register a System with Skype for Business

When you register a RealPresence Group Series system with a Skype for Business server, you can see a
list of Skype for Business contacts to call and whether these contacts are online. Up to five contacts can
display on the system home screen.
The H.263 codec has been deprecated, and the system requires a Skype for Business Interoperability
License to integrate with the Skype for Business Server.
Procedure
1. Open a browser window and enter the system IP address or host name in the Address field.
2. Go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network and select SIP.
3. Configure the following SIP settings for your Skype for Business environment.
Setting Description
Enable SIP Enables the system to make and receive SIP calls.
44
Setting Description
SIP Server Configuration Specifies how your system discovers the Skype for
Business Server.
• Select Auto if you set up your Skype for Business
Server configuration for automatic discovery.
Automatic discovery requires you to correctly
configure the Skype for Business SRV records.
• If you didn’t configure the Skype for Business
Server for automatic discovery, select Specify.
Transport Protocol The SIP network infrastructure that your RealPresence

Group Series system operates in determines the
required protocol.
• Auto enables an automatic negotiation of protocols
in the following order: TLS, TCP, and UDP. Polycom
recommends this setting for Microsoft
environments.
• TLS provides secure communication for SIP
signaling. TLS is available only when you register
the system with a SIP server that supports TLS.
When you choose this setting, the system ignores
TCP/UDP port 5060. Skype for Business requires
TLS to connect.
• TCP provides transport via TCP for SIP signaling.
Skype for Business requires signaling encryption,
so TCP doesn’t apply for Skype for Business.
• UDP provides transport via UDP for SIP signaling.
Force Connection Reuse This setting is disabled by default (recommended).

When disabled, the system uses an ephemeral source
port for all outgoing SIP messages.
When enabled, the system uses the active SIP listening
port as the source port (5060 or 5061, depending on
the negotiated SIP transport protocol in use). This can
be useful to establish correct operation with remote SIP
peer devices, which require that the source port match
the contact port in SIP messages.
45
Setting Description
BFCP Transport Preference Controls the negotiation behavior for content sharing
using BFCP. Establishes the relationship between the
floor control server and its clients, while the available
settings determine how network traffic flows between
the server and clients.
TCP is typically known as the older, slightly slower, and
more reliable method, but some deployments don’t
support it, such as with session border controllers
(SBCs).
• Prefer UDP—Starts resource sharing using UDP
but falls back to TCP if needed. This is the default
value when you enable SIP.
• Prefer TCP—Starts resource sharing using TCP
but falls back to UDP if needed.
• UDP Only—Shares resources only through UDP. If
UDP is unavailable, users can’t share content in a
separate video stream.
• TCP Only—Shares resources only through TCP. If
TCP is unavailable, users can’t share content in a
separate video stream.
Sign-in Address The system’s SIP name (the SIP URI or Skype for
Business sign-in address). Specify the address for the
conference room or user account created for the
Polycom system.
User Name The name and Windows Domain to use for

authentication when registering with a SIP registrar
server, for example,
[email protected].
RealPresence Group Series systems support the User
Principal Name format ([email protected])
and legacy Microsoft DOMAIN\user name format. If
the SIP server requires authentication, you can’t leave
this field and the password blank.
Password When enabled, you can specify and confirm a new

password that authenticates the system to the SIP
server.
46
Setting Description
Registrar Server If you select Specify in the SIP Server Configuration

field, you must specify the DNS name of the SIP
registrar server.
In a Skype for Business environment, specify the DNS
name of the Front End Pool or Director. The default
port is 5061.
If registering a remote RealPresence Group Series
system with an Edge Server, use the FQDN of the
Access Edge Server. The port for the Edge Server role
is usually 443 and you must enter it explicitly.
Polycom recommends using the DNS name. Use the
following format for entering the address and ports:
• DNS_NAME
• TCP_Port
• TLS_Port
Syntax Examples:
• To use the default port for the protocol you select,
enter the following: pool.corp.local
• To specify a different TLS port and use the default
TCP port, enter the following: pool.corp.local:
443
Proxy Server The DNS name or IP address of the SIP proxy server.
If you leave this field blank, the system uses the
registrar server. Note that in a Microsoft environment,
the proxy server and registrar server are always the
same, so you need to fill out only one server address
field.
If you select Auto in the SIP Server Configuration
field and leave the Proxy Server field blank, the
system doesn’t use a proxy server.
Default proxy server ports:
• For TCP, the system sends SIP signaling to port
5060 on the proxy server.
• For TLS, the system sends SIP signaling to port
5061 on the proxy server.
The syntax for this field is the same as the Registrar
Server field.
Registrar Server Type For the Skype for Business Server, select Microsoft.
47
Configure the Skype for Business Directory Server

You can register your RealPresence Group Series system with a Microsoft directory server to search,
add, and call contacts.
The global directory provides a list of other systems that are registered with the Global Directory Server
and are available for calls. Users can place calls to others by selecting their names.
The global directory searching feature doesn’t support directory servers that can’t store contents locally
on systems, including Microsoft Skype in Web Query mode.
For information on how to configure directory servers for Microsoft environments, see the Polycom
RealPresence Group Series for Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at Polycom Support.
You can configure your system with Skype for Business Server even when the system has been
provisioned.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > SIP.
2. Configure the SIP settings.
3. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Directory Servers and select the
Microsoft Service Type.
4. Configure the following settings on the Directory Servers screen.
Setting Description
Registration Status Specifies whether the system is successfully

registered with the Skype for Business Server.
Domain Name Enter the domain that your SIP username belongs
to.
Domain User Name The username entered on the SIP settings page.
This setting is read-only.
User Name The sign-in address entered on the SIP settings

page. This setting is read-only.
Related Links
Set Up Directory Servers for the RealPresence Touch on page 227
Org ID Authentication
RealPresence Group Series systems support the Org ID service to authenticate users who log in to Office
365.
The system sends a request to validate user credentials through Org ID. Upon successful authentication,
Org ID sends a service token in an encoded string format that the user is authenticated.
If authentication is not successful, a “Username or Password is incorrect” error message is displayed.
Upload Logs to the Skype for Business Server

You can upload diagnostic logs to the Skype for Business Server to provide the Skype for Business
administrator access to RealPresence Group Series device logs that can help the administrator
48
troubleshooting issues. The Skype for Business administrator can enable or disable support for this
option from the Skype for Business Server.
Procedure
1. In the web interface, navigate to Diagnostics > System > Logs.
2. Click Upload system log.
For information on uploading logs from the RealPresence Touch user interface, refer to the Polycom
RealPresence Group Series User Guide .
Managing System Software Through Skype for

Business Server
When your RealPresence Group Series system is provisioned with a Skype for Business server, the
system automatically detects software on the server. Software downgrades from version 6.1.5 to a
version no earlier than 6.1.1 are supported. If the Automatic Software Updates setting is configured for
a system registered to Skype for Business Online, the system will downgrade to the version on the Skype
for Business Online server.
A software downgrade occurs when the following conditions are met:
• The Skype for Business server version is lower than the RealPresence Group Series system
version.
• The system has automatic software updates enabled.
Configure System to Upgrade or Downgrade Software Through Skype

for Business Server
You can configure automatic software updates for RealPresence Group Series systems from a Skype for
Business server in the system web interface. Software downgrades from version 6.1.5 to a version no
earlier than 6.1.1 are supported. If the Automatic Software Updates setting is configured for a system
registered to Skype for Business Online, the system will downgrade to the version on the Skype for
Business Online server.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Software Updates.
2. At Automatic Software Updates, select Automatically Check for and Apply Software
Updates.
3. When the Export Restrictions notice appears, select Accept Agreement.
4. Select the Start Time and the Duration for the scheduled software updates.
5. Select Update Software from Skype for Business Server.
6. Enter your software key at Software key to Update Skype for Business Server.
7. Select Save.
49
Configure the Directory Services Contact List

You can configure display options for your Microsoft contacts in your RealPresence Group Series system
contact list. If you don't complete the Directory Services configuration, the Skype for Business Directory
search, personal favorites, and contacts list do not display in the Contacts menu.
Procedure
1. Open a browser window and in the Address field enter the system IP address or host name.
2. Go to Admin Settings > Servers > Directory Servers.
3. In the Skype for Business Server section of the Directory Servers page, configure these settings:
• Server Type Specifies whether the SIP Registrar Server is a Skype for Business Server. Enabling
this setting activates integration features such as the Microsoft global directory and Skype for
Business contact sharing with presence.
• Registration Status Upon successful authentication this field displays as Registered, as shown in
the next figure.
• Domain Name Specifies the Windows Domain to use for Directory lookup, for example,
windowsdomain.local.
RealPresence Group Series systems support the User Principal Name format
<windowsdomain.local> as well as the legacy Microsoft NETBIOS domain format.
Dial Plan Normalization

Dial Plan Normalization enables you to configure dial plans on the Skype for Business server.
For more information on regular expressions used on the Skype for Business server, see .NET
Framework Regular Expressions on the Microsoft Developer Network.
Enable Dial Plan Normalization

Enable Dial Plan Normalization when you want to receive and apply the dial plan to your system from the
Skype for Business server.
Dialing preferences help you manage the network bandwidth used for calls and establish a call
configuration on RealPresence Group Series systems.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference > Dialing
Options.
2. Enable the Enable Dial Plan Normalization in Microsoft Environment check box and select
Save.
50
Support for Location-Based Routing in Skype for

Business Hosted Calls
The RealPresence Group Series system now supports location-based routing (LBR) for Skype for
Business calls. Location-Based Routing make it possible to restrict the routing of calls between VoIP
endpoints and PSTN endpoints based on the location of the parites in the call.
Note: This feature is supported in Skype for Business VoIP calls in an IPv4 environment only.
The LBR feature introduces a new set of rules to prevent toll bypass by restricting the routing of an
outgoing call to a national or an international PSTN number as per the call authorization rules. You must
enable this feature on the Skype for Business server.
Skype for Business Content Sharing

You can scroll and zoom content on the system monitor, and systems can control content received from
Skype for Business clients. RDP content sharing does not require the Polycom RealPresence Group
Series system to be in an audio or video call.
You can control shared content from a Skype for Business client using a USB mouse and keyboard.
The following content types from Skype clients are available:
• All Monitors: Displays content from all monitors connected to the system with the Skype client.
• Primary Monitor: Displays content from the primary monitor connected to the system with the
Skype client.
• Secondary Monitor: Displays content from the secondary monitor connected to the system with
the Skype client.
• Program: Displays content from a particular program connected to the system with the Skype
client.
For content to display properly, Monitor 2 must support progressive mode (e.g., the resolution should be
set to 1280 × 720p or 1920 × 1080p). Interlaced mode for Monitor 2 is not supported (do not use
resolution settings such as 1920 × 1080i).
For information on limitations of this feature, see the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release Notes
for your software version at Polycom Support.
VbSS Support in Skype for Business Environments

RealPresence Group Series systems support Video-based Screen Sharing (VbSS), a Microsoft protocol
for sharing content. In releases prior to version 6.1.5, these systems supported only legacy Remote
Desktop Protocol (RDP) for receiving content. Only systems registered to Skype for Business support
VbSS content sharing.
Your RealPresence Group Series system can share VbSS content through HDMI or by using any of the
supported wireless sharing methods.
While Skype for Business supports VbSS sharing in point-to-point calls, RealPresence Group Series
systems support multipoint conferencing only. For point-to-point calls, RealPresence Group Series
systems are restricted to receiving legacy RDP content only.
51
The advantages of VbSS content sharing over RDP are as follows:

• Enables RealPresence Group Series systems to send and receive content using H.264 SVC
encoding; RealPresence Group Series systems using RDP can receive content only.
• Makes the session setup and video experience faster, with an improvement in the frames-per-
second.
• Works better in low-bandwidth conditions, even when sharing high motion content, such as 3-D
graphics.
RealPresence Group Series systems with the 1080p resolution option key enabled can achieve up to
1080p resolution. During a multipoint conference call while sharing content, you can expect the following
resolutions and frames-per-second.
System Type VbSS Content Sharing VbSS Content Sharing RDP Content Sharing
(Transmit) (Receive)
Skype for Business client Up to 1080p resolution, Up to 1080p resolution, Up to 1080p resolution, 5
15 fps 30 fps fps
RealPresence Group Up to 1080p resolution, Up to 1080p resolution, Up to 1080p resolution, 5

Series system 30 fps 30 fps fps
The following Microsoft environments do not support VbSS content sharing:

• Lync 2010
• Lync 2013
• Lync for Mac 2011
• Skype for Business on Mac (registered to Skype for Business On-Premises)
Configure VbSS to Display Content in Skype for Business Environments

If your video systems are configured to work with Skype for Business, you can allow your users to share
content using VbSS.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video/Content > Content.
2. At Microsoft Desktop Sharing, select Prefer VbSS.
3. Click Save.
Configure RDP Content Sharing

As an administrator, you can allow your users to share content using VbSS or RDP. Note that
RealPresence Group Series systems can receive RDP content, but cannot send RDP content. Certain
situations might require using RDP only. For example, VbSS is not supported when using a keyboard and
mouse with the system.
Procedure
2. At Microsoft Desktop Sharing, select RDP Only.
3. Click Save.
52
Disable Content Sharing

As an administrator, you can disable content sharing on RealPresence Group Series systems.
Procedure
2. At Microsoft Desktop Sharing, select Disable.
3. Click Save.
Scenarios Where VbSS Content Sharing Reverts to RDP

In calls involving RealPresence Group Series systems and Skype for Business clients, content sharing
can revert to RDP when VbSS isn’t supported.
Displayed content is not interrupted when reverting to RDP (you should only see a notification that VbSS
isn’t being used). Once reverted, RDP is used for the remainder of the call.
VbSS content sharing reverts to RDP in the following scenarios:
• Recording a call
• Sharing an application
• Taking control of a desktop sharing session
• Joining a call with a system or client that doesn’t support VbSS
• Sharing content with audio (also applies to RDP)
For more detailed information on these scenarios and others, see the following table.
Scenarios Where VbSS Content Sharing Reverts to RDP
Skype for Business Client Reverts to RDP RealPresence Group Series System Reverts to RDP
N/A A Skype for Business client tries to share VbSS content

in a point-to-point call. Your system supports VbSS in
conference calls only.
N/A Your system shares content in a conference a call, but

a participant doesn’t support VbSS.
Client shares content, but a client that doesn’t support N/A

VbSS joins the call.
Client shares an application. Workaround: Share your Your system supports sharing an application with
desktop instead. VbSS, but the transmission is slower than sharing the
desktop.
Client is sharing its desktop and another client tries to N/A

take control of the session.
Client shares its desktop and starts recording the N/A

meeting.
Mac client shares content in a Skype for Business On- N/A

Premises environment.
53
Calendaring Service
Topics:
• Enable the Calendaring Service

• Join Scheduled Meetings
RealPresence Group Series systems can connect to Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 to retrieve
calendar information for a specific Microsoft Outlook or a Microsoft Office 365 individual or system
account. The system connects to Microsoft Exchange Server using the credentials you provide or by
automatically discovering the connection information based on an email address or SIP server address.
Connection to a calendaring service allows the system to:
• Display the day's scheduled meetings, along with details about each
• Display a Join button on all scheduled meetings for the current day
• Let users join the meeting without knowing the connection details
• Hide or show details about meetings marked Private, depending on the configuration of the system
• Display a meeting reminder before each scheduled meeting, along with a reminder tone
Professional Services for Microsoft integration is mandatory for Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft
Outlook and Microsoft Office Communications Server integrations. For additional information and details,
please refer to http://www.poly.com/us/en/products/services or contact your local Polycom representative.
Enable the Calendaring Service

Before users can view their scheduled meetings on the RealPresence Group Series system local
interface, you must enable the Calendaring Service in the system web interface. Microsoft Exchange
Server 2013 and Skype for Business 2015 are supported.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Calendaring Service.
2. Select the Enable Calendaring Service check box.
3. Configure the following options;
Calendaring Settings
Setting Description
Email Specifies the email address used when scheduling

the system for a meeting (for instance, you can use
your system as a mechanism to reserve a meeting
space). This email address must match the Primary
SMTP Address for the account on Microsoft
Exchange Server, which displays as the value of
the mail attribute in the account properties.
54
Calendaring Service
Setting Description
Domain Specifies the domain to register to the Microsoft

Exchange Server in NETBIOS or DNS notation (for
example, company.local or COMPANY).
If you are using the Auto Discover Using setting
in the system web interface, don’t provide a value
here.
User Name Specifies the user name to register to the Microsoft

Exchange Server. This can be the name of the
system or an individual (for example,
[email protected]).
If you want to use the calendar associated with an
Office 365 account, enter the user name for that
account here.
Password Specifies the system password to register to the

Microsoft Exchange Server. This can be the
system's or an individual’s password.
If you want to use the calendar associated with an
Office 365 account, enter the password for that
account here.
Auto Discover Using Specifies how the system obtains the Microsoft
Exchange Server address. If you select Email
Address, the system uses the value provided in
the Email field. If you select SIP Server, the
system uses the registered SIP server domain
name configured for the system.
With either option, you must complete the Email,
User Name, and Password fields that correspond
to the account you want the system to use for the
calendaring service. The system may prompt you
to confirm the password.
If after configuring the calendaring service a
message displays that the system is unable to
discover the service, verify that the information you
provided is correct.
You can also use an API command to automatically
discover the Microsoft Exchange Server address.
For more information, go to the Poly Online
Support Center.
55
Calendaring Service
Setting Description
Microsoft Exchange Server Specifies the FQDN of the Microsoft Exchange

Client Access server. If your organization has
multiple servers behind a network load balancer,
this is the FQDN of the server’s virtual IP address.
If required, you can use an IP address instead of
an FQDN, but it’s recommended you use the same
FQDN for Outlook clients.
Provide a value here only if you want to manually
provide connection information to the Microsoft
Exchange Server. Otherwise, use the Auto
Discover Using setting to automatically populate
this field.
Enable OAuth Authentication Specifies whether to access the Microsoft

Exchange calendar using the OAuth 2.0 service
Secure Connection Protocol Specifies the connection protocol to connect to the

Microsoft Exchange Server/Skype for Business
Server.
Select Automatic or TLS 1.0.
Meeting Reminder Time in Minutes Specifies the number of minutes before the
meeting that a reminder displays on the system.
Play Reminder Tone When Not in a Call Specifies whether to play a sound along with the
text reminder (when the system is not in a call).
Show Information for Meetings Set to Private Specifies whether to display details about meetings
marked private.
4. Click Save.
For more information about using the calendar, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series User
Guide .
Join Scheduled Meetings

If your RealPresence Group Series system is configured to connect to the Microsoft Exchange Server/
Skype for Business 2015, you can join a scheduled meeting from the Calendar screen. If the home
screen does not display calendar information, the system is not registered with the Microsoft Exchange
Server. If no meetings are scheduled, a “No Meetings Today” message is displayed.
Procedure
1. With your remote control, select a meeting on the home screen.
2. Select Join to call into the meeting.
For more information about joining scheduled meetings, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
User Guide . For more information about setting up Microsoft Exchange Server 2013 accounts to use the
calendaring service, refer to the Polycom Unified Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution
Deployment Guide at Polycom Support.
56
Configuring Network Settings
Topics:
• Connecting to a LAN
• LLDP and LLDP-MED Support
• IP Network Settings
• AS-SIP Settings
• Multilevel Precedence and Preemption (MLPP)
• Multipoint Conference On a RealPresence Collaboration Server
• Web Proxy Auto-Discovery Protocol
• Configure Network Quality Settings
• Simplified ISDN Dialing
Before you begin configuring network settings, make sure your network is ready for video conferencing.
Polycom offers contract high-definition readiness services. For more information, contact your Polycom
distributor.
Note: Running the scanning tools is not recommended during business hours as this might result in the
performance degradation on RealPresence Group Series .
Connecting to a LAN
You must connect the RealPresence Group Series system to a LAN to do any of the following with your
system:
• Make H.323 or SIP calls
• Use a Global Directory Server
• Register with a management system
• Access the system web interface
• Use Polycom People+Content IP
• Connect to a RealPresence Touch device
• Connect to a Polycom Touch Control
LAN Status Lights

The LAN connector on the RealPresence Group 300, 310, 500, and 700 systems has two lights to
indicate connection status and traffic.
Indicator Light Connection Status
Left light off No 1000Base-T connection.
57
Indicator Light Connection Status
Left light green 1000Base-T connection.
Right light off No 10/100 Base-T connection and no network traffic

with 1000 Base-T connection.
Right light on 10/100 Base-T connection and blinks with network

traffic.
Right light blinking Network traffic.
Configure LAN Properties

You can configure other LAN properties for your RealPresence Group Series system in the local interface
or the system web interface.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > LAN Properties.
2. Configure the following LAN Options settings in the system web interface at Admin Settings >
Network > LAN Properties > LAN Options.
Setting Description
Host Name Indicates your system name. If the system

discovers a valid name during setup or a software
(system web interface only)
update, the system automatically creates the host
name. However, if an invalid name is found, such
as a name with a space, the system creates a host
name using the following format: SystemType-
xxxxxx, where xxxxxx is a set of random
alphanumeric characters.
Note: A valid host name must start with an

alphabetic character and include only
alphanumeric characters or dashes. The
length should be from 1 to 63 characters.
IPv4 networks: The system sends the host name

to the DHCP server to attempt to register the name
with the local DNS server or look up the domain
where the system is registered (if supported).
IPv6 networks: You can leave this field blank since
the system doesn’t support this function. However,
Polycom recommends configuring the field to
contain the registered host name.
58
Setting Description
Domain Name Identifies the domain your system belongs to.

(system web interface only) If the system doesn’t automatically obtain a domain
name, optionally enter one here.
Autonegotiation Specifies whether the system should automatically

negotiate the LAN speed and duplex mode per
(under General Settings in the local interface)
IEEE 802.3 autonegotiation procedures. If you
enable this setting, the system sets LAN Speed
and Duplex Mode to read-only.
Poly recommends that you use autonegotiation to
avoid network issues.
LAN Speed Specifies whether to use 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or

1000 Mbps for the LAN speed. Note that the switch
must support the speed you choose. If you enable
the Autonegotiation setting, this setting is read-
only.
Duplex Mode Specifies the duplex mode to use. Note that the
switch must support the speed you choose. If you
enable the Autonegotiation setting, this setting is
read-only.
Ignore Redirect Messages Enables the system to ignore ICMP redirect

messages.
Polycom recommends that you enable this setting
in most circumstances.
ICMP Transmission Rate Limit (millisec) Specifies the minimum number of milliseconds
between transmitted packets. Enter a number
between 0 and 60000. The default value of 1000
means the system sends 1 packet per second. If
you enter 0, the system disables the transmission
rate limit.
This setting applies only to “error” ICMP packets.
This setting has no effect on “informational” ICMP
packets, such as echo requests and replies.
Generate Destination Unreachable Messages Generates an ICMP Destination

(system web interface only) Unreachable message if the system can’t
deliver a packet to its destination for reasons other
than network congestion.
Respond to Broadcast and Multicast Echo When enabled, your system sends an ICMP Echo
Requests Reply message in response to a broadcast or
(system web interface only) multicast Echo Request that isn’t specifically
addressed to the system.
59
Setting Description
IPv6 DAD Transmit Count Specifies the number of Duplicate Address

Detection (DAD) messages to transmit before
acquiring an IPv6 address. The system sends DAD
messages to determine whether the address it is
requesting is already in use.
Select whether to transmit 0, 1, 2, or 3 DAD
requests for an IPv6 address.
Enable PC LAN Port This setting appears only for RealPresence Group
700 systems.
Specifies whether the PC LAN port is enabled on
the back of the system. Disable this setting for
increased security.
Enable LLDP Specifies if you want the system to advertise itself

on the network using the Link Layer Discovery
Protocol (LLDP). Enable if you want your system to
operate on a virtual LAN (VLAN).
Enable EAP/802.1X Enables EAP/802.1X network access. The system

supports the following authentication protocols:
(under EAP 802.1X in the local interface)
• EAP-MD5
• EAP-TLS
• EAP-TTLS
◦ EAP-MSCHAPv2
◦ EAP-GTC
• EAP-PEAPv0 (MSCHAPv2)
◦ EAP-MSCHAPv2
◦ EAP-GTC
EAP/802.1X Identity Specifies the identity the system uses for 802.1X
authentication. This setting is available only when
you enable EAP/802.1X. You can’t leave this field
blank.
EAP/802.1X Password Specifies the password the system uses for 802.1X
authentication. This setting is required when you
use EAP-MD5, EAP-PEAPv0, or EAP-TTLS.
Enable 802.1p/Q Enable if you want to configure your system with a

virtual LAN (VLAN) and set link layer priorities.
(under 802.1p/Q in the local interface)
VLAN ID Identifies the VLAN you want your system to

operate on. This setting is available only when you
enable 802.1p/Q. You can use values from 1 to
4094.
60
Setting Description
Video Priority Sets the link layer priority of video traffic on the
wired LAN. Video traffic is RTP traffic consisting of
video data and associated RTCP traffic. This
setting is available only when you enable 802.1p/Q.
You can use any value from 0 to 7, although Poly
recommends not using 6 and 7.
Audio Priority Sets the link layer priority of audio traffic on the
wired LAN. Audio traffic is RTP traffic consisting of
audio data and associated RTCP traffic. This
setting is available only when you enable 802.1p/Q.
You can use any value from 0 to 7, although Poly
recommends not using 6 and 7.
Control Priority Sets the link layer priority of control traffic on the
wired LAN. Control traffic consists of control
information associated with a call:
• H.323: H.225.0 Call Signaling, H.225.0 RAS, H.
245, Far-End Camera Control (FECC)
• SIP: SIP Signaling, FECC, Binary Floor Control
Protocol (BFCP)
This setting is available only when you enable
802.1p/Q. You can use any value from 0 to 7,
although Poly recommends not using 6 and 7.
For more information about configuring LAN settings for Microsoft environments, see the Polycom Unified
Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at Poly Online Support Center.
Related Links
Configuring the Software on page 239
Configure IP Address (IPv4) Settings

You can configure IP address (IPv4) settings for RealPresence Group Series systems.
Procedure
2. Configure the following IPv4 settings on the LAN Properties screen.
Setting Description
IP Address Specifies how the system obtains an IP address.

• Obtain IP address automatically—Select if
the system gets an IP address from a DHCP
server on the LAN.
• Enter IP address manually—Select if the IP
address will not be assigned automatically.
61
Setting Description
Your IP Address is If the system obtains its IP address automatically,

this area displays the IP address currently assigned
to the system.
If you selected Enter IP address manually, enter
the IP address here.
Subnet Mask Displays the subnet mask currently assigned to the

system.
If the system does not automatically obtain a
subnet mask, enter one here.
Default Gateway Displays the gateway currently assigned to the

system.
gateway IP address, enter one here.
Configure IP Address (IPv6) Settings

You can configure IP address (IPv6) settings for RealPresence Group Series systems.
Procedure
2. Configure the following IPv6 settings on the LAN Properties screen.
Setting Description
Enable IPv6 Enables the IPv6 network stack and makes the
IPv6 settings available.
IP Address Specifies how the system obtains an IP address.

the system gets an IP address from a SLAAC or
a DHCP server on the LAN.
address will not be assigned automatically.
Enable SLAAC Specifies whether to use stateless address

autoconfiguration (SLAAC) instead of DHCP to
automatically obtain an IP address.
Using DHCP to get the IP address requires a
DHCP server to get the address from the network,
but with SLAAC, existing routers help the system
get the IP address from the network.
62
Setting Description
Link-Local Displays the IPv6 address used for local

communication within a subnet.
This setting is configurable only when Enter IP
Address Manually is selected.
Site-Local Displays the IPv6 address used for communication

within the site or organization.
Global Address Displays the IPv6 internet address.


system.
gateway IP address, enter one here.
Configure DNS Server Settings

You can configure DNS Server settings in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
2. Configure the following DNS Servers settings on the LAN Properties screen.
Setting Description
DNS Servers Displays the DNS servers currently assigned to the

system.
(DNS in the local interface, and is read-only)
When the IPv4 or IPv6 address is obtained
automatically, the DNS Server addresses are also
obtained automatically. You can specify IPv4 DNS
server addresses only when the IPv4 or IPv6
address is entered manually.
Server 1 Address If the system does not automatically obtain a DNS

server address, you can enter one here. Up to four
Server 2 Address
DNS server addresses are allowed. If all four
Server 3 Address address fields show addresses, you cannot add
another.
Server 4 Address
Read-only in the local interface
63
LLDP and LLDP-MED Support

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) and Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery
(LLDP-MED) are supported on your RealPresence Group Series systems. LLDP is a vendor-neutral link
layer protocol in the Internet Protocol Suite used by network devices to advertise their identity and
capabilities on an IEEE 802 local area network (LAN). This protocol runs over the data-link layer only,
allowing connected systems running different network layer protocols to discover information about each
other. LLDP-MED is an extension of LLDP.
Examples of applications that use information discovered by LLDP include:
• Network topology - A network management system (NMS) can accurately represent a map of the
network topology.
• Inventory - A management system can query a switch to learn about all the devices connected to
that switch. The LLDP protocol is formally specified in standards document IEEE 802.1AB.
LLMP-MED Information Discovery

LLDP-MED enables the following information discovery for your RealPresence Group Series systems:
• Auto discovery of LAN policies enabling plug and play networking
• Inventory management, which allows network administrators to track their network devices.
Behavior When LLDP is Enabled

When LLDP is enabled on a RealPresence Group Series system, it discovers VLANs advertised by the
network switch and automatically configures the system for one of the VLANs.
If the room system discovers any of the following VLAN types in LLDP data from the network switch, the
system automatically configures itself for one of them. The chosen VLAN type is based on the order of
precedence, as follows:
• Video Conferencing VLAN
• Voice VLAN
• Voice Signaling VLAN
If none of the above VLAN types are found, the room system configures itself for the default or native
LAN of the switch port to which it is connected.
LLDP packets are transmitted regularly so that the network switch (and the neighboring endpoints) are
aware of the system presence on the network.
Enable LLDP Using a USB Storage Device

When you install a new RealPresence Group Series system on a network (or reset the system), you can
enable LLDP just before the setup wizard process using a USB storage device.
Procedure
1. Create a usbprovisioning.properties file with the following text string:
lldpenable=true
2. Copy the usbprovisioning.properties file to a USB storage device into the root folder.
3. Ensure that the system is powered off.
64
4. Insert the USB storage device into the system USB drive.
5. Power on the system.
After the room system detects the file, you cannot interact with the
system while it detects and places it into the VLAN network. Once the
LLDP detection process is complete, you can continue the setup wizard
process.
Enable LLDP in the Web Interface

If you have already used the setup wizard and do not want to reset your RealPresence Group Series
system to run the setup wizard again, you can configure LLDP in the system web interface.
Procedure
2. Select the check box at Enable LLDP and click Save.
IP Network Settings
You can configure the following IP network protocols in the RealPresence Group Series system web
interface.
• H.323
• SIP
Configure H.323 Settings

If your network uses an H.323 gatekeeper, the RealPresence Group Series system can automatically
register its H.323 name and extension. Others can then call the system using its H.323 name or
extension instead of its IP address.
Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > H.323 Settings to
configure the following settings:
Setting Description
Enable IP H.323 Enables the system to display H.323 settings and

configuration options.
Registration Status Read-only setting shows if your system is

registered with an H.323 gatekeeper.
65
Setting Description
H.323 Name How gatekeepers and gateways identify your

system. You can make point-to-point calls using H.
323 names if both systems are registered to a
gatekeeper.
The H.323 Name is the same as the device name
unless you change it.
Your organization’s dial plan might define the name
you can use.
H.323 Extension (E.164) You can place point-to-point calls using this
extension if both systems are registered with a
gatekeeper. Gatekeepers and gateways also use
the extension to identify your system.
Your organization’s dial plan might define the
extensions you can use.
Configure the System to Use a Gatekeeper

A gatekeeper manages functions such as bandwidth control and admission control. The gatekeeper also
handles address translation, which allows RealPresence Group Series system users to make calls using
static aliases instead of IP addresses that can change.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > H.323 Settings.
Setting Description
Use Gatekeeper Specifies if you want to use a gatekeeper for H.323

services.
• Off: Calls don’t use a gatekeeper.
• Auto: System tries to automatically find an
available gatekeeper.
• Specify: Calls use the specified gatekeeper.
You must select this setting to enable H.235
Annex D Authentication.
If you don’t configure this setting to Off, a
registration status displays.
Require Authentication Enables support for H.235 Annex D Authentication.

When you enable H.235 Annex D Authentication,
the H.323 gatekeeper ensures that only trusted H.
323 endpoints can access the gatekeeper.
This setting is available when you set Use
Gatekeeper to Specify.
66
Setting Description
User Name When authentication is required, specifies the user

name for authentication with H.235 Annex D.
Enter Password When authentication is required, specifies the

password for authentication with H.235 Annex D.
Current Gatekeeper IP Address Displays the IP address that the gatekeeper is

using.
If you select Off for the Use Gatekeeper field, the
Current Gatekeeper IP Address field doesn’t
display.
Primary Gatekeeper IP Address The gatekeeper IPv4 address the system registers
with. As part of the registration process, the
gatekeeper might return alternate gatekeepers. If
your system loses communication with the primary
gatekeeper, your system registers with the
alternate gatekeeper but continues to poll the
primary gatekeeper. If the system re-establishes
communication with the primary gatekeeper, it
unregisters from the alternate gatekeeper.
• If you set the Use Gatekeeper field to Off, the
Primary Gatekeeper IP Address field doesn’t
display.
• If you use an automatically selected
gatekeeper, this area displays the gatekeeper’s
IP address.
• If you specify a gatekeeper, enter the
gatekeeper IP address or name (for example,
10.11.12.13 or
gatekeeper.companyname.usa.com).
SIP Settings
If your network supports SIP, you can use it to connect calls on your RealPresence Group Series system.
The SIP protocol has been widely adapted for voice over IP communications and basic video
conferencing; however, many of the video conferencing capabilities are not yet standardized. Many
capabilities also depend on the SIP server.
The following are examples of features that are not supported using SIP:
• Cascaded multipoint in SIP calls.
• Meeting passwords. If you set a meeting password, SIP endpoints will be unable to dial in to a
multipoint call.
For more information about SIP compatibility issues, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
Release Notes .
67
Configure SIP Settings

You can configure SIP settings in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
Setting Description
Enable SIP Enables the system to make and receive SIP calls.
Enable AS-SIP Enables the system to display the AS-SIP settings

configuration options.
Registration Status Read-only setting shows if your system is

registered to a SIP server.
SIP Server Configuration Specifies whether to automatically or manually set

the SIP server’s IP address.
If you select Auto, you can’t edit the Transport
Protocol, Registrar Server, and Proxy Server
settings. If you select Specify, you can edit these
settings.
Note: If SIP Server Configuration is set to Auto

and the Registrar Server is set to any
server other than Microsoft, then auto-
discovery won't work for standard SIP
calls without a NAPTR record that you
create on a DNS server that is linked to
the system.
68
Setting Description
Transport Protocol Sets the protocol your system uses for SIP
signaling (your SIP network determines which
protocol is required).
• Auto: Enables automatic negotiation of
protocols in the following order: TLS, TCP, and
UDP. This is applicable only when using a proxy
server.
For unregistered systems, if you set the
Transport Protocol to Auto, the order is TCP
then UDP. TLS is not included.
• TCP: Provides reliable transport via TCP.
• UDP: Provides best-effort transport via UDP.
• TLS: Provides secure SIP signaling. TLS is
available only when you register your system
with a SIP server that supports it. If you set this
option, your system ignores TCP/UDP port
5060. Poly recommends you use the TLS
setting when possible.
Select TLS if you want to encrypt SVC calls.
Force Connection Reuse Disabled by default (recommended).

When disabled, the system uses an ephemeral
source port for outgoing SIP messages. When
enabled, the system uses the active SIP listening
port as the source port (5060 or 5061, depending
on the negotiated SIP transport protocol in use).
You can use this setting to establish correct
operation with remote SIP peer devices, which
require that the source port match the contact port
in SIP messages.
69
Setting Description
BFCP Transport Preference Controls content sharing negotiation behavior.

When you use the Binary Floor Control Protocol
(BFCP), a relationship is established between the
floor control server and its clients. What you set
here determines how network traffic flows between
the server and clients.
Note: TCP is typically slightly slower but more

reliable than UDP. Some deployments
don’t support it, such as with session
border controllers (SBCs).
• Prefer UDP: (Default) Starts resource sharing

using UDP but falls back to TCP if needed.
• Prefer TCP: Starts resource sharing using TCP
but falls back to UDP if needed.
• UDP Only: Shares resources only using UDP. If
UDP is unavailable, your system can’t share
content in a separate video stream.
• TCP Only: Shares resources only through TCP.
If TCP is unavailable, your system can’t share
content in a separate video stream.
Sign-in Address The SIP address or name of the system (for

example,
[email protected]).
If you leave this blank, the system IP address is
used for authentication.
User Name The user name for authenticating your system with
a SIP registrar server (for example, marySmith).
If the SIP proxy requires authentication, you can’t
leave the user name and password blank.
Password The password associated with the user name for

authenticating your system with a SIP registrar
server.
Registrar Server The IP address or FQDN of the SIP registrar

server. If you register a remote system with an
edge server, use that server’s FQDN.
By default, the system sends SIP signaling to ports
5060 (TCP) and 5061 (TLS) on the registrar server.
Enter the address and port using the following
format: <IP_Address>:<Port>.
The <IP_Address> can be an IPv4 or IPv6
address or an FQDN (for example,
servername.company.com:6050).
70
Setting Description
Proxy Server The IP address or FQDN of the SIP proxy server. If

you leave this field blank, the system uses the
registrar server address. If you also leave the SIP
registrar server field blank, there is no SIP proxy
server to configure.
By default, the system sends SIP signaling to ports
5061 (TLS) and 5060 (TCP) on the proxy server.
The syntax for this setting is the same as the
registrar server.
Registrar Server Type Specifies the type of SIP registrar server you’re
using.
If you have entered specific server addresses into the address fields Registrar server and Proxy server at
Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > SIP, before you change the SIP Server Configuration setting
from Specify to Auto, you must clear the address fields and then click Save. If the server fields are not
cleared, SIP registration might fail.
For more information about this and other Microsoft interoperability considerations, refer to the Polycom
Unified Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at Polycom Support.
Configuring SIP Settings for Integration with the Telepresence Interoperability

Protocol (TIP)
When SIP is enabled on a RealPresence Group Series system that has the TIP option key code, the
system can interoperate with TIP endpoints. You cannot configure TIP without purchasing and installing a
Telepresence Interoperability Protocol (TIP) option key code. For more information about Polycom
support for the TIP protocol, refer to Polycom Unified Communications Deployment Guide for Cisco
Environments at Polycom Support.
RTV and Skype-Hosted Conference Support

Real-time video (RTV) provides higher resolutions during video calls when integrated with Skype for
Business Server 2015. To use RTV in a Skype-hosted conference, you must have the Skype for Business
Interoperability License key enabled on your RealPresence Group Series system.
For more information about configuring your Skype for Business Server 2015 video settings for RTV, refer
to the Polycom Unified Communications for Microsoft Environments Solution Deployment Guide at
Polycom Support.
AS-SIP Settings
Your system supports the Assured Services Session Initiation Protocol (AS-SIP), which meets the
requirements defined in Unified Capabilities Requirements (UCR) 2013 Change 3.
Developed by the U.S. Department of Defense (DoD), AS-SIP includes Multilevel Precedence and
Preemption (MLPP), secure signaling and media encryption, Quality of Service (QoS), and IPv6 support.
71
Enable AS-SIP Settings

In the AS-SIP settings, you can define service codes, network domains, and precedence levels for MLPP.
Procedure
2. Select the Enable AS-SIP check box.
Configure AS-SIP Settings for MLPP

You can configure AS-SIP settings for MLPP in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > AS-SIP.
Setting Description
Service Code Defines one or more of the US Federal

Communications Commission (FCC) N11 special
services dialing codes or worldwide special dialing
codes.
Outbound Precedence Call Defaults Defines the Default Domain (network domain) and
the Default Precedence level used when dialing a
call.
MLPP Network Domains Defines the MLPP network domains your network
uses.
Add an AS-SIP Service Code

You can add an AS-SIP service code in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
1. To add a Service Code, click .
2. In the text field of the new line that appears, enter the numbers.
3. Click another line in the list to create the service code.
Delete an AS-SIP Service Code

You can delete an AS-SIP service code in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
You can delete an AS-SIP service code in the system web interface.
Procedure
» Click .
72
Defining AS-SIP Outbound Precedence Call Defaults

You can define AS-SIP outbound precedence call default settings for your RealPresence Group Series
system.
To define AS-SIP outbound precedence call defaults:
1. Select the Default Domain to use for outbound calls, that is, the default network domain.
RealPresence Group systems come preconfigured for use on the uc and dsn network domains,
but you can add others. You can choose any defined network domain as the default domain to use
for outbound calls. The network domains uc and dsn are preconfigured and uc is the default
network domain for this setting.
2. Select the Default Precedence to use for outbound calls.This setting accepts one of the defined
precedence levels from the configured default domain. The setting defaults to ROUTINE, which is
the lowest precedence level defined in the default network domain uc.
Although uc and dsn are preconfigured on the system, you can edit their settings or create other
network domains.
Multilevel Precedence and Preemption (MLPP)

Multilevel Precedence and Preemption (MLPP) provides call prioritization over network resources and far-
end system access. Authorized users place precedence calls to elevate the priority of the call through the
AS-SIP network. RealPresence Group Series systems already in a call can be preempted by an incoming
call with a higher priority. In addition, precedence call signaling and media packets are marked with DSCP
values associated with the precedence level to ensure network QoS commensurate with the call
precedence level.
Systems provide support for placing precedence calls through the use of precedence prefix codes in the
dial string. Calls can be placed at any of the precedence levels defined within the network domain
configured as the default domain for outbound calls. The default network domains uc and dsn define five
precedence levels: Routine, Priority, Immediate, Flash, or Flash Override. The system signals the
precedence level according to the standards in UCR 2008, Change 3, and provides appropriate feedback
to the user placing the call.
Incoming calls are announced with the appropriate precedence level, and the authorized user can select
one of the following ways to handle the call:
• Answer directly
• Join into conference
• Hang up current call and answer
Define MLPP Network Domains

You can define MLPP network domain names for your RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. To edit a domain, click .
2. If needed, edit the Network Domain Name or change the Allow Incoming Calls setting.
Disabling the Allow Incoming Calls setting causes the system to reject any calls from this
network domain.
3. Select a Precedence Level.
73
You can define a total of 10 precedence levels.

Setting Description
Precedence Level The name associated with the precedence level.

You can click Add Precedence Level to create a
level and you can click to remove a level.
Dial Digit A single numeric field (0-9) that represents the

dialing digit used to indicate the requested call
precedence.
The precedence dial string is indicated by a leading
'9' followed by the Dial Digit, followed by the 7- or
10-digit number.
Resource Priority Header Represents the value in the SIP Resource Priority
Header used to signal the precedence level. This
field accepts a single UTF-8 character.
Audio DSCP Indicates the DSCP value used for audio RTP/
SRTP packets sent in calls using this precedence
level. The field accepts an integer value range from
0-63.
Video DSCP Indicates the DSCP value used for video RTP/
SRTP packets sent in calls using this precedence
level. The field accepts an integer value range from
0-63.
5. Click Save.
Add an MLPP Network Domain

You can add an MLPP network domain for your RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. To add a network domain, click and then configure the same settings for the new network
domain in the define MLPP network domains task above.
2. Click Save when you are finished configuring the settings to save your changes.
Alternative Network Address Type (ANAT)

ANAT signaling is used for IPv4 and IPv6 support in AS-SIP and is only useful in AS-SIP environments.
When AS-SIP is enabled, and dual stack (IPV4 and IPV6) is enabled, ANAT signaling is enabled.
Consider the following best practices when you enable AS-SIP on a RealPresence Group Series system:
• Be sure to register the system only to AS-SIP-aware proxy/registrar servers, because AS-SIP
signaling can be incompatible with other types of proxy/registrar servers.
• If the Cisco Telepresence Interoperability Protocol (TIP) software option is installed, turn off TIP
signaling on the RealPresence Group Series endpoint by going to Admin Settings > Network >
74
Dialing Preference > Dialing Options and disabling the TIP setting. TIP signaling is incompatible
with AS-SIP signaling.
Multipoint Conference On a RealPresence

Collaboration Server
You can enable users to create an impromptu conference call during an active SIP call. To do this, you
must configure RealPresence Group Series systems to escalate new calls to an RMX conference call.
Polycom recommends that you disable adhoc call escalation to make calls through an internal MCU.
For information on configuring a SIP conference factory on a DMA system or locating the conference
factory ID, see the RealPresence DMA System v9.0.0 Operations Guide.
Enable Call Escalation of Point-to-Point Calls

You can enable point-to-point call escalation on your RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, navigate to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > Adhoc Call
Escalation.
2. Select Enable automatic call escalation of point-to-point to an external MCU.
3. For the Conference Factory ID, enter the ID associated with the SIP conference factory on your
RealPresence DMA system.
Note: The conference factory ID must come from the same RealPresence DMA system your
video conferencing system uses for SIP registration. Calls don’t escalate if your
RealPresence DMA system doesn’t recognize the ID you provide.
4. Select Save.
Calls converted through a RealPresence DMA system gateway (H.323 to SIP or vice versa) don’t
join an impromptu conference call.
Web Proxy Auto-Discovery Protocol

The Web Proxy Auto-Discovery Protocol (WPAD) allows RealPresence Group Series systems to route
network traffic outside enterprise networks.
When your RealPresence Group Series system uses Web Proxy, inbound HTTP and HTTPS traffic (ports
80 and 443) is directed to the configured proxy or proxies.
The Proxy auto-config (PAC) file is a configuration file executed by the system to determine the proxy for
a specified URL.
Your system can authenticate with a proxy using the following methods:
• Digest authentication (with either MD-5 or SHA-256 digest)
• NTLM authentication (only NTLMv2 is supported)
• Basic authentication (this insecure method is disabled by default)
• No authentication (or null authentication, meaning the proxy server doesn’t require credentials)
75
By default, the Basic authentication is disabled. You can enable Basic authentication in RealPresence
Group Series system web interface.
Your system supports the following services when configured to use a web proxy:
• Directory servers
• Provisioning service
• Calendaring service
• Recording service
• Software updates
• Uploading logs
Sample PAC file

This section shows an example of a sample PAC file.
function FindProxyForURL(url, host)

{
if ( url.substring (0, 5) == "http:" )
{return "PROXY 10.221.77.3:8080; PROXY 10.221.76.7:8080;DIRECT";}
else if ( url.substring (0, 6) == "https:" )
{return "PROXY 10.221.77.3:8080; PROXY 10.221.76.7:8080;DIRECT";}
else
{return "DIRECT";}
}
The Function “function FindProxyForURL(url, host)” returns a string with one or more access
method specifications. These specifications cause RealPresence Group Series system to use a particular
proxy server or connect directly.
This function instructs RealPresence Group Series system to retrieve information for http / https protocols
using the first proxy i.e. “PROXY 10.221.77.3:8080”.
If “PROXY 10.221.77.3:8080” is unreachable/unresponsive, then RealPresence Group series system tries
the second proxy i.e. “PROXY 10.221.76.7:8080”.
For more examples on PAC syntax, refer to FindProxyForURL.
Note: If the first specified proxy is reachable and the authentication is unsuccessful, RealPresence
Group Series system will not roll over to try a different proxy path.
Enable Web Proxy

Web Proxy is disabled in RealPresence Group Series system by default.
To enable Web Proxy settings for the RealPresence Group Series system:
Procedure
1. In the RealPresence Group Series system web interface. go to Admin Settings > Network >
Web Proxy Settings.
2. Select Enable Web Proxy check box.
76
Configure Web Proxy Settings

To allow RealPresence Group Series system to use the Web Proxy protocol.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Web Proxy Settings.
• If Use SFB Credentials for Proxy is checked, the system automatically takes the SIP user
credentials defined in the RealPresence Group Series web interface
• Select Auto configuration checkbox and uncheck the Enable WPAD checkbox. Enter the
Proxy Username and Proxy Password, and enter the PAC URL.
• Select Auto configuration and Enable WPAD checkbox. Enter the Proxy Username and
Proxy Password. Providing the Proxy Username and Proxy Password is not mandatory.
• Uncheck Auto configuration checkbox. Enter the Proxy Username, Proxy Password,
Proxy Address, and Proxy Port. Providing the Proxy Username and Proxy Password is not
mandatory.
3. Click Save.
Update Proxy auto-config (PAC) File

When the PAC file is updated on the server, do the following to make the changes effective on
RealPresence Group Series system:
Procedure
2. Click UPDATE PAC FILE.
Verify Proxy auto-config (PAC) File

To verify the PAC file configured on the RealPresence Group Series system:
Procedure
2. Click on DOWNLOAD PAC FILE link to download the PAC file.
The Proxy auto-config (PAC) file is a configuration file executed by the system to determine the
proxy for a specified URL.
Verify Proxy auto-config (PAC) File Status

To verify the PAC file status on the RealPresence Group Series system:
Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Web Proxy Settings.
Following are the various status for the PAC File:
• Success
77
The PAC File is successfully downloaded.

• In Progress
The PAC File download is in progress.
• WPAD Failed
The DHCP 252 protocol has not successfully fetched the PAC URL.
• Download Failed
The PAC File download is failed.
• Expired
The PAC File is expired.
Limitations
RealPresence Group Series system configured with Web Proxy has the following limitations:
• Polycom recommends using “realm” authentication along with the username for Digest and NTLM
authentication mechanisms. For e.g “realm\username” is applicable for both Digest and NTLM
mechanisms.
• When configuring Auto Configuration with Web Proxy Enabled, the PAC file will be downloaded only
if RealPresence Group Series system receives the corresponding DHCP option field from the
DHCP server.
• There is no RPRM provisioning support when RealPresence Group Series system is configured
with Web Proxy.
• There is no option available to verify Web Proxy authentication status.
• The System Status information in is not available in RealPresence Group Series system web
interface, when Web Proxy is enabled for RealPresence Group Series system.
• The admin can configure and change the Web Proxy settings only through RealPresence Group
Series web interface.
• RealPresence Group Series Web Proxy does not support media on 443 port.
Configure Network Quality Settings

You can specify how your RealPresence Group Series system responds to network quality issues by
controlling how your network handles packets during video calls.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > Network Quality.
Setting Description
Automatically Adjust People/Content Bandwidth Specifies whether the system automatically adjusts
bandwidth for the people or content stream
depending on the relative complexity of the people
video, content video, or both. If you enable this
setting, the Quality Preference setting is not
available.
78
Setting Description
Quality Preference Specifies which video stream has precedence

when attempting to compensate for network loss:
• Both people and content streams
• People streams
• Content streams
The stream option you select experiences less
quality degradation during network loss
compensation than the other. Choosing Both
means each stream experiences roughly equal
degradation.
This setting is not available if you enable
Automatically Adjust People/Content
Bandwidth.
Type of Service Specifies the type of service (ToS), which lets you
prioritize packets sent to your system for video,
audio, Far End Camera Control (FECC), and
OA&M:
• IP Precedence: Represents a priority level
between 0 and 7.
• DiffServ: Represents a priority level between 0
and 63.
Note: If you enable AS-SIP and you select
DiffServ, the DSCP values for audio and video
defined for the negotiated call precedence level in
the default network domain for outbound calls
override the Video and Audio settings on this
page. If you don’t enable AS-SIP, the system uses
the Video and Audio values defined here.
Video Specifies the IP Precedence or DiffServ priority

level for video RTP and associated RTCP traffic.
Audio Specifies the IP Precedence or DiffServ priority

level for audio RTP and associated RTCP traffic.
Control Specifies the IP Precedence or DiffServ priority

level for control traffic on the following channels:
• H.323: H.225.0 Call Signaling, H.225.0 RAS, H.
245, and FECC
• SIP: SIP Signaling, FECC, and Binary Floor
Control Protocol (BFCP)
(The system enables FECC by Allow Other
Participants in a Call to Control Your Camera.)
OAM Specifies the IP Precedence or DiffServ value for

traffic unrelated to video, audio, or FECC.
79
Setting Description
Maximum Transmission Unit Size Specifies whether to use the default Maximum
Transmission Unit (MTU) size for IP calls or let you
select it.
Maximum Transmission Unit Size Bytes Specifies the MTU size (in bytes) used in calls.
• If video quality is poor or you experience
network errors, packets might be too large.
Decrease the MTU.
• If the network is burdened with unnecessary
overhead, packets might be too small. Increase
the MTU.
Enable Lost Packet Recovery If you enable this setting, the system uses the Lost
Packet Recovery (LPR) protocol to help
compensate for packet loss if it occurs.
Enable RSVP If you enable this setting, the system can use the
Resource Reservation Setup Protocol (RSVP) to
request that routers reserve bandwidth along an IP
connection path. (To use this feature, the near and
far site must support RSVP.)
Dynamic Bandwidth Enable this setting if you want the system to

automatically determine the optimal call rate.
MRC Bandwidth Allocation Adjusts media bit stream bandwidth, reducing

packet loss. This setting is specifically designed for
SVC-based calls.
Maximum Transmit Bandwidth Specifies the maximum transmit call rate between
64 kbps and the system’s maximum line rate.
Use this setting when the system connects to the
network using an access method with different
transmit and receive bandwidths.
Maximum Receive Bandwidth Specifies the maximum receive call rate between
64 kbps and the system’s maximum line rate.
Use this setting when the system connects to the
network using an access method with different
transmit and receive bandwidths.
Note: When a RealPresence Group 500 or RealPresence Group 700 system is hosting a multipoint call,
the total call rate for all sites in the call is 6 Mbps.
Related Links
Lost Packet Recovery and Dynamic Bandwidth Settings on page 80
Lost Packet Recovery and Dynamic Bandwidth Settings

You can handle video quality issues on your RealPresence Group Series system by enabling the Enable
Lost Packet Recovery (LPR) setting, the Dynamic Bandwidth setting, or both settings.
80
If both settings are enabled, Dynamic Bandwidth adjusts the video rate to reduce packet loss to 3% or
less. When packet loss drops to 3% or less, LPR cleans up the video image on your monitor. The
additional processing power required might cause the video rate to drop while the system is using LPR. If
this happens, the Call Statistics screen shows the Video Rate Used as lower than the Video Rate. If
Packet Loss is 0 for at least 10 minutes, LPR stops operating and the Video Rate Used increases to
match the Video Rate.
If only LPR is enabled and the system detects packet loss, LPR attempts to clean the image but the video
rate is not adjusted. If only Dynamic Bandwidth is enabled and the system detects packet loss of 3% or
more, the video rate is adjusted but LPR does not clean the image.
You can view percent Packet Loss, Video Rate, and Video Rate Used on the Call Statistics screen.
Related Links
Configure Network Quality Settings on page 78
General Troubleshooting on page 271
Simplified ISDN Dialing

The Simplified ISDN dialing feature provides seamless ISDN Gateway call dialing support on
RealPresence Group Series systems through Polycom ISDN Gateway. You can now make calls by
entering the ISDN number without entering a prefix of the ISDN Gateway IP address.
Configure Gateway Call Type Settings

You can configure gateway settings in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > Gateway.
2. Configure the following settings:
Setting Description
Enable Gateway Allows the ISDN Gateway settings to display and to

be configured.
Gateway Number Type Indicates the Gateway number type for ISDN
Gateway dialing.
• IP Address
• E.164
Gateway Number Specify the number based upon the Gateway

Number Type you select.
• IP Address: Specify the IP address for the
ISDN Gateway.
• E.164: Specify the H.323 extension (E.164
number) for the ISDN Gateway. Your
organization's dial plan might define the
3. Select Save.
81
Securing the System
Topics:
• Configure Security Profiles

• Managing System Access
• Detecting Intrusions
• View Connections to Your System in a Sessions List
• Secure API Access
• Port Lockout
• Allow List
• Call Encryption
• 802.1x Authentication
• Firewall/NAT Traversal
• Security Certificates
• Set Up a Security Banner
• Set a Meeting Password
• Visual Security Classification
• Enable Room and Call Monitoring
Configure Security Profiles

System security profiles provide varying levels of secure access to your RealPresence Group Series
system.
The security profile your system uses provides the basis for secure access within the system and
determines how users can operate the system.
The security profile is selected during system setup with the setup wizard, but this setting is configurable
through Admin Settings in the system web interface. The default values and ability to change some
settings are affected by which security profile your system uses.
Consider each security profile as a set of default values for all configuration settings that affect product
security and that achieves some level of base product security. You can choose from four profiles—
Maximum, High, Medium, and Low. Each profile provides a basic security posture, ranging from the most
secure to the least secure, which enables you to select a level of security that is appropriate for the
deployment of the system in your environment.
Because you can change most of the individual configuration settings regardless of the security profile
you choose, Polycom recommends that you select the profile that is closest to the level of security you
want in your environment and then customize the settings from there as needed. In the higher-security
profiles, however, you can’t change some settings at all or they have restricted ranges of values.
82
Securing the System
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security.
2. Determine which of the following Security Profile settings your system uses.
Setting Description
Maximum Configures the system to be compliant with U.S.

DoD security requirements. Some configuration
settings are made read-only in this profile; other
settings have restricted ranges of values. This
profile represents the highest level of security.
High Configures the system with most security controls

enabled, but doesn’t mandate the use of some
controls that are mandated in the Maximum profile.
You can’t change some configuration settings in
this profile; other settings have restricted ranges of
values. This profile is most appropriate for
enterprise deployments that demand high security.
Medium Configures the system with some of the basic

security controls enabled, but not all. You can
change most settings in this profile.
Low Configures the system with no mandated security

controls, although you can enable all controls as
needed. This is the default profile.
3. To change the profile setting, select the Security Profile you want to use.
You can increase or decrease the level of security.
4. Follow the prompts in the Security Profile Change wizard.
Related Links
Security Profile Default Settings on page 312
Changing Medium Security Profile Default Values on page 346
Maximum Security Profile Requires Default Value Changes

When you configure the RealPresence Group Series system to use the Maximum Security Profile, the
system forces you to change the following settings from their default values:
• Admin account User Id
• User account User Id
• Admin room password
• Admin remote access password
• User room password
• User remote access password
83
Securing the System
Managing System Access

An administrator can configure RealPresence Group Series systems to grant access using network
accounts that are authenticated through an Active Directory (AD) server such as the Microsoft Active
Directory server. In this case, the account information is stored on the AD server and not on the room
system. The AD administrator assigns accounts to AD groups, one for the room system admin access
and one for user access. For this reason, external authentication is also referred to as Active Directory
authentication.
The room system administrator configures the external authentication settings on the system to specify
the address of an AD Server for authenticating user logins, AD group for user access, and AD group for
admin access on the room system. The system can map only one Active Directory group to a given role.
Users can enter their network account credentials to access the system on the following interfaces:
• Web interface (admin access only)
• Local interface (user and admin role accounts when Require Login for System Access is
enabled; admin accounts when admin-only areas of the local interface are accessed)
When External Authentication is enabled in PKI environments where Always Validate Peer Certificates
from Server is enabled on the system, configure the Active Directory Server Address on the system using
the address information that is in the Active Directory Server identity certificate. This allows the system to
validate the identity certificate. As an example, if the Active Directory Server identity certificate contains its
DNS name only, and no specific IP address, configuring the Active Directory Server Address on the
system using the server's IP address results in certificate validation failure, and consequently
authentication failure. The system configuration would have to specify the server by DNS name, in this
case, to successfully match the server certificate data.
The system local user account is disabled when Enable Active Directory External Authentication is
enabled. The admin account is active and usable, however.
Enable External Authentication

Set up external authentication through Active Directory for your RealPresence Group Series system.
The system can map only one Active Directory group to a given role.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security >
Authentication.
2. Configure these settings on the Authentication screen, then click Save.
Setting Description
Enable Active Directory External Authentication Specifies whether to authenticate users with the
Active Directory server. When you enable Active
Directory authentication, users can log in to the
system with their network credentials using this
format: domain\user. With this format, users can
have accounts on multiple domains.
84
Securing the System
Setting Description
Active Directory Server Address Specifies the Active Directory server’s FQDN or IP
address. If you are using subdomains, append port
number 3268 as follows: ad.domain.com:
3268.
You can alternatively use RealPresence Resource
Manager as an Active Directory server and enter its
address here.
If you enable Always Validate Peer Certificates
from Server on the Certificates page, make sure
this value matches what is in the Active Directory
server certificate. For example, if you enter the
Active Directory server IP address here, but the
certificate only has the server’s FQDN, external
authentication fails.
Active Directory Admin Group Specifies the Active Directory group whose
members should have administrator access to the
system. This name must exactly match the name in
the Active Directory server for successful
authentication.
Active Directory User Group Specifies the Active Directory group whose
members should have user access to the system.
This name must exactly match the name in the
Active Directory server for successful
authentication.
3. If external authentication is not active after completing these steps, go to Admin Settings >
Network > LAN Properties > LAN Options and ensure that the Domain Name setting contains
the name of your Active Directory domain.
Use the local system administrator credentials to pair the system with a touch device, such as the
RealPresence Touch.
Configure Local Access

You can configure local access so that users can reach a RealPresence Group Series system through the
local interface.
Passwords for logging in to the system are case sensitive and can’t contain more than 40 characters.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Login
Credentials.
The order in which the settings are displayed differs between the interfaces.
Setting Description
Admin ID The local administrator account name (default is

admin). It is not case sensitive.
85
Securing the System
Setting Description
Admin Room Password You must enter this password to change

administrator settings in the local interface.
The default password is the serial number listed in
System Details and on the back of the device.
Use Room Password for Remote Access Specifies if the administrator or user Room
Password used to log in locally is also used for
remote logins. This setting is enabled by default.
Admin Remote Access Password If you set this option, you must enter this password
to access the system through the system web
interface or command-line API (SSH or telnet).
This password lets you perform device
management tasks, such as updating the system’s
software.
Require User Login for System Access If you set this option, you must log in to use the
local interface (including when the system comes
out of sleep mode or completes its startup
process).
This setting is not supported on Polycom touch
devices.
User ID The user account name (default is user). It is not

case sensitive.
User Room Password If you set this option, you must enter this password
to log in to the local interface.
User Remote Access Password If you set this option, you must enter this password
to log in through the system web interface or API
(SSH or telnet).
This password gives you limited functionality in the
system web interface and access to only a subset
of the API commands.
Configure Remote Access

You can remotely configure, manage, and monitor your RealPresence Group Series system from its
system web interface or using the API. (You can also perform these actions with RealPresence Resource
Manager or SNMP [monitoring only].)
• The system web interface requires only a web browser.
• RealPresence Resource Manager requires the management application to be installed on your
network.
• SNMP requires network management software on your network management station.
For more information about the API commands, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
Integrator Reference Guide.
Remote access means reaching a system in some way other than through the local interface, such as by
using the web, a serial port, or telnet. A session is an instance of a user connected to the system through
86
Securing the System
one of these interfaces. Sessions include an indication of how you are logged on to the system, such as
the local interface, web interface, telnet, or serial API.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, select Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access.
Not all settings are available on both interfaces. The visibility of some settings is affected by the
type of security profile your system uses.
Setting Description
Enable Network Intrusion Detection System (NIDS) When you enable this setting, the system creates
security log entries when it detects a possible
network intrusion.
(This setting is enabled or disabled by default
based on the security profile, but you can change
it.)
Enable Web Access Specifies whether you can access the system using
the system web interface.
Allow Access to User Settings Specifies whether users can access the User
Settings screen through the local interface.
Restrict to HTTPS Specifies that you can access the system web
interface only over port 443. Enabling this setting
closes access through port 80 (HTTP).
Web Access Port (HTTP) Specifies the port to use when accessing the
system web interface over HTTP.
If you change the default (port 80), specify port
1025 or higher and make sure it is not already in
use. You must include the port number with the IP
address when you use the system web interface to
access the system.
(This setting is unavailable if Restrict to HTTPS is
enabled.)
Enable Telnet Access Specifies whether you can access the system using
telnet.
API Port Specifies whether to use port 23 or 24 for API

access.
If you select port 23, the diagnostics port changes
to port 24.
Enable SSH Access Specifies whether you can access the system using
SSH.
87
Securing the System
Setting Description
Enable Diagnostics Port Idle Session Timeout Specifies whether to allow the diagnostics port to
time out and close the active session at the
configured time interval of no activity or not. You set
the timeout at Idle Session Timeout in Minutes.
Enable API Port Idle Session Timeout Specifies whether to allow the API port to time out
and close the active session at the configured time
interval of no activity or not. You set the timeout at
Idle Session Timeout in Minutes.
Enable SNMP Access Specifies whether to allow SNMP access.
Allow Video Display on Web Specifies whether you can use the system web
interface to view the room where the system is
(local interface only)
located, or video of calls in which the system
participates.
Note: This feature activates both near site and far
site video displays in Web Director.
Lock Port after Failed Logins Temporarily locks the login port after a configurable
number of unsuccessful login attempts have been
made.
Enable Allow List Specifies whether to enable an allow list.
Idle Session Timeout in Minutes Specifies the number of minutes a session can be
idle before it times out.
Maximum Number of Active Sessions Specifies the maximum number of users logged in
through the system web interface or command-line
API (SSH or telnet).
Related Links
Port Lockout on page 95
Secure API Access on page 93
Detecting Intrusions on page 92
Local Accounts
There are two types of local accounts for accessing the RealPresence Group Series system: one for the
user (by default named user) and another for the administrator (by default named admin).
Administrators can configure the system and also perform user activities, such as placing calls.
The system stores local account IDs and passwords.
Configure Password Policy Settings

Specify requirements for administrator, user, meeting, remote access, and SNMP passwords for your
RealPresence Group Series system.
Poly strongly recommends that you create an administrator password for your system.
88
Securing the System
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Password
Requirements.
2. Configure the following settings for Admin Room, User Room, Meeting, Remote Access, or
SNMP passwords.
Setting Description
Minimum Length The minimum number of characters required for a

valid password.
Require Lowercase Letters The minimum number of lowercase letters required

for a valid password.
Require Uppercase Letters The minimum number of uppercase letters required

for a valid password.
Require Numbers The minimum number of numerals required for a

valid password.
Require Special Characters The minimum number of special characters

required for a valid password. Supported
characters include: @ - _ ! ; $ , \ / & . # *
Reject Previous Passwords The number of most recent passwords that you
can’t reuse. If you set this to Off, all previous
passwords are valid.
Minimum Password Age in Days The minimum number of days before the password
can change.
Maximum Password Age in Days The maximum number of days before the password
must change.
Minimum Changed Characters The number of characters that must be different or

change position in a new password. For example, if
you set this to 3, 123abc can change to 345cde
but not to 234bcd.
Maximum Consecutive Repeated Characters The maximum number of consecutive repeated

characters allowed in a password. For example, if
you set this to 3, aaa123 is a valid password but
aaaa123 is not.
Password Expiration Warning Specifies how many days in advance a warning

displays indicating that the password expires soon
(if you set a maximum password age).
Can Contain ID or Its Reverse Form Specifies whether the associated ID or its reverse
can be part of a password. If you enable this setting
and the ID is admin, passwords admin and nimda
are allowed.
3. Click Save.
Changes to most password policy settings don’t take effect until the next time the password is changed.
Changes take effect immediately for Minimum Password Age in Days, Maximum Password Age in
89
Securing the System
Days, and Password Expiration Warning. Changing Minimum Length from Off to some other value
also takes effect immediately.
Preventing Account Unauthorized System Access

RealPresence Group Series systems provide access controls that prevent unauthorized use. One way
someone might try to discover valid user names and passwords is by exhaustively attempting to log in,
varying the user name and password data in a programmatic way until discovering a combination that
succeeds. Such a method is called a “brute-force” attack.
To mitigate the risk of such an attack, two access control mechanisms are available on the system. The
first type of access control, account lockout, protects local accounts from being vulnerable to brute-force
attacks, while the second, port lockout, protects login ports themselves from being vulnerable to brute-
force attacks.
Account lockout temporarily locks a local account from accepting logins after a configurable number of
unsuccessful attempts to log in to that account. It protects only the local system's Admin and User local
accounts. When external authentication is used, the Active Directory Server protects Active Directory
accounts.
The systems provide separate account lockout controls for each of their local accounts, which are named
Admin and User. The account lock can be invoked due to failed logins on any of the following login ports:
• Local interface
• Web interface
• Telnet interface
For examples of how the account lockout feature works, see the following scenarios.
• Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Account Lockout > Lock Admin Account after
Failed Logins is set to 4.
• Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Account Lockout > Admin Account Lock
Duration is set to 1 Minute.
• Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Account Lockout > Reset Admin Account
Lock After is set to 1 Hour.
Scenario 1 - Admin account locked due to excessive failed logins
A user fails to log in to the Admin account twice on the system web interface, and the same or another
user fails to log in to the Admin account on the local interface. This means that three failed attempts have
been made to the Admin account so far. If the next attempt to log in to the Admin account on any login
port is unsuccessful, which would mean 4 failed logins, further attempts to access the Admin account are
locked out for 1 Minute (the expiration of the Admin Account Lock Duration period). After the 1 Minute
account lock duration has past, logins will once again be allowed. As this example illustrates, the failed
login attempts made to an account accumulate across any login port.
Scenario 2 - Successful login resets the failed login attempts counter
been made to the Admin account so far. If the next login attempt is successful, then the failed login
attempts counter for the Admin account is reset to zero and now once again 4 failed attempts can be
made before the Admin account would be locked.
Scenario 3 - Failed attempts counter resets after failed login window closes
90
Securing the System
been made to the Admin account so far. If no more failed attempts are made within 1 Hour of the first
failed attempt (which is the value of the Reset Admin Account Lock Counter After setting), the failed
login attempts counter for the Admin account is reset to zero, and 4 failed attempts are allowed again
before the Admin account is locked.
Configure Account Lockout

Account lockout controls prevent unauthorized access to your RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Local Accounts > Account
Lockout.
2. Configure these settings for the appropriate account on the Account Lockout screen, then click
Save.
You can configure account lock for the admin account, user account, or both accounts.
Setting Description
Lock Admin/User Account after Failed Logins Specifies the number of failed login attempts
allowed before the system locks the account. You
can turn this setting Off.
Admin/User Account Lock Duration Specifies the amount of time an account is locked
because of failed login attempts. After this period
expires, the system resets the failed login attempts
counter to zero, and users can again log in with
that account.
Reset Admin/User Account Lock Counter After Determines how many hours the failed login
window lasts. The window is a period of time
starting with the first failed login attempt and during
which the system counts subsequent failed
attempts against the number allowed.
The counter resets to zero at the end of the window
(if the account is not locked because of failed
attempts) and after a successful login.
Related Links
Enable Access to User Settings

You might want to enable user access to User Settings in the RealPresence Group Series system local
interface. These settings allow users to control some aspects of cameras and meetings; for example, to
allow other people in a call to control your camera, or to enable auto answer for point-to-point or
multipoint calls.
User Settings contains the following selections, most of which are also available to administrators under
Admin Settings. These settings are not available in the Maximum Security Profile unless otherwise
noted.
• Meeting Password (available in the Maximum Security Profile)
• Backlight Compensation (available in the Maximum Security Profile)
91
Securing the System
• Mute Auto-Answer Calls

• Allow Other Participants in a Call to Control Your Camera
• Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video
• Auto Answer Multipoint Video
• Allow Video Display on Web
Procedure
2. Enable the Allow Access to User Settings setting.
If the RealPresence Group Series system is paired with a Polycom Touch Control, selecting Allow
Access to User Settings makes the RealPresence Group Series system tab available on the Touch
Control User Settings screen.
Related Links
Restrict Access to User and Administrative Settings

You can restrict access to User Settings and Administration settings in the RealPresence Group Series
system local interface, making them available only through the system web interface.
Procedure
1. In Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen Settings > Home Screen Icons, disable
the Show Icons on the Home Screen setting.
2. Click Save.
If the following conditions are met, the ability to show icons is automatically enabled and read only:
• Speed Dial is disabled in the Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen Settings.
• The Calendar is not displayed because the system is not connected to the Microsoft Exchange
Server.
• Remote access through the web, telnet, and SNMP are disabled in Security > Global Security >
Access.
Detecting Intrusions
When the RealPresence Group Series system detects a possible network intrusion, it logs an entry to the
security log.
The Enable Network Intrusion Detection System (NIDS) setting controls the logging behavior. The
security log prefix identifies the type of packet detected, as shown in the following table:
Prefix Packet Type
SECURITY: NIDS/unknown_tcp Packet that attempts to connect or probe a closed TCP

port
SECURITY: NIDS/unknown_udp Packet that probes a closed UDP port
92
Securing the System
Prefix Packet Type
SECURITY: NIDS/invalid_tcp TCP packet in an invalid state
SECURITY: NIDS/invalid_icmp ICMP or ICMPv6 packet in an invalid state
SECURITY: NIDS/unknown Packet with an unknown protocol number in the IP

header
SECURITY: NIDS/flood Stream of ICMP or ICMPv6 ping requests or TCP

connections to an opened TCP port
Following the message prefix, the security log entry includes the time stamp and the IP, TCP, UDP, ICMP,
or ICMPv6 headers. For example, the following security log entry shows an unknown_udp intrusion:
2009-05-08 21:32:52 WARNING kernel: SECURITY: NIDS/unknown_udp IN=eth0

OUT= MAC=00:e0:db:08:9a:ff:00:19:aa:da:11:c3:08:00 SRC=172.18.1.80
DST=172.18.1.170 LEN=28 TOS=0x00 PREC=0x00 TTL=63 ID=22458 PROTO=UDP
SPT=1450 DPT=7788 LEN=8
Related Links
Configure Remote Access on page 86
View Connections to Your System in a Sessions List

Access a list of current connections to your RealPresence Group Series system.
The list provides the following information:
• Type of connection (for example, web)
• ID associated with the session (for example, admin or user)
• Remote address (IP addresses of the hosts accessing your system)
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics.
2. Go to System > Sessions.
Secure API Access

You can access a RealPresence Group Series system using the Secure Shell (SSH) protocol. Secure API
access is authenticated for local and Active Directory (AD) accounts.
Note: When a password is empty, SSH will not validate credentials and allow a user to log in. Polycom
recommends that you consistently use passwords for secure access.
Secure API access using SSH is enabled by default. The sshenable API command and Enable Legacy
API Over SSH system web interface setting have been added to enable or disable the feature.
93
Securing the System
When the Enable Legacy API Over SSH setting is disabled, port 22 is still available for communications
with Polycom Touch Control system and RealPresence Group Series . To disable the access completely,
the RealPresence Group Series has introduced Enable SSH Service setting.
Related Links
Enable an Allow List on page 97
Enable Access to User Settings on page 91
Enable Secure API Access

You can enable SSH for secure API access in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface or in
an API session.
Procedure
» Do one of the following
• In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access
and enable the Enable Legacy API Over SSH setting.
• In a system API session, enter sshenable true.
Disable Secure API Access

You can disable SSH for secure API access in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface or in
an API session.
Procedure
» Do one of the following:
• In the system web interface of the system, select Admin Settings > Security > Global
Security > Access and disable the Enable Legacy API Over SSH setting.
• In a system API session, enter sshenable false.
Access the API with SSH

To obtain secure access to the API, you must use an SSH client and connect to the IP address configured
for the RealPresence Group Series system on port 22. The system allows three attempts to enter correct
login credentials. The SSH client program closes after the third failed attempt.
To access the API with SSH:
Procedure
1. Enable remote access.
2. If necessary, enable external authentication.
3. Enable the SSH feature.
4. Start an SSH session using the system IP address and port 22.
5. When prompted, enter the remote access credentials.
For information on accessing the API, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator
Reference Guide at Polycom Support.
94
Securing the System
Port Lockout
Port lockout protects against brute-force attacks by temporarily locking the login port after a configurable
number of unsuccessful login attempts are made. Port lockout is supported only on the RealPresence
Group Series system web interface, and only Admin users are allowed to log in to the system web
interface. If external authentication is not in use, users can successfully log in to the system web interface
only by using the local Admin account credentials. However, when external authentication is in use, any
number of external accounts can be considered to be Admin users on the system. Failed logins to any of
these accounts, or to an unknown account, are all counted against the configured number allowed failed
login attempts to the system web interface.
The following is an example of how the port lockout feature works.
A system web interface is configured with these settings:
• Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Authentication > Enable Active Directory
External Authentication is enabled, a valid Active Directory Server Address is configured, as
are both the Active Directory Admin Group and Active Directory User Group settings.
• Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access > Enable Legacy API Over SSH, Lock
SSH Port after Failed Logins is set to 3, SSH Port Lock Duration is set to 1 Minute, and Reset
SSH Port Lock Counter After is set to 1 Hour.
• Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Access > Lock Port after Failed Logins is set to
4.
Scenario 1: Web interface locked due to excessive failed logins
A user fails to log in to the local Admin account two times on the system web interface, and another user
fails to log in to the external Active Directory ‘SuperUser' account in a separate system web interface
session. The ‘SuperUser' account is defined as part of the Active Directory Admin Group on the Active
Directory Server.
This means that three failed attempts have been made on the system web interface port—two by one
user and one by a second user. If the next attempt to log in to the system web interface by either user or
some other user is successful, the failed login counter for the system web interface port is reset to zero,
allowing 4 more failed attempts to occur on the system web interface.
On the other hand, if after the third failed login attempt, any user makes a fourth unsuccessful attempt to
any account on the system web interface, further attempts to access the system web interface using any
account credentials from any user are locked out for 1 Minute, the value of the SSH Port Lock Duration
period. After the 1 Minute port lock period has past, logins will once again be allowed. As this example
illustrates, the failed login attempts made to the system web interface accumulate across any attempts to
any account and/or by any user.
Scenario 2: Failed attempts counter resets after failed login window closes
A user fails to log in to the local Admin account two times on the system web interface, and another user
fails to log in to the external Active Directory ‘SuperUser' account in a separate system web interface
session. The ‘SuperUser' account is defined as part of the Active Directory Admin Group on the Active
Directory Server.
This means that three failed attempts have been made on the system web interface port—two by one
user and one by a second user. If no more failed attempts are made within 1 Hour of the first failed
attempt (which is the value of the Reset SSH Port Lock Counter After setting), the failed login attempts
counter is reset to zero, and 4 failed attempts are allowed again before the system web interface is
locked.
95
Securing the System
Related Links
Enable Access to User Settings on page 91
Configure Account Lockout on page 91
Configure Port Lockout Settings

You can limit the number of failed login attempts to your RealPresence Group Series system interface to
protect against brute-force attacks.
If the number of failed login attempts during this window doesn’t reach the maximum number allowed, the
system sets the failed login attempts counter to zero at the end of this window.
The telnet port is locked regardless of how you configure it. A telnet session disconnects after five failed
login attempts. If a new session starts, the system allows another five.
Procedure
The SSH port settings are visible only when Enable Legacy API Over SSH is enabled.
2. Configure the following settings and select Save.
Setting Description
Lock SSH Port after Failed Logins The number of failed login attempts allowed before
the SSH/Telnet interface locks. You can set this to
Off.
SSH Port Lock Duration Specifies the amount of time that the web interface
remains locked due to failed login attempts. When
this period expires, the failed login attempts counter
resets and you can try to log in again.
Reset SSH Port Lock Counter After Specifies the number of hours, starting with the first
failed login attempt, during which subsequent failed
login attempts are counted against the maximum
number allowed (Lock SSH Port after Failed
Logins).
The counter resets when the set period of time
expires or a user successfully logs in.
Lock Port after Failed Logins The number of failed login attempts allowed before
the web interface locks. You can set this to Off.
Allow List
You can create an allow list of IP addresses that can access your RealPresence Group Series system
web interface and SNMP ports.
You can add up to 30 addresses (including IPv4 and IPv6 formats) to an allow list.
96
Securing the System
Note: If your IP addresses are dynamically assigned, regularly update the allow list so those hosts can
connect to your system.
Enable an Allow List

Add or remove IP addresses on your RealPresence Group Series system whitelist.
Procedure
2. Select Enable Whitelist, then Edit Whitelist.
Related Links
Add IP Addresses to an Allow List on page 97
Add IP Addresses to an Allow List

You can edit and add specific IP addresses to an allow list for your RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. Click the Edit Allow List link.
2. Select address type IPv4 or IPv6.
3. In the address text field, enter the IP address of the system you want to allow.
Follow the format suggested by the address type you selected. Select Add.
Repeat this step for all the IP addresses you want to add. You can add web server and SNMP
addresses.
If you entered an address in error, highlight the address in the list and select Clear.
Related Links
IPv4 Address Formats on page 97
IPv6 Address Formats on page 98
IPv4 Address Formats

The configuration requires a single IP address, a range of addresses, or an IP and netmask. (The
netmask represents the number of valid bits of the IPv4 address to use.)
The following are valid IPv4 formats for your RealPresence Group Series system:
• 10.12.128.7
• 172.26.16.0/24
Related Links
97
Securing the System
IPv6 Address Formats

For IPv6 addresses, you can use a Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) notation to represent a range
of IP addresses.
The following are valid IPv6 formats for your RealPresence Group Series system:
• ::1
• 2001:db8:abc:def:10.242.12.23
• 2001:db8::/48
• 2001:db8:abcd:0012::0/64
• 2001:0db8:85a3:0000:0000:1234:0abc:cdef
Related Links
Call Encryption
AES is standard on your RealPresence Group Series system. When enabled, your system automatically
encrypts calls with other systems using AES.
A locked padlock icon displays on the connected monitor(s) when a call is encrypted. If a call is
unencrypted, you see an unlocked padlock. In a multipoint call, some connections might be encrypted
while others aren’t. The padlock may not accurately indicate encryption status if the call is cascaded or
includes an audio-only endpoint. To avoid security ambiguity, participants can verbally communicate the
state of their padlock icon at the beginning of a call.
Remember the following about AES encryption:
• AES encryption is not supported on systems registered to an Avaya H.323 gatekeeper.
• Systems in a call support only 256-bit encryption key with an XT5000 or XT7000 Avaya endpoint.
• For systems with a maximum speed of 6 Mbps for unencrypted calls, the maximum speed for
encrypted SIP calls is 4 Mbps.
The following AES cryptographic algorithms ensure flexibility when negotiating secure media transport:
• H.323 (per H.235.6)
◦ AES-CBC-128 / DH-1024
◦ AES-CBC-256 / DH-2048
• SIP (per RFCs 3711, 4568, 6188)
◦ AES_CM_128_HMAC_SHA1_32
The systems also support the use of FIPS 140 validated cryptography, which is required in some
instances, such as when used by the U.S. federal government. When the you enable the Require FIPS
140 Cryptography setting, all cryptography used on the system comes from a software module that has
been validated to FIPS 140-2 standards. You can find its FIPS 140-2 validation certificate here: http://
csrc.nist.gov/groups/STM/cmvp/documents/140-1/140val-all.htm#1747.
98
Securing the System
Configure Encryption
Configure encryption settings on your RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security > Encryption.
Setting Description
Require AES Encryption for Calls Specifies how to encrypt calls with other participant
systems that support AES encryption.
• Off: AES encryption is disabled.
• When Available: AES encryption is used with
systems that support it, but the system also
allows unencrypted calls. For multipoint calls,
this means some systems might connect
through AES encryption while others don’t.
• Required for Video Calls Only: AES
encryption is used in all video calls. Calls with
systems that don’t support it fail. Audio calls
using an attached SoundStation IP 7000 can
connect.
• Required for All Calls: AES encryption is used
in all types of calls. Calls with systems that
don’t support it fail. Audio calls using an
attached SoundStation IP 7000 aren’t allowed
to connect, since these calls aren’t encrypted.
Require FIPS 140 Cryptography When set, the system uses only FIPS 140-2-
approved cryptographic modules. Cipher suites
and protocols not approved by FIPS 140-2 are
disabled.
Disable TLS v1.0 Disables the TLS v1.0 application. By default, the
system disables TLS v1.0 in Maximum, High, and
Medium Security Profiles. TLS v1.0 is enabled by
default for the Low Security Profile is disabled.
Disable TLS v1.1 Disables the TLS 1.1 application.
Configuring Encryption Settings for SVC Calls

You must complete two tasks to enable encryption for SVC calls on your RealPresence Group Series
system:
• Set the transport protocol.
• Set AES encryption.
Related Links
Set the Transport Protocol for SVC Calls on page 100
Set Up AES Encryption for SVC Calls on page 100
99
Securing the System
Setting Call Preferences for SVC on page 123
Set the Transport Protocol for SVC Calls

You can set up the transport protocol for SVC calls for your RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network.
2. Click SIP to expand the section.
3. In the Transport Protocol list, select TLS.
4. Click Save.
Related Links
Configuring Encryption Settings for SVC Calls on page 99
Set Up AES Encryption for SVC Calls

You can set up AES encryption for SVC calls for the RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security.
2. Click Encryption to expand the section.
3. In the Require AES Encryption for Calls list, select When Available, Required for Video Calls
Only, or Required for All Calls.
4. Click Save.
Related Links
Verify H.323 Media Encryption

To provide extra security for encrypted H.323 calls, the RealPresence Group Series system provides an
encryption check code. Both parties in a call can use this check code to verify that their call is not being
intercepted by a 3rd party.
The check code is a 16-digit hexadecimal number that is calculated so that the number is the same at
both sites in the call. The numbers are identical if, and only if, the key generation algorithm is performed
between the two sites in the call and is not intercepted and modified by a 3rd party.
Procedure
1. Establish an encrypted H.323 call between two sites.
2. At each site, locate the Call Statistics information on the Place a Call screen of the system web
interface.
The check code also displays under Diagnostics > System > Call Statistics in the Transmit
column of the Call Encryption section.
3. Verbally verify that the code is the same at both sites.
• If the codes match, the call is secure. Proceed with the call.
• If the codes do not match, then there is a possibility that the key exchange is compromised.
Hang up the call. Next, check the network path from the local system to the far-end system
100
Securing the System
to determine if the systems are experiencing a Man in the Middle attack. This occurs when a
foreign device tricks the local system into creating an encryption key using information from
the imposter. Then, the imposter can decode the data sent by the local system and
eavesdrop on the call.
802.1x Authentication
This section provides system administrators with the procedures and reference information needed to
successfully deploy and configure the Polycom Real Presence Group Series in a secure 802.1X
environment.
Supported 802.1x Configurations

Polycom RealPresence Group Series system supports the authentication protocols listed below. Each
authentication protocol has a unique configuration requirements.
• MD5 (requires Identity and Password)
• PEAP (requires Trusted pool of root/CA certificates, Identity and Password)
• TTLS (requires Trusted pool of root/CA certificates, Identity and Password)
• TLS ( requires Client certifiactes Trusted pool of root/CA certificates and Identity
Configure 802.1x Authentication

This section provides information on installing the Real Presence Group Series system on a network that
uses 802.1x.
• Complete the setup wizard using the local interface and the remote control so that you can enter
the 802.1x credentials, which then allows the system to connect to the network.
• Connect the system to a local network that does not use 802.1x so you can use the web interface to
complete the setup wizard. After you complete the wizard settings and enter the 802.1x credentials,
you can connect the system to the network that uses 802.1x authentication.
Procedure
1. From the system local interface, go to Admin Settings > LAN Properties > Enable 802.1x.
Specifies whether EAP/802.1x network access is enabled.
1. Identity: Specifies the system’s identity used for 802.1x authentication. This setting is
available only when EAP/802.1x is enabled.
2. Password: Specifies the system’s password used for 802.1x authentication. This setting is
required when EAP/802.1x is enabled.
Note: EAP-TLS uses details inside the certificate parameters for authentication. In this
case, the Identity field is required, but the password can be left blank.
2. A root CA certificate must be installed on the RealPresence Group Series system(client) – It will
be used to validate the server certificate to send the EAP-TLS handshake.
3. A client certificate must be installed on the Real Presence Group Series system (client) – it will be
sent in the EAP-TLS handshake by Real Presence Group Series system. There are two possible
ways:
• CSR Method
101
Securing the System
1. Generate CSR by providing the options in Real Presence Group Series web user
interface.
2. CSR can be uploaded to a designated place (Private key cannot be uploaded).
3. CSR is signed by the CA resulting in certificate. Note this CA must be installed on the
AAA server to validate the client certificate.
4. Install the certificate from Real Presence Group Series web user interface.
• SCEP
This will eliminate all the manual procedure in the CSR Method. However, this needs the
infrastructure support: SCEP Server (For eg: SCEP service enabled on Microsoft Network
Device Enrollment Service or Cisco Identity Services Engine), Switch that can facilitate
automatic fallback to staging network (in which SCEP certs are provisioned) and AAA
server.
Related Links
Certificate Signing Requests on page 106
Install Certificates on page 111
Security Certificates on page 105
How Certificates are Used on page 106
Configure Certificate Validation Settings on page 110
Firewall/NAT Traversal
Configure your RealPresence Group Series system for firewall or network address translation (NAT)
traversal using the H.460.18 and H.460.19 standards.
The following illustration shows how a service provider might provide H.460 firewall traversal between two
physical locations. In this example, the Polycom Video Border Proxy (VBP) device is on the edge of the
service provider’s network, facilitating IP calls between systems behind different firewalls.
102
Securing the System
Ref. Number Description
1 Polycom Video Border Proxy
2 Gatekeeper
3 IP network
4 Firewall
5 RealPresence Group Series system
6 Firewall
7 RealPresence Group Series system
Basic Firewall/NAT Traversal

Your RealPresence Group Series system can connect to SIP-based Polycom solutions using the Acme
Packet Net-Net family of session border controllers (SBCs).
A system connects to the Acme Packet Net-Net SBC as a remote enterprise endpoint, which is registered
to the enterprise's SIP infrastructure and connects to an internal enterprise endpoint through the
enterprise firewall.
For details about the use and configuration of the Acme Packet Net-Net SBC used in conjunction with this
feature, refer to Deploying Polycom Unified Communications in an Acme Packet Net-Net Enterprise
Session Director Environment.
Polycom systems also provide full mutual TLS support for SIP and XMPP Presence connections. Full
mutual TLS support gives administrators the ability to identify and authenticate devices attempting to join
conferences from outside the network.
Configure the H.460 Firewall/NAT Traversal

You can enable and configure H.460 firewall or NAT traversal on your RealPresence Group Series
system.
Make sure you register your system with a network device that supports H.460.18 and H.460.19
standards (for example, a RealPresence Access Director system or a Polycom VBP device).
Procedure
1. Enable firewall traversal on the system.
a. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > Firewall.
b. Select Enable H.460 Firewall Traversal.
2. Verify the firewalls that you traverse allow your system to use outbound TCP and UDP
connections.
• Firewalls with a stricter rule set must allow the system to use at least the following outbound
TCP and UDP ports: 1720 (TCP), 14085-15084 (TCP), 1719 (UDP), and 16386-25386
(UDP).
• Firewalls must allow inbound traffic to the TCP and UDP ports used for outbound traffic.
103
Securing the System
Setting Description
Fixed Ports Defines which TCP and UDP ports your system
uses for firewall traversal.
Enable this option if your firewall isn’t H.323
compatible. The system assigns a port range
starting with the TCP and UDP ports you specify
(port 3230 is where the range begins by default).
Note: For the fixed ports you configure, you

must open the corresponding ports on
your firewall. For H.323, open TCP port
1720. For SIP, open UDP port 5060, TCP
5060, or TCP 5061 depending on if you’re
using UDP, TCP, or TLS, respectively, as
the SIP transport protocol.
Disable this option if your firewall is H.323

compatible or the system isn’t behind a firewall.
TCP Ports The starting value for the range of TCP and UDP
ports the system uses. The system automatically
UDP Ports
configures the range based on the beginning value
you set here.
To allow H.323 traffic, you need two TCP and eight
UDP ports per connection. You must also open
TCP port 1720 on the firewall.
To allow SIP traffic, you need TCP port 5060 and
eight UDP ports per connection.
UDP port range: Because systems support ICE,
the range of fixed UDP ports is is 32, 62, and 82 for
RealPresence Group Series 300/310, 500, and 700
systems, respectively. The system cycles through
the available ports from call to call. After the system
restarts, the first call begins with the first port
number, either 49152 or 3230. Subsequent calls
start with the last port used. For example, the first
call uses ports 3230-3236, the second call
3236-3242, the third call 3242-3248, and so on.
Fixed ports range and filters: You might notice
that the source port of a SIP signaling message is
not in the fixed ports range. When your firewall is
filtering on source ports, in the system web
interface, go to the SIP page and enable Force
Connection Reuse. When enabled, the system
uses port 5060 and 5061 for the source and
destination port (these must be open on the
firewall).
104
Securing the System
Setting Description
NAT Configuration Specifies if the system automatically determines

the NAT public (WAN) address.
• If the system isn’t behind a NAT or is connected
to the network through a VPN, set this option to
Off.
• If the system is behind a NAT that allows HTTP
traffic, set this option to Auto.
• If the system is behind a NAT that doesn’t allow
HTTP traffic, set this option to Manual.
NAT Public (WAN) Address The address callers from outside the LAN use to
call your system. If you configured the NAT
manually, enter the NAT public address here.
You can configure this option only when you set
NAT Configuration to Manual.
NAT is H.323 Compatible Identifies whether the system is behind a NAT that
can translate H.323 traffic.
This option is available only when you set NAT
Configuration to Auto or Manual.
Address Displayed in Global Directory Choose whether to display the system’s public or
private address in the global directory.
This option is available only when you set NAT
Configuration to Auto or Manual.
Enable SIP Keep-Alive Messages Specifies whether to regularly transmit keep-alive

messages on the SIP signaling channel and on
RTP sessions part of SIP calls. Keep-alive
messages maintain connections through
firewall/NAT devices that are often used at network
edges.
If your system is in an Avaya SIP environment, it’s
recommended that you disable this setting to
enable calls to fully connect.
Real-time media streams often use UDP for their speeds. If your system is behind a firewall that restricts
access to UDP ports, however, you can configure your system for only TCP connections.
Caution: Systems deployed outside a firewall are potentially vulnerable to unauthorized access. Visit
the Polycom Security section of the Knowledge Base at the Poly Online Support Center for
timely security information. You can also register to receive periodic updates and advisories.
Security Certificates
If your organization has deployed a public key infrastructure (PKI) for securing connections between
devices on your network, Polycom recommends that you have a strong understanding of certificate
105
Securing the System
management and how it applies to your RealPresence Group Series system before you integrate these
products with the PKI.
Systems can use certificates to authenticate network connections to and from the system. The system
uses configuration and management techniques typical of PKI to manage certificates, certificate signing
requests, and revocation checking. ANSI X.509 standards regulate the characteristics of certificates and
revocation. Polycom supports the following certificate file formats: .pem,.crt/.cert.
Related Links
Configure 802.1x Authentication on page 101
How Certificates are Used

RealPresence Group Series systems can generate CSRs to send to a certificate authority (CA). (A CA is
a trusted entity that officially issues, or signs, digital certificates.) Once signed by the CA, you can install
the certificate on the system for its TLS connections.
Systems support, and typically require, two certificates when used in an environment with fully deployed
PKI:
• Server certificate: The system's web server presents this certificate after receiving connection
requests from browsers attempting to connect to the system's web interface.
• Client certificate: The system presents this to authenticate its identity while trying to connect to a
remote server. Examples of remote servers include the RealPresence Resource Manager system, a
SIP proxy/registrar server, or an LDAP directory server.
When systems are in an environment that does not have a fully deployed PKI, you do not need to create
and install these certificates because systems automatically generate self-signed certificates to establish
secure TLS connections. When a full PKI is deployed, however, self-signed certificates are not trusted
and CA-signed certificates must be used. The following sections describe how to generate and use
certificates by using the system web interface.
Related Links
Certificate Signing Requests

The RealPresence Group Series system lets you install one client and one server certificate so that
network peers can identify the system. Each of these certificates require a CSR. Also known as an
unsigned certificate, a CSR must be submitted to a CA to be signed, after which the certificate can be
installed on your system.
Related Links
Security Certificates for RealPresence Touch on page 225
Certificate Revocation on page 112
Configure the CRL Method on page 113
106
Securing the System
Certificate Signing Request Requirements

Whether you need to generate a client-type CSR, a server-type CSR, or both depends on which features
and services you intend to use, and whether your network environment supports certificate-based
authentication for those services. In most cases, both certificates are needed for RealPresence Group
Series systems.
For example, if your system is configured to use any of the following features, and the servers providing
those services perform certificate-based authentication before allowing access to them, you must create a
client-type CSR and add the resulting certificate signed by the CA:
• RealPresence Resource Manager system Provisioning
• RealPresence Resource Manager system Monitoring
• RealPresence Resource Manager system LDAP Directory
• RealPresence Resource Manager system Presence
• Calendaring
• SIP
• 802.1X
The system web server uses the server-type CSR and resulting certificate whenever a user attempts to
connect to the system web interface. The web server does so by presenting the server certificate to the
browser to identify the system to the browser as part of allowing the browser to connect to the system.
The browser's user needs the server certificate if he or she wants to be certain about the identity of the
system he or she is connecting to. Settings in the web browser typically control the validation of the
server certificate, but you can also validate the certificate manually.
To obtain a client or server certificate, you must first create a CSR. You can create one client and one
server CSR and submit each to the appropriate CA for signing. After the CSR is signed by a CA, it
becomes a certificate you can add to the system.
Related Links
Create a Certificate Signing Request

Create server and client CSRs to identify your RealPresence Group Series system to your network peers.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Certificates > Certificate
Options.
2. Click Create for the type of CSR you want to create, Signing Request Server or Signing
Request Client.
The procedure is the same for server and client CSRs.
3. Configure these settings on the Create Signing Request screen and click Create.
107
Securing the System
Setting Description
Hash Algorithm Specifies the hash algorithm for the CSR. You can
select SHA-256 or keep the default SHA-1.
Common Name (CN) Specifies the name that the system assigns to the
CSR.
Use the following guidelines when configuring the
Common Name:
• For systems registered in DNS, use the FQDN
of the system.
• For systems not registered in DNS, use the IP
address of the system. Default is blank.
Maximum characters: 64; truncated if
necessary.
Organizational Unit (OU) Specifies the unit of business defined by your

organization. Default is blank. Maximum
characters: 64.
Note: The system supports only one OU field. If

you want the signed certificate to include
more than one OU field, you must
download and edit the CSR manually.
Organization (O) Specifies your organization’s name. Default is

blank. Maximum characters: 64.
City or Locality (L) Specifies the city where your organization is

located. Default is blank. Maximum characters:
128.
State or Province (ST) Specifies the state or province where your

organization is located. Default is blank. Maximum
characters: 128.
Country (C) Displays the country selected in Admin Settings >

General Settings > My Information. You can’t edit
this field.
SAN: FQDN Specifies the FQDN assigned to the system. This is

the same as the Common Name (CN), but it isn’t
truncated. Default is blank. Maximum characters:
253.
SAN: Additional Name Specifies an additional name. Default is blank.

Maximum characters: 253.
SAN: IPv4 Address Default is the IPv4 address of the system.

108
Securing the System
Setting Description
SAN: IPv4 Address (DNS) Default is the IPv4 address of system. This field
provides the IPv4 address in ASCII format, which is
sometimes needed for Microsoft server
interoperability. Maximum characters: 15.
SAN: IPv6 Global Address Default is the IPv6 Global Address of the system.
SAN: IPv6 Site Local Address Default is the IPv6 Site Local Address of the
system. Maximum characters: 40.
SAN: IPv6 Link Local Address Default is the IPv6 Link Local Address of the
system. Maximum characters: 40.
A message indicating that the CSR is created displays. Two links appear next to the signing request that
you just created (Signing Request Server or Signing Request Client).
• Download Signing Request enables you to download the CSR so that it can be sent to a CA for
signature.
• Create enables you to view the fields of the CSR as they are currently set in the CSR. If you
change any of the values you previously configured, you can click Create to generate a new CSR
that can then be downloaded.
Note: Only a single outstanding CSR of either type can exist at a time. After a CSR is generated,
get it signed and installed on your system before creating another. For example, if you
generate a client CSR and then, prior to having it signed and installed on the system,
another client CSR is generated, the system discards and invalidates the previous CSR,
and any attempt to install a signed version of it results in an error.
Related Links
RealPresence Server Address Configuration in PKI-enabled Environments

You can configure server addresses for services listed in Certificate Validation Settings that need a
client-type CSR, such as SIP, LDAP directory, etc. If the server address is contained in the server
certificate that it presents during a connection, you might need to use a particular address format for your
RealPresence Group Series system. In this case, use the following guidance to configure server
addresses:
• If the certificate contains the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the server, use the FQDN when
configuring the server address.
• If the certificate contains the IP address of the server, use the IP address when configuring the
server address.
• If the certificate does not contain any the server's address in any form, you can use either the
FQDN or the IP address of the server when configuring the server address.
109
Securing the System
Related Links
Enable PKI Certificates

If your RealPresence Group Series system is provisioned by RealPresence Resource Manager and you
plan to use PKI certificates, you must configure the Host Name setting.
Procedure
1. On the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > LAN Properties > LAN
Options.
2. At Host Name, use the same name that the RealPresence Resource Manager uses to provision
the system.
This name must be the same so that certificate signing requests (CSRs) generated during
certificate installation have the correct host name information.
Related Links
Security Certificates on page 105
Using a Provisioning Service on page 34
Configure Certificate Validation Settings

Certificates are authorized externally when they are signed by the CA. The certificates can be
automatically validated when they are used to establish an authenticated network connection. To perform
this validation, the RealPresence Group Series system must have certificates installed for all CAs that are
part of the trust chain. A trust chain is the hierarchy of CAs that have issued certificates from the device
being authenticated, through the intermediate CAs that have issued certificates to the various CAs,
leading back to a root CA, which is a known trusted CA. The following sections describe how to install
and manage these certificates.
A certificate exchange is between a server and a client, both of which are peers. When a user accesses
the system web interface, the system is the server and the web browser is the client application. In other
situations, such as when the system connects to LDAP directory services, the system is the client and the
LDAP directory server is the server.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Certificates > Certificate
Options.
2. Configure these settings on the Certificates screen and click Save.
110
Securing the System
Setting Description
Maximum Peer Certificate Chain Depth Specifies how many links a certificate chain can have. The
term peer certificate refers to any certificate sent by the far-
end host when a network connection is being established
between the two systems.
Always Validate Peer Certificates From Controls whether the system requires a browser to present a
Server valid certificate when it tries to connect to the system web
interface.
Installed Certificates Allows the administrator to either view installed certificates or

to add a new certificate.
Signing Request Server Allows the administrator to create a new server request
certificate.
Signing Request Client Allows the administrator to create a new client request
certificate.
Related Links
RealPresence Server Address Configuration in PKI-enabled Environments on page 109
Create a Certificate Signing Request on page 107
Certificate Signing Request Requirements on page 107
Install Certificates
After you have downloaded a CSR and it has been signed by a CA, the resulting certificate is ready to
install on the RealPresence Group Series system. The following section outlines how to do this, and the
procedure is the same to install the client certificate, server certificate, and any required CA-type
certificates.
Procedure
1. To open the certificate section, at Installed Certificates, click View and Add.
2. Next to Add Certificate, click Browse to search for and select a certificate.
Your system accepts the following certificate file formats: .pem,.crt/.cert .You might be
installing a client or server certificate that has been signed by a CA after having been previously
generated as a CSR, or installing a CA certificate needed by the system to validate a certificate it
receives from another system.
3. Click Open.
111
Securing the System
The system checks the certificate data and adds it to the list. If you don't see the certificate in the
list, the system was unable to recognize the certificate. This process is sometimes referred to as
installing a certificate.
You can select a certificate in the list to view its contents. You can also remove a certificate from
the list by clicking Remove.
4. If needed, click Close to close the certificate section of the screen.
5. Click Save.
When you add a CA certificate to the system, the certificate becomes trusted for the purpose of
validating peer certificates.
Note: If you do not add the server certificate for the system before using the system web
interface, you might receive error messages from your browser stating that the security
certificate for the web site “Polycom” cannot be verified. Most browsers allow the user to
proceed after this warning is displayed. See the Help section of your browser for
instructions on how to do this.
Related Links
Certificate Revocation
During certificate validation, your RealPresence Group Series system checks whether certificates used
for secure communications are revoked by their issuing CAs.
Your system can check certificate revocation status with one of the following standard methods:
• Certificate Revocation List (CRL): File containing a list of certificates revoked by their issuing CA.
You must manually upload CRLs to your system.
• Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP): Your system contacts an OCSP responder, a web
server that provides revocation status through a query/response exchange.
Related Links
112
Securing the System
Configure the CRL Method

Use the CRL method for revocation checking.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Certificates > Revocation.
Setting Description
Revocation Method To use the CRL revocation method, select CRL.
Allow Incomplete Revocation Checks When enabled, a certificate in the chain of trust
validates without a revocation check if no
corresponding CRL from the issuing CA is installed.
Add CRL Browse for and select a CRL to install.
3. View automatically and manually downloaded CRLs on the page.

Make sure to install CRLs from each CA that issued the certificates on your system.
4. Optional: To delete a CRL from the list, select Remove.
Related Links
Remove a Certificate and CRL on page 113
Remove a Certificate and CRL

In some cases, expired certificates or CRLs might prevent you from accessing the RealPresence Group
Series system web interface. You can use the local interface to reset your system without certificates, to
restore access to the system web interface.
Procedure
1. In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics > Reset System.
2. If needed, enter the Admin ID and Password.
3. Enable the Delete Certificates field.
4. Select Reset System.
The system restarts after deleting all installed certificates and CRLs.
Related Links
113
Securing the System
Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol

The Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) is a service that automatically requests and renews
certificates for large deployments of endpoints and software clients.
The SCEP service triggers when you boot up the system, unplug and replug the LAN, or enable the
service in the web user interface. The system checks the system’s certificate data to obtain digital
certificates based on the following criteria:
• If the certificate doesn’t exist, the SCEP service initiates the enrollment process.
• If the certificate exists, the SCEP service verifies the renewal and expiration dates and does one of
the following:
If the current date is... The service...
Before the renewal date Looks for a time thread and creates one if none
exist.
On or after the renewal date but on or before the Initiates the renewal process.
expiration date
After the expiration date Removes the certificate using a system module and
initiates the enrollment process.
Note: You can configure the renewal date in the SCEP settings.
Note the following information regarding SCEP:

• When the SCEP installs a new certificate in a system, it ignores the existing manually installed
SCEP certificate.
• Update the challenge password manually.
• The SCEP server communicates only through HTTP, and the system only supports one SCEP
server at a time.
• The maximum key size supported for the RSA key is 2048 bit.
• You can also configure the SCEP settings on the RealPresence Group Series system through
RealPresence Resource Manager.
Make sure none of the values against each parameter in SCEP settings are empty while
provisioning through RealPresence Resource Manager.
Note: When a RealPresence Touch device is paired with RealPresence Group Series system, you can
view the SCEP settings for RealPresence Group Series system on RealPresence Touch device.
However, you cannot edit them. When the SCEP feature is enabled on a standalone
RealPresence Touch device, you can edit the setings from RealPresence Touch device.
Fore more information on the configuration options, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Resource
Manager System Opertions Guide available at Polycom Support.
114
Securing the System
Install SCEP
If you already have an SCEP certificate installed in your system, you don’t have to disable EAP/802.1x
authentication before you install SCEP. Verify your system’s certificate settings before you install the
service.
Procedure
1. Do one of the following :
• From the RealPresence Group Series system web interface, go to Admin Settings >
Network > LAN Properties > LAN Options.
• From the RealPresence Touch device web interface, go to Network Settings.
2. Clear the Enable EAP/802.1x check box.
3. Restart the system.
4. Update your system with new software that includes SCEP.
5. Verify the SCEP certificate is installed into the system.
6. Enable EAP/802.1x authentication.
Configure SCEP Settings

You can configure the SCEP settings from the system web interface.
Procedure
Security > Certificates.
•From the RealPresence Touch device web interface, go to Security > Certificates >
Certificate Options.
2. Select View and Update.
3. Select Enable SCEP and configure the following settings:
Setting Description
SCEP URL The URL of the SCEP server.
SCEP Challenge Password Password configured in the SCEP server to generate a certificate.
Automatic Renewal The automatic renewal period before certificates expire. You can
choose the period based on the number of Days or Percentage of
time left on a completed certificate.
Days The number of days before expiration to renew the certificate.
Percentage The percentage of the certificate that the system must validly
complete to renew the certificate.
Renewal Entry Attempts The number of times a certificate attempts to renew.
Enrollment Retry Attempts The time interval a certificate attempts to renew.
CA Profile The profile in the server set by the Admin.
115
Securing the System
Setting Description
Common Name The system takes an email as a common name.
Organizational Unit The unit of business as defined by your organization.
Organization Your organization’s name.
City or Locality The city or local area where your organization is located.
State or Province The state or province where your organization is located.
Country The country where your organization is located.
4. Select Save.
View SCEP Certificates

You can verify the SCEP certificates from the system web interface.
Procedure
Security > Certificates.
• In the RealPresence Touch device web interface, go to Security > Certificates >
Certificate Options.
2. To open the certificate section, at Installed Certificates, select View and Update.
Set Up a Security Banner

The following is an example of banner text:
This device is the property of Poly, Inc., and must be used in accordance
with the company’s acceptable use policy.
The security banner is not supported on the Polycom Touch Control.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Security Banner.
2. Configure these settings and click Save.
Setting Description
Enable Security Banner Enable or disable the ability to display a security

banner when logging in to the local interface or the
system web interface.
116
Securing the System
Setting Description
Banner Text • Custom: Enter any text for the banner.

• DoD: A default U.S. Department of Defense
security banner. You can’t view or change this
text on the local interface, but you can in the
Local System Banner Text The security banner that displays on the local
interface. Enter up to 2408 single-byte or 1024
double-byte characters. The text wraps to the next
line as you type, but you can press Enter anywhere
to force a line break.
Remote Access Banner Text The security banner that displays on the system
web interface and command-line API (SSH or
telnet). Enter up to 2408 single-byte or 1024
double-byte characters. The text wraps to the next
line as you type, but you can press Enter
anywhere to force a line break.
Set a Meeting Password

If you set up a meeting password, users must supply the password to join multipoint calls on the
RealPresence Group Series system when the call uses the internal multipoint option instead of a bridge.
Remember the following points about meeting passwords:
• Do not set a meeting password if multipoint calls include audio-only endpoints. Audio-only
endpoints are unable to participate in password-protected calls.
• Microsoft Office Communicator clients are unable to join password-protected multipoint calls.
• SIP endpoints are unable to connect to password-protected multipoint calls.
• If a meeting password is set for a call, People+Content™ IP clients must enter the password before
joining the meeting.
• Meeting passwords cannot contain spaces or be more than 32 characters.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Meeting Password.
2. Enable and configure the Meeting Password setting.
Visual Security Classification

This feature helps participants remain conscious of their meeting’s security classification when in a
BroadWorks-managed call on the RealPresence Group Series system.
During and throughout a call, the Visual Security Classification (VSC) provides a visual indication to the
system user of the calls security level which is dynamically calculated using the lowest security rating of
all users and gateways within the call. During a call, you can override the security classification and
assign a lower security classification level.
117
Securing the System
Remember the following:

• Each BroadSoft-registered endpoint in the conference has a security classification level.
• BroadSoft Application Server determines the default security classification level for a BroadWorks
conference, and that default is the lowest of the levels involved in the conference. VSC is only
supported on BroadWorks conferencing systems which are VSC aware and which have visibility of
all participants in the call. VSC is not supported on Polycom VMRs, as BroadWorks does not have
visibility of the callers on the Polycom MCU.
• The security classification level is shared with all the endpoints that support the Visual Security
Classification feature.
• The security classification level of a conference call is re-evaluated whenever an endpoint enters or
leaves a conference or when a user modifies the security classification level of an endpoint.
Any user who joins the call from an outside or unknown network is designated an “Unclassified” security
classification level.
Visual Security Classification is disabled by default and can be enabled with a provisioning server or in
the system web interface. Before enabling this feature, do the following:
• Register the system to a BroadSoft R20 call server.
Disable the Multipoint Video Conferencing option key.
• Disable AS-SIP.
Related Links
Enable Visual Security Classification on page 118
Enable Visual Security Classification

Enable Visual Security Classification on your RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. From the system web interface, navigate to Admin Settings > Security > Global Security.
2. Under Visual Security Classification, select Enable Visual Security Classification and click
Save.
3. Click the Adjust SIP Settings link or navigate to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > SIP.
4. Under Registrar Server Type, select Unknown.
Related Links
Visual Security Classification on page 117
Enable Room and Call Monitoring

Before you can use room and call monitoring, you must enable the feature in the RealPresence Group
Series system local interface.
Procedure
1. In the local interface, go to > Settings > Administration > Security > Remote Access.
2. To allow the room or call to be viewed remotely, enable Allow Video Display on Web.
118
Securing the System
Monitor a Room or Call

The monitoring feature in the system web interface allows system administrator to view a call or the room
where the system is installed.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Utilities > Tools > Remote Monitoring.
2. You can perform the following tasks out of a call:
• To wake the system, click Wake the system.
• To adjust system volume, click Volume.
• To share content, click Show Content.
• To adjust the near camera, click Near Camera.
• To view camera presets, click Near Camera or Far Camera and click Presets.
3. You can perform this additional task in a call:
• To adjust the far camera, click Far Camera.
Enable Video Shapshot During a Call

Sends a 1280*720 JPEG image of the near-site video to an internal or external FTP server. By using a
telnet command snapshot<hostName> <:port(optional)> <userName(optional)>
<password(optional)>.
Procedure
1. In the TV user interface, go to Settings > Administration > Security > Remote Access.
2. Select the Allow Snapshot from Telnet check box.
For more information about the telnet commands, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group
Series Integrator Reference Guide.
Send a Message to a System

If you are experiencing difficulties with connectivity or audio, you might want to send a message to the
system that you are managing. Only the near-end site can see the message; it is not broadcast to all the
sites in the call.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Utilities > Send a Message.
2. On the Send a Message screen, enter a message (up to 100 characters in length), then click
Send.
The message is displayed for 15 seconds on the screen of the system that you are managing.
Configure the OCSP Method

Use the OSCP method for revocation checking.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Certificates > Revocation.
119
Securing the System
Setting Description
Revocation Method To use the OCSP revocation method, select OCSP.
Allow Incomplete Revocation Checks When enabled, your system considers a revocation
check successful if there is no response or the
OCSP responder indicates a certificate’s status is
unknown.
Regardless of how you configure this setting, the
following statements apply:
• If the OCSP responder indicates a known
revoked status, your system treats it as a
revocation check failure and doesn’t allow the
connection.
• If the OCSP responder indicates a known good
status, your system treats it as a successful
revocation check and allows the connection.
Global Responder Address Specifies the URI of the OCSP responder (for
example, http://
responder.example.com/ocsp). The
responder is used when Use Responder
Specified in Certificate is disabled and sometimes
even when it’s enabled. It’s recommended that you
always include a URI in this field regardless of how
you configure Use Responder Specified in
Certificate.
Use Responder Specified in Certificate Some certificates include the OCSP responder
address. When you enable this setting, your
system attempts to use this address (when
present) instead of the Global Responder
Address you specified.
Note: Only HTTP URLs in a certificate’s AIA

field are supported.
120
Configuring Call Settings
Topics:
• Configure Call Settings

• Setting Call Preferences for SVC
• Set Preferred Call Speeds
• Configure the Recent Calls List
• Set Call Answering Mode
• Set the Maximum Call Length
• Set a Multipoint Viewing Mode
• Enable Flashing Incoming Call Alerts
• Setting Up Audio-Only Calls
• Displaying Participant Names Continuously in a Call
• Configure System Display Name During Call
Configure Call Settings

You can configure call settings in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Call
Settings.
2. Configure the settings in the following table.
Setting Description
Maximum Time in Call Sets the maximum number of hours allowed for a
call.
When the maximum time expires, the system
prompts the user to hang up. If the user doesn’t
answer within one minute, the call automatically
ends. If the user chooses to stay in the call, the
system doesn’t prompt the user again.
121
Setting Description
Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video Specifies whether the system answers an incoming
call when not in a call. Choose one of the following
options:
• Yes: The system automatically answers
incoming point-to-point calls.
• No: Users must answer incoming calls
manually.
• Do Not Disturb: The system rejects incoming
calls without notification.
Auto Answer Multipoint Video Specifies whether the system answers an incoming
call when it is already in a call (regardless if the
system has multipoint call capability). Choose one
of the following options:
• Yes: The system automatically answers
incoming point-to-point calls.
• No: Users must answer incoming calls
manually.
• Do Not Disturb: The system rejects incoming
calls without notification.
Multipoint Mode Specifies the multipoint viewing mode when the

system hosts a multipoint call. Choose one of the
following options:
• Auto
• Full Screen
• Discussion
• Presentation
Display Icons in a Call Specifies whether to display onscreen graphics,

including icons and help text, during calls.
Enable Flashing Incoming Call Notification Specifies whether you see an incoming call
notification.
Preferred 'Place a Call' Navigation Specifies the default options that display on the
local interface Place a Call screen. Choose one of
the following options:
• Keypad: Displays recently-dialed numbers and
a dialpad.
• Contacts: Displays a screen for searching a
directory. The multitiered directory (LDAP) root
entry displays at the top of the Contacts list,
which combines your search results and
favorites.
• Recent Calls: Lists previous calls in
chronological order.
122
Setting Description
Automatic Self View Control Specifies if the Self View setting displays in the
local interface.
• If you enable Automatic Self View Control,
the Self View setting isn’t available. The system
automatically chooses when to display the self-
view window, which depends on available
display space and the display mode, among
other factors.
• If you don’t enable Automatic Self View
Control, the user can turn Self View on and off
from the local interface.
Related Links
Set a Multipoint Viewing Mode on page 128
Setting Call Preferences for SVC

Scalable Video Coding (SVC) conferencing for RealPresence Group Series systems provides the
following benefits:
• Fewer video resource requirements
• Better error resiliency
• Lower latency
• More flexibility with display layouts
You can make and receive SVC multipoint calls when the system is connected to an SVC-compatible
bridge through the Polycom® Distributed Media Application (DMA™). In an SVC-based conference, each
SVC-enabled endpoint transmits multiple bit streams, called simulcasting, to the Polycom RealPresence
Collaboration Server (RMX). The RealPresence Collaboration Server sends or relays selected video
streams to the endpoints without sending the entire video layout. The streams are assembled into a
layout by the SVC-enabled endpoints according to each of their different display capabilities and layout
configurations.
To make SVC point-to-point calls, the system must be registered to a Skype for Business 2015 server. In
a Skype for Business 2015 hosted multipoint or point-to-point call, you can view multiple far-end sites in
layouts. RealPresence Group 500 and 700 systems display up to five far-end sites on Skype for Business
2015 hosted (SVC) multipoint calls.
For more information on the features, limitations, and layouts of SVC-based conferencing, refer to the
Polycom RealPresence SVC-Based Conferencing Solutions Deployment Guide available at Polycom
Support.
Related Links
Configure SVC Dialing Options on page 124
123
Configure SVC Dialing Options

You can specify video and audio dialing preferences for your RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
Options.
Setting Description
Scalable Video Coding Preference (H.264) Specifies whether to use scalable or advanced
video coding:
• SVC then AVC: Use SVC when possible;
otherwise, use AVC.
• AVC Only: This setting disables SVC.
• AVC then SVC
This setting doesn’t apply to Skype for Business-
hosted calls, since SVC is negotiated automatically
by Skype for Business Server 2015 or the Skype
for Business 2015 client.
Enable H.239 Enables the use of a standards-based specification

for parallel video streams (people and content).
Enable this setting if you know call participants
support H.239.
Enable Audio-Only Calls Specifies one additional outbound audio-only call

from the system. This occurs when a multipoint
conference call reaches the maximum number of
calls allowed for the license type.
TIP Specifies that TIP is enabled on a RealPresence

Group Series system and that the system can
interoperate with TIP endpoints.
Call Type Order Specifies an order preference for video or voice

calls. Select either Video then Phone, or Phone
then Video. This setting is read-only if the video
system has no phone connections.
124
Setting Description
Video Dialing Order Specifies how the system places video calls to
directory entries with more than one type of
number.
Select one of the following protocols for each
preference:
• IP H.323
• SIP
• Gateway
This setting also determines how the system places
video calls from the Place a Call screen when your
set the call protocol to Auto or if it’s unavailable.
For example, if a call doesn’t connect with H.323,
the system tries using SIP.
Audio Dialing Order Specifies how the system places audio calls to
directory entries with more than one type of
number. The system might list other connected
Polycom products as a dialing order choice.
For example, if you have a SoundStation IP 7000
connected to your system, Speakerphone would
be listed.
Select one of the following protocols for each
preference:
• IP H.323
• SIP
• Gateway
Related Links
Setting Call Preferences for SVC on page 123
Enable SVC Preference (H.264) for Calls

You can enable the order preference for SVC and AVC calls in the RealPresence Group Series system
web interface.
Procedure
Options.
2. From the Scalable Video Coding Preference (H.264) list, select SVC then AVC.
Enable Automatic Answering of SVC Point-to-Point Calls

A RealPresence Group Series system registered to a Skype for Business 2015 server and connected to
an SVC-compatible bridge can automatically answer incoming SVC calls. To enable this feature,
complete the following tasks on the system:
• Enable Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video
125
• Enable Scalable Video Coding Preference (H.264)
Procedure
Settings.
2. From the Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video list, select Yes.
Set Preferred Call Speeds

Polycom recommends the preferred speed as 1920 when the Group Series system is configured to a
Microsoft environment.
You can configure call speeds in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference > Preferred
Speeds.
Setting Description
Preferred Speed for Placed Calls Determines the speeds to use for IP or SIP (TIP)
calls from this system when either of the following
IP Calls SIP (TIP) Calls
statements is true:
• A user sets the call speed to Auto on the Place
a Call screen.
• A user places a call from the directory.
If the far-site system doesn’t support the selected
speed, the system automatically negotiates a lower
speed.
Users cannot specify a call speed when placing
calls from the Polycom Touch Control.
The SIP (TIP) Calls setting is available only when
the TIP setting is enabled.
Maximum Speed for Received Calls Allows you to restrict the bandwidth used when
receiving IP or SIP (TIP) calls.
IP Calls SIP (TIP) Calls
The system doesn’t receive calls at a higher rate
than the speed you set here.
The SIP (TIP) Calls setting is available only when
the TIP setting is enabled.
For point-to-point calls, the RealPresence Group 300 and 310 systems use a maximum of 3 Mbps of
bandwidth; the RealPresence Group 500 system use a maximum of 6 Mbps.
126
Configure the Recent Calls List

You can display recent calls on the Place a Call page in the RealPresence Group Series system web
interface.
The recent calls list includes the following information:
• Name or number
• If the system placed or received the call
• Date and time
Procedure
Recent Calls.
2. To enable a Recent Calls list, configure these settings.
Setting Description
Call Detail Report When enabled, you can view call information on the
system web interface or download it as a .csv file.
When disabled, the system doesn’t write call
information.
Enable Recent Calls Specifies whether to show recent calls on the local
interface and the system web interface.
Maximum Number to Display The maximum number of calls the system displays
in the recent calls list.
3. To start a new list of recent calls, click Clear Recent Calls.

4. Click Save.
If you need more details about calls, view or download the Call Detail Report (CDR) from the system web
interface.
Set Call Answering Mode

You can configure how users answer calls on the RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
Settings.
2. Select Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video to set the answer mode for calls with one site, or
select Auto Answer Multipoint Video to set the mode for calls with two or more other sites, and
then select one of the following:
• Yes: The system automatically answers incoming calls.
• No: Users must answer incoming calls manually.
• Do Not Disturb: Disables the system from processing incoming calls and routing them to
the user.
127
Set the Maximum Call Length

You can set the maximum call length for calls in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
Settings.
2. At Maximum Time in Call, select a time limit from the drop down list.
Set a Multipoint Viewing Mode

What the far-end site sees during a multipoint call can vary depending on how the RealPresence Group
Series system is configured, the number of sites participating, the number of monitors being used, and
whether content is shared. When you change a layout, you are changing the far-end site layouts only.
Video images from multiple sites can be automatically combined on one monitor in a display known as
continuous presence.
Procedure
Settings.
2. Select a viewing mode from the Multipoint Mode list.
The following table describes the available multipoint viewing modes.
Setting Description
Auto The view switches between continuous presence

and full screen, depending on the interaction
between the sites.
If multiple sites are talking at the same time,
continuous presence is used. If one site speaks
uninterrupted for at least 15 seconds, that site
appears in full screen on the monitor.
Discussion Multiple sites are displayed in continuous presence.

The current speaker's image is highlighted.
Presentation The speaker sees continuous presence while the

other sites see the speaker in full screen on the
monitor.
Full Screen The site that is speaking is shown in full screen to

all other sites. The current speaker sees the
previous speaker.
Related Links
Configure Call Settings on page 121
128
Enable Flashing Incoming Call Alerts

For hearing-impaired users, an attention-getting message displays when an incoming call is received by a
RealPresence Group Series system. When a call is received, the system displays a message asking if the
user wants to answer the call.
For greater visibility, you can have the message text flash between white and yellow. Flashing text is off
by default. The incoming call alert settings persists after powering the system off and on.
If a RealPresence Group Series system is paired with a Polycom Touch Control and is configured with
Auto Answer Point-to-Point set to Yes, users do not see the flashing message on the system or on the
device screen.
Procedure
Settings.
2. Select the Enable Flashing Incoming Call Notification checkbox.
Turn Off Flashing Alerts

You can turn off flashing alerts when the visual cue is not necessary in the RealPresence Group Series
Procedure
Settings.
2. Clear the Enable Flashing Incoming Call Notification checkbox.
3. Click Save.
Setting Up Audio-Only Calls

You can enable and disable audio-only calls in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Enable Audio-Only Calls

You can enable audio-only calls in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
Options > and select Enable Audio-Only Calls.
2. Click Save.
Disable Audio-Only Calls

You can disable audio-only calls in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
Options and clear the Enable Audio-Only Calls checkbox.
129
2. Click Save.
Select the Call Type Order for Audio-Only Calls

When Audio-Only Calls is enabled on your RealPresence Group Series system, you can choose the
audio order and dialing preference.
Procedure
Options.
2. At Call Type Order, select Phone then Video.
3. For the Audio Dial Preference 1, Audio Dial Preference 2, and Audio Dial Preference 3
settings, choose from the following call types:
• IP H.323
• SIP
•Speakerphone – displays only when a system is paired with SoundStation IP 7000
conference phone. If the Enable Audio-Only Calls checkbox is cleared, the audio dial
preference settings are not displayed.
4. Click Save.
Place an Audio-Only Call from the System Web Interface

You can place audio-only calls from the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Place a Call > Manual Dial.
2. Select audio.
3. To place the call, do one of the following:
4. Enter the number and click Call.
5. Under Recent Calls, click the desired audio call.
Enable Show Content in Audio-Only Call

In an audio-only call, this feature allows you to view the content instead of the video mute image in the
This feature is applicable only for calls between:
• RealPresence Group Series system to Skype for Business client.
• RealPresence Group Series AVMCU calls.
Procedure
1. In the system web user interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors .
2. For Monitor 1 at Monitor Profile select Far, then Content, then Near.
3. Select the Show Content if Far Video is Not Available check box.
4. Click Save.
130
Displaying Participant Names Continuously in a Call

Administrators can configure a system to display participant names throughout a conference call.
This setting is available on RealPresence Group Series 500 and 700 systems for multipoint calls only.
Configure Participant Name Display

You can allow participants in a multipoint call to see participant names throughout the call.
Procedure
Call Settings.
2. At Display Participant Names in Multipoint Video, select one of the following:
• Auto: After participants join a call, their names are displayed for 10 seconds (default).
• Always: Participant names are displayed throughout a call.
3. Select Save.
Configure System Display Name During Call

You can configure to display the system name in place of SIP address in the RealPresence Group Series
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > System Setting > Call Settings.
2. Select the Display System Name Instead of SIP Address check box.
131
Registering with a Directory
Topics:
• Enable H.323
• Configure the Polycom GDS
• Configure the LDAP Directory Server
• Managing Favorites Contacts and Groups
• Setting Up Speed Dial
• Setting Up and Configuring Directory Servers
You can register your RealPresence Group Series system with a directory to call contacts in your
organization.
The system supports up to 2,000 Favorites. The following are also supported:
• Up to 200 additional contacts with presence, which appear in Favorites, when registered with Skype
for Business.
• Up to 4,000 contacts from a Polycom GDS server
• Unlimited number of contacts when the system is registered with Skype for Business.
Global and Favorites groups are supported. You can create up to 200 Favorites groups. If the system is
connected to a global directory server, it can also support up to 64 additional groups from the Skype for
Business server that display in the Favorites group.
Note: Assistance from Polycom is mandatory for Skype for Business integrations. For details, please
refer to Polycom Collaboration Solutions or contact your local Polycom representative.
Enable H.323
To use GDS in your environment, you must have H.323 enabled and registered on your RealPresence
Group Series system.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > IP Network > H.323 Settings
and select the checkbox at Enable IP H.323.
2. Enter the required registration information as follows.
Setting Description
Enable IP H.323 Allows the H.323 settings to be displayed and

configured.
132
Setting Description
H.323 Name Specifies the name that gatekeepers and gateways

use to identify this system. You can make point-to-
point calls using H.323 names if both systems are
registered to a gatekeeper.
The H.323 Name is the same as the System
Name, unless you change it. Your organization's
dial plan might define the names you can use.
H.323 Extension (E.164) Lets users place point-to-point calls using the
extension if both systems are registered with a
gatekeeper, and specifies the extension that
gatekeepers and gateways use to identify this
system.
Your organization's dial plan might define the
Use Gatekeeper Turn the gatekeeper off or make it automatic.
Require Authentication Require authentication for IP H.323 connections.
Current Gatekeeper IP Address The IP address for the current gatekeeper.
Primary Gatekeeper IP Address The IP address for the primary gatekeeper.
Related Links
Configure the Polycom GDS on page 133
Configure the Polycom GDS

You can register your RealPresence Group Series system with the Polycom Global Directory Server
(GDS).
Enable H.323 on your system before you register it with this directory server.
Procedure
Polycom GDS Service Type.
2. Configure these settings on the Directory Servers screen.
Setting Description
Server Address Specifies the IP or DNS address of the Polycom

GDS.
Password The Polycom GDS password, if one exists.
Related Links
Enable H.323 on page 132
133
Configure the LDAP Directory Server

You can register your RealPresence Group Series system with an LDAP directory server.
Procedure
LDAP Server Type.
2. Configure these settings on the Directory Servers screen.
Setting Description
Server Address Specifies the address of the LDAP directory server.

When provisioned, this setting is read-only.
Server Port Specifies the port for connecting with the LDAP
server. When provisioned, this setting is read-only.
Base DN (Distinguished Name) Specifies the top level of the LDAP directory where
searches begin. When provisioned, this setting is
read-only.
Multitiered Directory Default Group DN Specifies the top-level group of the LDAP directory
required to access its hierarchical structure. When
provisioned, this setting is read-only.
Authentication Type Specifies the protocol for authenticating with the

LDAP server:
• NTLM
• Basic
• Anonymous
Use SSL (Secure Socket Layer) When enabled, encrypts data to and from the
LDAP server.
Domain Name Specifies the domain name for registering with the
LDAP server.
User Name Specifies the user name for registering with LDAP
server.
Password Specifies the password for registering with the

LDAP server.
Managing Favorites Contacts and Groups

RealPresence Group Series system local interface users can select Contacts from the menu to view
favorites and the directory. Users can add favorites from the directory, create new favorite contacts, and
create favorite groups.
134
Related Links
Call a Favorite Contact on page 213
Types of Favorites Contacts

The RealPresence Group Series system web interface displays several types of favorites.
Directory Server Registration Types of Contacts Presence State Displayed
LDAP with H.350 or Active • Directory entries created locally Unknown

Directory by the user.
• References to LDAP directory
entries added to Favorites by
the user.
These entries are available only if
the system can successfully access
the LDAP/Active Directory server.
Users can delete these entries from
Favorites, but they can’t edit these
entries. Users can copy these
entries to other Favorites and
remove them from those groups.
Create a Favorites Contact

You can create a Favorites contact in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Manage Favorites.
2. Click Create New Favorite.
3. Enter the contact call information and click Save.
Create a Favorites Group

You can create a Favorites group in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
2. Click Create New Group.
3. Enter a Name for the group and click Save.
A success message is displayed.
4. To add contacts to the group, click Add Contacts on the success message.
5. Enter a contact name in the search box and click Search.
6. In the entry you want to add to the group, click Add.
7. Repeat the above steps to add more contacts to the group.
8. Click Done.
135
Edit a Favorites Group

You can edit a Favorites group in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
2. Find the group name in the list of contacts.
3. Next to the group contact name, click Edit Group.
• To add contacts to the group, click Search to add contacts to this group, enter a contact
name, click Search, and then Add to add a contact.
• To remove contacts from a group, next to a contact name, click Remove.
4. Repeat the above steps to continue adding or removing contacts.
5. Click Done.
Delete a Favorites Group

You can delete a Favorites group in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
2. Next to the group or contact name, click Delete.
3. When a message asks you to confirm the delete, select Delete or Cancel.
Importing and Exporting Favorites

The Import/Export Directory feature enables you to download Favorites from a RealPresence Group
Series system to local devices, such as computers and tablets, in XML file format. It also allows you to
upload Favorites from a device to your system.
• Microsoft Internet Explorer
• Mozilla Firefox
For a list of supported browser versions, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release
Notes .
Keep the following points in mind when performing these tasks:
• The size of the uploaded XML file cannot exceed 3 megabytes.
• You can import favorites groups and entries both when you are in a call and when you are not in a
call.
• When the uploaded XML file includes favorites groups or entries already on the room system, the
duplicate files are added as separate directory entries.
Export Favorites Groups and Contacts

You can export Favorites groups and contacts from a RealPresence Group Series system to your local
device.
136
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Manage Favorites > Import/Export > Download.
2. Save the downloaded directory.xml file on your local device.
Import Favorites Groups and Contacts

You can import Favorites groups and contacts and upload the directory file to your RealPresence Group
Series system.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Manage Favorites > Import/Export > Choose File.
2. In the dialog box, select the directory.xml file you want to import and click Open.
3. Select Upload to upload the directory.xml file to the system.
Setting Up Speed Dial

Use speed dialing to quickly call an IP address designated as a Favorite.
The system displays Speed Dial contacts on the RealPresence Group Series system’s local interface and
on a paired RealPresence Touch device. Speed dial entries don’t appear when you pair the
RealPresence Group Series system with a Polycom Touch Control.
Related Links
Enable Kiosk Mode on page 139
Enable Speed Dial

You must enable the Speed Dial setting in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface before
users can use Speed Dial in the local interface.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen
Settings > Speed Dial.
2. Click Choose Favorites.
3. Search for contacts that you want to add to Speed Dial.
4. Select each contact and click Add.
5. After you have selected all of the contacts, click Save.
Add Speed Dial Contacts

You can add contacts from the system directory to the Speed Dial contacts list on the RealPresence
Group Series system's web interface and on a paired RealPresence Touch device.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface at Speed Dial, click Edit.
2. Enter a contact name and click Search.
3. For the contact you want to add, click Add.
4. To save your changes, click Save.
137
Image File Requirements for Speed Dial Contacts

You can upload a photo or graphic for contacts in the Speed Dial list for the RealPresence Group Series
system and for a paired RealPresence Touch device. Note the following requirements for Speed Dial
images:
• JPEG format (.jpg or .jpeg extension)
• Image dimensions within a range of 300 to 2000 pixels (both width and height)
• File size less than 5 MB
Upload an Image File for Speed Dial Contacts

You can upload a photo or graphic for contacts in the Speed Dial list on your RealPresence Group Series
Procedure
2. Click Choose File, navigate to the file, and click Open and Upload.
The image is now displayed for the Speed Dial contact on the system Home screen and on a
paired RealPresence Touch.
Remove Speed Dial Contacts

You can remove contacts from the Speed Dial list in the RealPresence Group Series system web
interface.
Procedure
2. For the contact you want to delete, click Remove.
Related Links
Call a Speed Dial Contact on page 213
Kiosk Mode
In the RealPresence Group Series system local interface, Kiosk Mode simplifies the Home screen by
displaying only speed dial entries and calendar meetings (if enabled). In Kiosk Mode, therefore, users can
call speed dial numbers, join calendar meetings, and answer calls.
You must create your speed dial numbers before users can access Kiosk Mode.
Kiosk Mode is disabled by default. If Kiosk Mode is enabled, these conditions apply:
• The Home screen menu, Out of Call menu, and other icons are disabled.
• Alerts bring the local interface out of Kiosk Mode until you clear the alerts.
• You can still use the remote to adjust the volume, control the camera, and mute/unmute the
microphone when in calls.
• You can bring up the In a Call menu by pressing Menu on the remote during the call.
138
Enable Kiosk Mode

You must enable Kiosk Mode in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface before users can
use it in the system local interface. You also must either enable and configure Speed Dial or Calendaring
before Kiosk Mode is available.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, do one of the following:
• Enable and configure Speed Dial at Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen
Settings.
• Enable and configure the Calendaring Service at Admin Settings > Servers > Calendaring
Service.
2. Go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home Screen Settings > Kiosk Mode, mark the
Enable Kiosk Mode check box and click Save.
Related Links
Setting Up Speed Dial on page 137
Setting Up and Configuring Directory Servers

The global directory provides a list of RealPresence Group Series systems that are registered with the
Global Directory Server and are available for calls. The other systems appear in the directory, allowing
users to place calls to participants by selecting their names.
Related Links
Set Up Multitiered Directory Navigation on page 37
Configuring a Directory Server

You can configure the RealPresence Group Series system to use one of the following directory servers in
standard operating mode.
Supported Directory Authentication Entry Calling

Servers Protocols Global Directory Groups Information
Microsoft NTLM v2 only Contact groups but not Might include:

distribution lists
Skype for Business • SIP address (SIP URI)
Server 2015
LDAP Any of the following: Not Supported Might include:

with H.350 or Active • NTLM v2 only • H.323 IP address (raw
Directory IPv4 address, DNS
• Basic
name, H.323 dialed
• Anonymous digits, H.323 ID, or H.
323 extension)
• SIP address (SIP URI)
• ISDN number
• Phone number*
139
Supported Directory Authentication Entry Calling

Servers Protocols Global Directory Groups Information
Polycom GDS Proprietary Not Supported Might include:

• H.323 IP address (raw
IPv4 address, DNS
name, or H.323
extension)
• ISDN number
* To successfully call a phone number from the LDAP directory, the phone number must be stored in one of the
following formats:
• +Country Code.Area Code.Number
• +Country Code.(National Direct Dial Prefix).Area Code.Number
You can configure the system to use the following directory server when the system is automatically
provisioned by a RealPresence Resource Manager system.
Supported Directory Entry Calling

Servers Authentication Protocol Global Directory Groups Information
Skype for Business NTLM v2 only Contact groups but not Might include:
Server 2015 distribution lists
• SIP address (SIP URI)
* To successfully call a phone number from the LDAP directory, the phone number must be stored in one of the
following formats:
140
Configuring Audio Settings
Topics:
• Configure General Audio Settings

• Configure Audio Input Settings
• Audio Output Settings
• Stereo Settings
• Test StereoSurround
• Polycom Acoustic Fence
• USB and Bluetooth Headsets
Configure General Audio Settings

You can configure audio settings in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Some audio settings are unavailable when you connect a SoundStructure digital mixer to your system.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video/Content > Audio.
2. At General Audio Settings, configure the Audio settings described in the following table.
Setting Description
Polycom Enables Polycom StereoSurround software for all calls. When enabled, the
StereoSurround Stereo Settings become available.
To use StereoSurround, make sure you correctly configure your system’s
stereo settings.
Sound Effects Volume Sets the volume level of the ringtone and user alert tones.
Ringtone Specifies the ringtone for incoming calls.
User Alert Tones Specifies the tone for user alerts.
Audio Mute Auto- Specifies whether to automatically mute incoming calls.

Answered Calls
Note: You must first enable Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video or Auto
Answer Multipoint Video in Call Settings to use this feature.
141
Setting Description
Enable M-Mode This was previously known as Music Mode. Specifies whether the system
transmits audio using a configuration that best reproduces interactive and live
performance music picked up by microphones. This feature provides the
highest-possible bandwidth for audio.
When you enable M-Mode, even the faintest musical notes come through
clearly.
Note: Noise reduction features are disabled when you enable M-Mode.
Enable Keyboard Noise Specifies whether the system microphones mute when the system detects
Reduction and keyboard typing or other extraneous noises but no one is talking. NoiseBlock
NoiseBlock unmutes the system when it detects speech, regardless if there’s background
noise or not.
Note: M-Mode is disabled when you enable this setting. If you use an
external echo canceller, keyboard noise reduction is not available.
Transmission Audio Specifies the audio level (in decibels) that the system transmits sound. Unless
Gain (dB) otherwise advised, you should set this value to 0 dB.
Enable Audio Mute Specifies if the system displays a notification that the microphones are muted
Reminder when it detects someone speaking.
Enable Join and Leave The system plays a tone when someone joins or leaves a conference call.
Tones
Note: This setting is available only when you install the multipoint option
key.
Enable Acoustic Fence Specifies if the system uses Acoustic Fence technology.
Acoustic Fence Specifies the microphone sensitivity for Acoustic Fence technology. You can
Sensitivity set a value between 0 and 10, where 0 is the minimum sensitivity and 10 is
the maximum sensitivity. Higher settings increase the radius of the fence area
around the primary microphone.
Related Links
Polycom Acoustic Fence on page 148
Audio Output Settings on page 145
Configure Audio Input Settings

You can configure the audio input settings for your RealPresence Group Series system.
The RealPresence Group 300 system has no audio input settings, and the settings for the other systems
are quite different.
Procedure
Input.
142
Note: Playback to ALL locations, Video Content Associatedand Playback to Far Sites playback
options are not supported during an AVMCU call.
RealPresence Group 310 and 500 system Audio Input Settings are described in the following table.
Setting Description
Type Displays the 3.5 mm connector for line-level stereo audio input.
Displays embedded audio from the HDMI connector.
Displays the USB Headset audio level.
Audio Input Sets levels for the left and right channels. Choose a value from 0 to 10.
Level
Playback • Playback to All Locations (Default): Near and far sites hear the 3.5 mm stereo input. You
Options can’t mute audio or control echo cancellation.
• Playback to All Locations, Video Content Associated: The 3.5 mm stereo input is
played back to near and far sites when associated video content input has active video
input. There is no mute control and echo cancellation for 3.5 mm audio input.
• Playback to Far Sites: Only far sites hear the 3.5 mm stereo input (there is no associated
video content). You can’t mute audio or control echo cancellation through the system.
• Playback to Far Sites, Mute Controlled: Only far sites hear the 3.5 mm stereo input
(there is no associated video content). You can mute audio but can’t control echo
cancellation.
• Playback to Far Sites, Mute Controlled, Echo Cancelled:Only far sites hear the 3.5 mm
stereo input (there is no associated video content). You can mute audio and control echo
cancellation. This setting doesn’t apply to audio associated with your shared content. This
setting turns off EagleEye Acoustic camera microphones.
• Handset: The 3.5 mm stereo input is played back to the far sites if the system is in a call.
There is no video content association. Muting the microphones also mutes the 3.5 mm
audio input. The audio from 3.5 mm input is echo canceled. The near site does not hear
the 3.5 mm audio input. This setting does not turn off EagleEye Acoustic camera
microphones.
Audio Meter Displays the audio level of the input (left and right channels).
(dB)
RealPresence Group 700 audio input settings are described in the following table.
143
Setting Description
Type Displays dual RCA auxiliary audio input.

Displays HDMI 1 (HDMI connector embedded audio input, associated with video input 1).
Displays 3.5mm (line-level stereo audio input, associated with HD15/VGA video input 3).
Displays the USB Headset audio level.
Displays Component (dual RCA, associated with component video input 4).
Audio Input Sets the RCA audio input level. Choose a value from 0 to 10.
Level
Echo Canceller Specifies whether to use the system's built-in echo canceller for audio input.
Audio Meter Displays the audio level of the line input, left and right channels.
Audio Input Sets the 3.5mm audio input level.

Level
Playback • Playback to All Locations—The 3.5mm stereo audio input is played back to all near and
Options far sites with no mute control and echo cancellation for 3.5mm audio input. Default.
• Playback to All Locations, Video Content Associated—The 3.5mm stereo audio input
is played back to near and far sites when associated video content input has active video
input. There is no mute control and echo cancellation for 3.5mm audio input.
• Playback to Far Sites—The 3.5mm stereo audio input is played back to the far sites if the
system is in a call; there is no video content association. Mute control and echo
cancellation is not supported for 3.5mm audio input. The near site does not hear the
3.5mm audio input.
Audio Meter Displays the 3.5mm audio level of the line input, left and right channels.
Audio Input Sets the HDMI 1 audio input level.

Level
Audio Meter Displays the HDMI 2 audio level of the line input, left and right channels.

Level

Level
Audio Input Sets the component audio input level. Choose a value from 0 to 10.
Level
Audio Meter Displays the component audio level of the line input, left and right channels.
144
Related Links
Stereo Settings on page 147
3.5 mm Audio Input

You can select how to enable 3.5 mm audio input from the RealPresence Group Series system 3.5 mm
audio port in the system web interface.
In active calls, you can enable 3.5 mm audio input on the near-end conference site. After you enable
audio 3.5 mm input for use during active calls, 3.5 mm audio input is heard during active calls from the
system speakers and from all far-end sites.
If you enable 3.5mm audio input for use when content sharing is active, 3.5 mm audio input is only active
when either HDMI or VGA video input is active.
When HDMI or VGA video input is active and the system is in an active call, 3.5 mm audio input is heard
from the system speakers and from all far-end sites. If audio is part of active HDMI or VGA content, the
3.5 mm audio input mixes in with the HDMI or VGA audio input.
Audio Output Settings

You must connect at least one speaker to the RealPresence Group Series systems to hear audio.
When you connect a SoundStation IP 7000 conference phone to a RealPresence Group Series system,
the conference phone becomes another way to dial audio or video calls. The conference phone also
operates as a microphone, and as a speaker in audio-only calls.
See your system setup sheet for connection details. Make sure that you power off the system before
connecting anything to it.
Related Links
Configure Audio Input Settings on page 142
Configure Audio Output Settings on page 145
Configure General Audio Settings on page 141
Stereo Settings on page 147
Configure Audio Output Settings

You can configure the audio output settings for your RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
2. At Audio Output, configure the settings described in the following table.
145
Setting Description
Primary Audio Volume Sets the main audio output volume level going to
the speakers.
Bass Sets the volume level for low frequencies without

changing the primary audio volume.
Treble Sets the volume level for high frequencies without

changing the primary audio volume.
Type Displays the current audio output type. This setting

is read-only.
Line Out Specifies how the system configures the volume for
a device connected to the line out port.
• Variable: Enables users to change the volume.
• Fixed: Sets the volume to the audio level
configured for the system.
Audio Output Meters Displays the audio level of the output (left and right
channels).
Note: To disable HDMI audio output when

using 3.5mm audio output, do the
following. In the system web interface, go
to Admin Settings > Audio/Video/
Content > Monitors and set the Monitor
1 Enable setting to Manual. At Video
Format, select DVI.
Recording Level Sets the recording output level. Choose a value

from 0 to 10; the default is 5.
This setting is available on RealPresence Group
700 systems only.
Related Links
Set the Speaker Volume

You can set and test the volume of speakers connected to your RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > Audio and Video Tests > Speaker Test.
2. Click Start to start the speaker test.
3. Adjust the volume of the speaker.
From the center of the room the test tone should be as loud as a person speaking loudly, about
80-90 dBA on a sound pressure level meter.
146
4. Click Stop to stop the speaker test.
Stereo Settings
To send or receive stereo audio, make sure your RealPresence Group Series system equipment is set up
correctly. Then configure the system to use Polycom StereoSurround, test the system configuration, and
place a test call.
If you are in a call with a far site that is sending audio in stereo mode, you can receive in stereo. In calls
where some sites can send and receive stereo but some can’t, any site set up to send or receive stereo
can do so. The following stereo settings are available.
Setting Description
Polycom Microphone Displays the type of Polycom microphone connected to the system.
Type
Stereo Mode Positions the audio input within the left and right channels. Left sends all of the audio
to the left channel. Right sends all of the audio to the right channel. For Poly table
microphone and ceiling microphones, Left+Right sends audio from one microphone
element to the left channel and audio from a second element to the right channel.
Autorotation Specifies whether the system uses autorotation for Poly microphones. If you enable
this feature, the system automatically assigns left and right channels for the
microphone based on the sound it senses from the left and right speakers.
Note: This feature doesn’t work with headphones.
Audio Meter (dB meter) Shows you the peak input signal level for Poly microphones.
Related Links
Test StereoSurround
After you configure the RealPresence Group Series system to use Polycom StereoSurround, test the
system configuration and place a test call.
Procedure
1. Make sure the microphones are positioned correctly.
Input.
3. Gently blow on the left and right leg of each microphone while watching the audio meters to
identify the left and right inputs.
4. Test the speakers to check volume and verify that audio cables are connected.
If the system is in a call, the far site hears the tone.
5. Optional: Exchange the right and left speakers if they are reversed.
147
6. Adjust the volume control on your external audio amplifier so that the test tone sounds as loud as
a person speaking in the room. If you use a Sound Pressure Level (SPL) meter, it should measure
approximately 80 to 90 dBA in the middle of the room.
7. Repeat the steps above for Admin Settings > Audio/Video/Content > Audio > Audio Output.
Polycom Acoustic Fence

Polycom Acoustic Fence technology creates a virtual audio fence that blocks sounds from outside the
fence. It suppresses background noise during calls to enhance audio quality for call participants.
Polycom Acoustic Fence works in mono mode only and disables Polycom StereoSurround when enabled.
Polycom Acoustic Fence technology provides the following:
• Mutes sounds outside the fence when no one is speaking inside it
• Lowers sounds outside the fence by 12 dB when someone is speaking inside it
• Mutes speakers when someone leaves the fenced area
You need a primary microphone and at least one more microphone to create the fence. You can use up to
four microphones with RealPresence Group 500 and 700 systems. RealPresence Group 300 and 310
systems don’t support Acoustic Fence technology.
The boundary radius can be two to several feet around the following Poly peripheral devices:
• Table microphone
• Ceiling microphone
• EagleEye View camera
• Polycom EagleEye Acoustic camera
Note: Microphones connected to a Poly Microphone IP Adapter currently don’t support Polycom
Acoustic Fence.
For more details on Polycom Acoustic Fence, search the Polycom Knowledge Base for acoustic fence.
Related Links
Configure Audio Output Settings on page 145
Configure General Audio Settings on page 141
Configure the Acoustic Fence

You can enable and configure the Polycom Acoustic Fence feature to help define the audio fence around
the system.
Procedure
2. In the system web interface, go to Audio/Video > Audio > General Audio Settings.
3. Select the Enable Acoustic Fence check box.
4. Set Acoustic Fence Sensitivity to adjust the width of the audio fence beam.
148
Higher values increase the width of the audio fence beam between the primary and fence
microphone(s). Use 0 for the narrowest beam (20 degrees) or 10 for the widest beam (120
degrees).
USB and Bluetooth Headsets

You can use USB and Bluetooth headsets with your RealPresence Group Series system (Bluetooth
headsets require a USB adapter).
The headset functions automatically without any extra configuration or intervention. After verifying the
headset hardware and software is supported, plug the headset in to a USB port on the system, or enable
pairing mode and plug in the USB adapter.
The USB 2.0 ports support USB headsets. RealPresence Group 700 system has USB 2.0 port on the
front panel and also includes a USB 3.0 port on rear panel, which does not support USB headsets.
When connected, you can control your headset audio but not the system audio (such as mute or volume
control).
Only a single headset can connect to the system at a time. Once connected, the headset is used as the
primary audio input and output device for the system. So when a USB headset is plugged in,
microphones, 3.5 mm audio input (in Playback Option echo cancelled mode), and speakers are all turned
off; audio is heard only through the USB headset. This is similar to a headset plugged in or paired with a
cell phone.
Headsets with these sampling rates are supported: 8 kHz, 16 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz, and 48 kHz.
149
Configuring Video Settings
Topics:
• Monitor Resolution Rates for RealPresence Group Series Systems

• Full-Motion HD
• Maximize HDTV Video Display
• Monitor Profiles
• Prevent Monitor Burn-In
• Adjust Brightness for Room Lighting
• Monitors with CEC
• Configure Video Input Settings
• Configure RS-232 Serial Port Settings
• Configuring Monitor Settings
• Third-Party Touch Panel Controls
• Configure Secondary Monitors for Content
Monitor Resolution Rates for RealPresence Group

Series Systems
You might need to know the monitor resolutions for the particular RealPresence Group Series system that
you are using. The following tables provide resolution rates for the video standards NTSC and PAL for
Monitor 1, Monitor 2, and Monitor 3 (RealPresence Group 700 system only). The following table shows
the Monitor 1 Resolution Rates.
RealPresence Group System

Type NTSC Video Standard PAL Video Standard
RealPresence Group 300/500 HDMI/DVI:1080p60, 720p60, HDMI/DVI: 1080p50, 720p50,

1080i60 108050
RealPresence Group 700 HDMI/DVI: 1080p60, 720p60, HDMI/DVI: 1080p50, 720p50,

1080i60 108050
VGA: 1080p60, 720p60 VGA: 1080p60, 720p60
Component: 1080p60, 720p60, Component: 1080p50, 720p50,

1080i60 1080i50
The following table shows the Monitor 2 Resolution Rates.
150

RealPresence Group 300/500 HDMI/DVI: 1080p60, HDMI/DVI: 1080p50,

1280x1024p60,720p60, 1080i60, 1280x1024p60,720p50, 1080i50,
1024x768p60 1024x768p60
RealPresence Group 700 HDMI/DVI: 1080p60, HDMI/DVI: 1080p50,

1280x1024p60,720p60, 1080i60, 1280x1024p60,720p50, 1080i50,
1024x768p60 1024x768p60
VGA: 1080p60, 1280x1024p60, VGA: 1080p60, 1280x1024p60,

720p60, 1024x768p60 720p60, 1024x768p60
Component: 1080p60, 720p 60, Component: 1080p50, 720p

1080i60 50,1080i50
The following table shows the Monitor 3 Resolution Rates.

RealPresence Group 700 HDMI/DVI 1080p60, 1280x1024p HDMI/DVI 1080p50,

1280x1024p60,720p50, 1080i50,
60,720p60, 1080i60, 1024x768p60
1024x768p60
VGA: 1080p60, 1280x1024p60, VGA: 1080p50, 1280x1024p60,

720p60, 720p60, 1024x768p60
1024x768p60
Component: 1080p60, 720p 60, Component: 1080p50, 720p 50,

1080i60 1080i50
Full-Motion HD
With RealPresence Group Series systems, Polycom sets a higher bar for video and audio performance.
Seeing participants in full 1080p 60 fps, or full-motion HD, brings video to a new level of realism. Full-
motion HD provides those clear, vibrant visuals and flawless audio that are critical to replicating an “in the
same room” experience.
In group collaboration, the quality of content is as important as the quality of the people on video. Content
that is grainy, pixelated, or slow to update makes it hard to get the most out of your meetings. With
RealPresence Group Series systems, you share full-motion HD people and content at the same time,
which helps eliminate compromises when sharing across distances.
151
Maximize HDTV Video Display

When you use a television as your monitor, some HDTV settings might interfere with the video display or
quality of your calls. To avoid this potential problem, disable all audio enhancements in the HDTV menu,
such as SurroundSound.
In addition, many HDTVs have a low-latency mode called Game Mode, which could lower video and
audio latency. Although Game Mode is typically turned off by default, you might have a better experience
if you turn it on.
Before attaching your RealPresence Group Series system to a TV monitor, ensure the monitor is
configured to display all available pixels. This setting, also known as “fit to screen” or “dot by dot,” enables
the entire HD image to be displayed. The specific name of the monitor setting varies by manufacturer.
Monitor Profiles
Monitor Profiles set the preferences for which video layout panel views are shown on each monitor
connected to the system. You can customize the monitor configuration to match your environment or your
desired meeting experience. The Monitor Profile settings are just preferences. What you see can vary
depending on layout panel views, whether content is being shown, the number of active monitors, and so
on.
The layout view names provide hints on the priority of the panels. So, for example in the Content, then
Far, then Near layout view, the system displays the panels in this order: Content first, then any remote
speakers (Far), then the local camera (Near). The panel that is listed first is the largest panel. In this
example, the Content panel is larger than the far or the near panels.
Several multipoint layouts are supported, as well as dual-monitor compositing. When you use two
monitors of equal size, you have the capability of up to eight-way multipoint calling, depending on your
system configuration. When sharing content, one monitor is used for content and one for people, but the
configuration varies, depending on whether you have enabled Self View and how many people are
participating. When you do not share content, the configuration for both monitors is spread over both
monitors, again depending on whether Self View is enabled and how many participants are in the call.
Depending upon your system, the number of participant panels can vary, as shown in the following table.
Number of Panels in the Layouts Number of Panels in the Layouts

System Model on the Internal MCU on the Far-End Sites
RealPresence Group 700 8 (all participants are displayed) 8 (Up to 8 participants are
displayed, regardless of the latest
speakers)
RealPresence Group 500 6 (all participants are displayed) 4 (Up to 4 latest speakers)
RealPresence Group 310
Configure Monitor Profile Settings

You can configure monitor layout profile settings for each monitor connected to the RealPresence Group
Series system.
152
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video/Content > Monitors.
2. At Monitor Profile, for each monitor connected to the system, you can configure the following
settings.
Monitor 3
Monitor Profile (RealPresence
Name Description Monitor 1 Monitor 2 Group 700 only)
Content, then Sets Monitors 1 or Yes Yes No

Far, then Near 2 to share content.
The system
displays the
panels in this
order of priority:
Content first in the
largest panel, then
any remote
speakers (Far),
then the local
camera (Near).
Default for Monitor
1 if only one
monitor is
connected to the
system.
Default for Monitor
2 if 2 or more
monitors are
connected to the
system.
Far, then Near Sets Monitor 1 or Yes Yes No

2 to show the far-
end in the largest
panel, then the
near-end. Default
for Monitor 1 if
there are 2 or
more monitors
connected to the
system.
Far Only Sets Monitors 1, 2, Yes Yes Yes

or 3 to show the
far-end only.
153
Monitor 3
Content, then Sets Monitor 2 to No Yes No

Near display shared
content in the
larger panel. If no
content is
displayed, the
monitor shows the
person speaking
at the near-end.
Content, then Far Sets Monitors 1 or Yes Yes No

2 to display
shared content in
the larger panel. If
no content is
shared, the
monitor displays
the far-end
speaker panel
only.
Far, then Sets Monitors 1 or Yes No No

Content, then 2 to share content.
Near The system
displays the
panels in this
order of priority:
remote speakers
first (Far), then
any content in the
largest panel, and
then the local
camera (Near).
Content Only Sets Monitor 2 or No Yes Yes

3 to display
shared content as
the only panel. If
no content is
shared, the
monitor shows the
room background.
Near Only Sets Monitor 2 or No Yes Yes

3 to show the
near-end site only.
Another name for
this view is Self
View.
154
Monitor 3
Record Mode Sets Monitor 3 to No No Yes

show the current
person speaking,
regardless of the
speaker's location.
Select this setting
to record near, far,
and content audio.
Only the speaker
is recorded in full
screen.
Available only on
RealPresence
Group 700
systems.
Record Mode Sets Monitor 3 to No No Yes

With Content display shared
content or the
person speaking.
Content sharing
takes priority over
displaying the
person speaking.
Select this setting
to record near, far,
and content audio.
If someone is
sharing content,
the video is
recorded in full
screen. If no one
is sharing content,
the speaker is
recorded in full
screen.
Available only on
RealPresence
Group 700
systems.
The Automatic Self View Control setting can also affect what displays on the monitors.
Note: When the default profile settings of monitor1 and monitor2 are set to Far-Near and Content-Far-
Near and the monitor2 is turned off the profile of monitor1 is changed to Content-Far-Near from
Far-Near.
Configure Call Settings
155
Related Links
Configure Monitor Settings on page 162
Prevent Monitor Burn-In

Configure when you want your device to go to sleep after a period of inactivity.
Monitors and devices provide display settings to help prevent image burn-in. Plasma televisions can be
particularly vulnerable to this problem. Refer to your monitor's documentation or manufacturer for specific
recommendations and instructions. The following guidelines help prevent image burn-in:
• Ensure that static images are not displayed for long periods.
• Set the Time before system goes to sleep to 60 minutes or less.
• To keep the screen clear of static images during a call, disable the following settings:
◦ Display Icons in a Call: Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings > Call
Settings
◦ Show Time in Call: Admin Settings > General Settings > Date and Time > Time in Call
• Be aware that meetings that last more than an hour without much movement can have the same
effect as a static image.
• Consider decreasing the monitor's sharpness, brightness, and contrast settings if they are set to
their maximum values.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video/Content > Sleep.
Setting Description
Display Choose if the system displays a black screen or a

no signal message.
Time Before System Goes to Sleep • Select how long the device can be idle before it
goes to sleep.
• Select Off to disable system sleep mode.
Enable Mic Mute in Sleep Mode Select the check box to mute your microphones
while the system is asleep.
Adjust Brightness for Room Lighting

In certain environments, bright content from displays, windows, or light fixtures can cause the cameras
auto exposure setting to darken the exposure beyond what is preferred.
In certain environments, bright content from displays, windows, or light fixtures can cause the cameras
auto exposure setting to darken the exposure beyond what is preferred. To remedy the issue, you can
optimize the highlights and lowlights using the Brightness setting.
156
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video/Content > Video Inputs >
[Input Name] Brightness.
2. Set Brightness to the minimum value.
3. Move the camera so that only a few very dark portions are shown; include at least one portion with
an acceptable exposure.
4. If the setting needs more adjustment, increase the value at slight intervals.
Related Links
Configure Video Input Settings
Monitors with CEC

You can use some Consumer Electronics Control (CEC) features with HDMI-connected monitors that
support the CEC protocol.
Your system supports the following CEC commands:

• System Standby: When the system goes to sleep, connected monitors switch to standby mode to
save power.
• One Touch Play: You can wake connected monitors with your system remote control.
Remember the following when enabling CEC on your system:
• If you connect a monitor with an HDMI splitter, the splitter must support CEC. Due to HDMI splitter
limitations, monitors behind a 1xM (one-input multiple-output) splitter might not switch to the correct
input when waking up.
• The system doesn’t respond to CEC commands from a monitor remote control.
• If a monitor is connected to two endpoints, the monitor displays the active endpoint when the other
is sleeping.
Enable CEC Controls

Enable CEC in the system web interface.
Make sure your monitor’s CEC settings are configured correctly (see your monitor’s documentation).
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video/Content > Monitors >
Consumer Electronics Control.
2. Select the Enable Consumer Electronics Control check box.
Disable CEC Controls

Disable CEC in the system web interface.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video/Content > Monitors >
Consumer Electronics Control.
2. Clear the Enable Consumer Electronics Control check box.
157
Configure Video Input Settings

Customize your video input settings, such as enabling connected cameras, adjusting camera orientation,
or specifying whether people or content display on connected monitors.
Note: The system doesn’t display settings that don’t apply to your camera. For example, you don’t see
tracking options if your camera doesn’t support tracking.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs.
Setting Description
Model Displays the type of device connected to the system.
Name Displays the default name of the connected device. You also can
enter a name for the device.
Display as Identifies whether the video input is used for People or Content.
The selection you make here determines the available settings for
the device in the embedded interface. For example, a People
source has pan, tilt, zoom, and near/far camera control settings,
while a Content source doesn’t.
Input Format Specifies the source type of the device. This setting is read-only
unless the system doesn’t detect the device.
Optimized for Specifies optimization preferences for the video input.

• Motion: Gives preference to frames per second over
resolution. For the connected source, the system selects
720p60 over 1080p30.
• Sharpness: Gives preference to resolution over frames per
second. For the connected source, the system selects 1080p30
over 720p60. With this setting, moderate-to-heavy motion at
low call rates can cause some frames to drop. Sharpness is
available in point-to-point H.263 and H.264 calls only. It is
required for HD calls between 512 Kbps and 2 Mbps.
158
Setting Description
Tracking Mode (Polycom EagleEye Director Specifies the type of camera tracking:
Camera)
• Voice—Locates and frames the speaker. When another
speaker starts talking, the view switches from the first speaker
to the room, then to the next speaker.
• Direct Cut—Tracks directly from speaker to speaker if silence
intervals are less than 3 seconds. You must recalibrate the left
camera when you select Direct Cut mode.
If camera tracking has not been calibrated, Tracking Mode is
unavailable.
Note: Only available when you have installed an EagleEye

Director camera.
Tracking Speed (Polycom EagleEye Determines how quickly the camera finds and switches to the new
Director Camera) speaker. The room environment can influence the tracking speed.

Director camera.
Backlight Compensation Specifies if the camera automatically adjusts for a bright

background. Use backlight compensation when the subject
appears darker than the background.
White Balance Specifies how the camera compensates for light source variations
in the room.
• Auto: Recommended for most situations. It calculates the best
white balance setting based on lighting conditions in the room.
• Manual: Use this setting for rooms where the Auto and fixed
values don’t provide acceptable color reproduction.
When you set to Manual, fill the camera’s field of view with a
flat white object, such as a piece of paper. For best results, the
object should be uniformly illuminated with light that is
representative of the room lighting used in the conference,
rather than light from a display, another area, or a shadow.
After the object is in place, select Calibrate.
• Color Temperature Value: The color temperature values,
measured in degrees Kelvin, correspond to the color of ambient
light in a room. Because the available color temperature values
vary by camera, this list is a sampling of some of the values
you might see in the interface:
◦ 3200K (warm office fluorescent)
◦ 3680K (tungsten bulb)
◦ 4160K (cool office fluorescent)
◦ 5120K (neutral daylight)
◦ 5600K (cool daylight)
159
Setting Description
Brightness Adjusts the video brightness.
Color Saturation Adjusts the color saturation.
Tracking Mode (Polycom EagleEye Specifies the camera tracking mode.

Producer Camera)
• Frame Speaker: The camera automatically locates and frames
the active speaker. When someone else starts speaking, the
camera switches to that person.
Note: When you mute your microphone, the camera tracking

mode automatically switches to Frame Group.
• Frame Group: The camera automatically locates and frames

all the people in the room.
• Frame Group with Transition: (EagleEye Producer camera
only) The camera automatically locates and frames people in
the room while moving the camera. For example, if someone
enters the room, you might see the camera pan until that
person is in view.
• Presenter Mode: The camera tracks an active speaker who’s
talking and moving.
• Off: Disables automatic tracking. You must control the camera
manually.

Producer camera.
Tracking Speed (Polycom EagleEye Specifies the tracking speed. The room environment can have an
Producer Camera) influence on the speed of locating new speakers in the room.
• Slow—Detects meeting participants at a slow speed rate.
• Normal—This is the default tracking speed. Detects meeting
participants at a normal speed rate.
• Fast—Detects meeting participants at a fast speed rate.

Producer camera.
Framing Size (Polycom EagleEye Producer Specifies the framing view.

Camera)
• Wide: Establishes a wide view of meeting participants.
• Medium: (Default group framing view) Establishes a medium
view of meeting participants.
• Tight: Establishes a close-up view of meeting participants.

Producer camera.
160
Configure RS-232 Serial Port Settings

Configure RS-232 serial port settings for your system.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Serial Ports.
2. Configure the following settings in the sections on the Serial Ports screen.
Setting Description
RS-232 Mode Specifies the mode used for the RS-232 serial port.
Available settings depend on the system model.
• Off: Disables the serial port.
• Pass Thru: Passes data to an RS-232 device,
such as a serial printer or certain types of
medical devices, connected to the serial port of
the far-site system. This option is only available
in point-to-point calls.
• Closed Caption: Receives closed captions
from a dial-up modem or a stenographer
machine through the RS-232 port.
• Camera Control: Passes data to and from a
third-party camera.
• Control: Receives control signals from a touch-
panel control. Allows any device connected to
the RS-232 port to control the system using API
commands.
Note: If you have a RealPresence Group 300,

310, or 500 system, use only the
Polycom serial cable with part number
2457-63542-001 to connect devices to
the RS-232 serial port.
Baud Rate Set these options to the same values configured on

the serial device.
Parity
Data Bits
Stop Bits
RS-232 Flow Control This setting works with RS-232 modes that aren’t
currently available. You can’t configure this setting.
161
Setting Description
Login Mode Specifies the credentials necessary for a control

system to connect to the RS-232 port.
• Admin password only: (Default) Requires the
administrator password (if you set one) when
the control system connects.
• User Name/Password: Requires the user
name and administrator password (if you set
one) when the control system connects.
• None: The system doesn’t require a user name
or password when the control system connects.
Note: This setting only displays when you set

RS-232 Mode to Control.
Related Links
Third-Party Touch Panel Controls on page 163
Configuring Monitor Settings

The RealPresence Group Series system constantly detects any monitors connected to it. You choose
which monitors with the Enable setting. You can also add a Monitor Profile to manage a group of monitor
settings.
Note: Ensure that the system is powered off before you connect any devices.
Configure Monitor Settings

You might need to configure monitor settings for the monitors connected to your system.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors.
2. Configure these settings on the Monitors screen.
The settings for Monitor 1, Monitor 2, and Monitor 3 are nearly the same, although the available
features can be different. Monitor 3 is available for RealPresence Group 700 systems only.
162
Setting Description
Enable Specifies monitor settings.

• Auto: (Default) Specifies that the system
automatically detects the Video Format and
Resolution settings and disables those
settings.
• Manual: Enables you to select the Video
Format and Resolution settings. Resolution
settings are filtered based on the Video Format
you select.
• Off: Disable this monitor (not available for
Monitor 1).
Monitor Profile Specifies which profile to use for this monitor. The
choices depend on how many monitors the system
uses and which monitor you are configuring.
Video Format Specifies the monitor's format. Depending on which

RealPresence Group Series system and monitor
you configure, the choices are:
• HDMI
• DVI
• Component
• VGA
Note: This setting is unavailable when you

select Auto for the Enable setting.
Resolution Specifies the monitor resolution.
Note: This setting is unavailable when you

select Auto for the Enable setting.
Related Links
Configure Monitor Profile Settings on page 152
Third-Party Touch Panel Controls

As part of a custom room installation, you can connect an AMX or Crestron control panel to a
RealPresence Group Series system RS-232 serial port. To get started, complete these two main tasks:
• Program the control panel. For information about the API commands required to program it, refer to
the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference Guide at Polycom Support.
• In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Serial Ports > Serial
Port Options. Set the desired Login Mode for the control panel on the RealPresence Group Series
system.
For more information on serial port settings, see the Related Link topic below.
163
Related Links
Configure RS-232 Serial Port Settings on page 161
Configure Secondary Monitors for Content

If you have a multiple monitor setup with more than one touch monitor, and you want to use touch to
control content on secondary monitors, you must configure settings on both the local and system web
interfaces. The primary touch monitor is the one that you use to control the system's local interface.
Secondary monitors are any additional monitors connected to the system.
The touch monitors should be HID compliant with HDMI interface only. If only one touch monitor is
connected to the system, the following configuration steps are not necessary.
Procedure
1. In the local interface, use a remote control to navigate to Settings > Administration > Touch
Monitor > Configure.
2. Under Enable touch interaction on this monitor, click Start.
3. Click the screen on the area indicated.
The system recognizes the monitor as a touch monitor.
4. In the system's web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors.
5. For Monitor 1 at Enable, select Auto or Manual.
At Monitor Profile, select Far, Then Near or Far Only.
6. For Monitor 2, at Monitor Profile, select Content Only or one of the other content profiles.
If you have 3 monitors, follow the steps above for monitors 1 and 2 and select Far Only, Content
Only, or Near Only for monitor 3.
Now you can use the primary monitor to control the system's local interface, and a secondary
monitor to show content.
164
Configuring a Camera or Camera
Control System
Topics:
• Improve Camera Tracking Performance

• Camera Presets
• Configure Far-End Camera Control
• Integrating RealPresence Group Series with Polycom EagleEye Cube HDCI
• Setting Up a Polycom EagleEye IV Camera
• Polycom EagleEye Director II Camera System
• Setting Up a Polycom EagleEye Producer System
• Set Up the Polycom EagleEye Director
• Setting Up Polycom EagleEye Acoustic Camera
If you connect a supported PTZ camera, the system detects the camera type and sets the appropriate
configuration. Ensure that the system is powered off before you connect devices to it.
Refer to your system setup sheet and to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator Reference
Guide for connection details. Refer to the release notes for a list of supported PTZ cameras.
RealPresence Group 700 systems provide inputs for multiple PTZ cameras. RealPresence Group 310
and 500 systems can support a second PTZ camera or non-PTZ camera, The PTZ control can be
achieved by connecting a serial cable from camera for control and HDMI/VGA cable from camera for
video signal. The RS-232 mode for the camera has to be configured as camera control in web interface.
All Polycom cameras can receive IR signals. RealPresence Group Series systems have built-in IR
receivers to receive signals from the remote control. Point the remote control at the system or your
Polycom camera to control it.
The system can provide power to the EagleEye III and EagleEye IV cameras through an HDCI connector.
The cameras do not require any additional power supply or IR extender.
The RealPresence Group 700 system supports a low-power standard that limits the power supplied to the
camera when the system is powered off. So, if the camera is receiving its power only from the HDCI
connector attached to the system, it does not have an active IR receiver capable of powering on the
system using the handheld remote.
If the camera IR is the only exposed IR and you normally power the system on and off with the remote
control, use one of these solutions:
• Provide direct power to the EagleEye III or EagleEye IV camera with the elective EagleEye camera
power supply, 1465-52748-040. This allows the IR sensor to remain powered on, so that the
• Position the system so that the IR receiver on the front of the system has a line-of-sight to the
remote control.
the system.
165
Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System
Sleep and wake states are supported, where the system provides power to the EagleEye IV or EagleEye
III camera. This allows the cameras to wake from a Sleep state through a signal received by the camera's
IR sensor. The camera does not require any additional power supply or IR extender.
Improve Camera Tracking Performance

Tracking performance can be affected by room lighting. If the room is too bright for camera tracking to
work properly, you can improve the tracking performance by adjusting the Backlight Compensation
setting on the Cameras screen.
Procedure
1. In the web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video.
2. Click on Video Inputs and select the appropriate input.
Camera Presets
Camera presets are stored camera positions that you can create in the RealPresence Group Series
system local interface before or during a call. Presets allow you to do the following:
• Automatically point a camera at pre-defined locations in a room.
• Select a video source.
If your camera supports pan, tilt, and zoom movement, and it is set to People, you can create up to 10
preset camera positions for it using the remote control or a touch device, such as the RealPresence
Touch. Each preset stores the camera number, its zoom level, and the direction it points (if appropriate).
If a Polycom touch device is paired with a system, you must use the touch device to create presets. For
more information about creating and using presets, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
User Guide . Once presets are in place, you can view them in the system web interface by going to
Utilities > Tools > Remote Monitoring.
Note that if you use a EagleEye Director with your RealPresence Group Series system, you cannot use
presets for voice tracking.
Related Links
Configure Far-End Camera Control on page 166
Configure Far-End Camera Control

Far-end camera control (FECC) enables a participant to control the camera on another participant's
system. When FECC is enabled, users can control the pan, tilt, and zoom of a call participant's camera.
Users can also create up to 10 presets for a far-site camera. These presets are saved only for the
duration of the call. If the far-site has saved presets, users might also be able to use those presets to
control the far-site camera. For details on creating camera presets or moving a camera to a stored preset,
refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series User Guide .
Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs > General
Camera Settings and select Allow Other Participants in a Call to Control Your Camera.
166
Related Links
Camera Presets on page 166
Enable Users to Pin an Active Speaker

You can then enable users to pin a participant as the active speaker so that a participant's video displays
prominently throughout an MCU call on RealPresence Group 500 and 700.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System Settings.
2. Select Call Settings then select the checkbox for Enable Locking Active speaker in MCU call.
Integrating RealPresence Group Series with Polycom

EagleEye Cube HDCI
The Polycom EagleEye Cube is an HDCI camera designed to work with RealPresence Group Series
systems.
The EagleEye Cube HDCI camera has 1080p 60Hz video transmission, focus distance of 0.5 to 6 meters
as fixed focus and 5x digital zoom with pan and tilt capabilities suitable for small and medium meeting
spaces. You can use the remote control or the RealPresence Group Series system web interface to
configure the EagleEye Cube HDCI camera.
If you are using the EagleEye Digital Extender or the Digital Breakout Adapter with the Polycom EagleEye
Cube HDCI camera, the audio from the camera is not passed to the system. You must use a tabletop
microphone array or a ceiling microphone array.
Position the EagleEye Cube HDCI Camera

Set the EagleEye Cube HDCI camera so the line of sight hits in the middle of the room (or wherever it
needs to go).
• Make sure the EagleEye Cube HDCI camera is on a mounting bracket.
The camera’s viewing angle is approximately 37 degrees above and 37 degrees below its direct line
of sight.
• For the optimal performance of the camera system faces detection feature, ensure ample lighting
on face of participants and minimal backlighting.
LED Indicators
LED indicators display when you power on the EagleEye Cube HDCI camera and indicate system
behaviors.
Polycom EagleEye Cube LED Indicators and Status
LED Indicator LED Position System Status
Blinking Amber All Updating camera firmware
Amber Center Standby/Asleep
167
LED Indicator LED Position System Status
White Alternate Booting up camera
Red Center Microphone muted
White One LED (position depends on the System isn’t in a call and active speaker tracking is
speaker) on
Configure Camera Settings

You can configure Polycom EagleEye Cube HDCI settings using a RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface of the RealPresence Group Series system, go to Admin Settings >
Audio/Video > Video Inputs > General Camera Settings.
2. Select the input the Polycom EagleEye Cube camera uses.
Camera Tracking
The Polycom EagleEye Cube HDCI camera detects the people in the room and provides group framing
during a conference. EagleEye Cube HDCI detects the people in the room and sets up group framing.
You can set the tracking mode and speed, and specify the type of group framing, which enables
automatic tracking of group participants in the room.
Change Camera Tracking Settings

You can change camera tracking settings in the system web interface.
1. In the RealPresence Group Series system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video >
Video Inputs > General Camera Settings, select the input used by the Polycom EagleEye Cube
HDCI.
Settings Description
Tracking Mode Specifies the tracking mode:

Frame Speaker- This is the default setting. During a
conference, this mode frames the active speaker, then
when someone else starts speaking, the camera view
changes to frame the new speaker. Note that when the
tracking mode is set to Frame Speaker and the local
microphone is muted, the camera tracking mode
automatically switches to Frame Group.
Frame Group- Enables automatic tracking and framing
of the group participants in the room without displaying
the camera motion between frames.
Off - Disables automatic tracking. All camera control
must be handled manually.
168
Tracking Speed Specifies the tracking speed:

Slow- Detects meeting participants at a slow speed
rate.
Normal- This is the default tracking speed. Detects
meeting participants at a normal speed rate.
Fast- Detects meeting participants at a fast speed rate.
Framing Size Specifies the framing view:

Wide- Establishes a wide view of meeting participants.
Medium- This is the default group framing view.
Establishes a medium view of meeting
Tight- Establishes a close-up view of meeting
participants.
Enable Camera Tracking

You can enable EagleEye Cube HDCI camera tracking in the local interface.
Procedure
1. In the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system, go to Camera .
2. Select Camera Tracking On.
Disable Camera Tracking

You can disable camera tracking in the local interface.
Procedure
1. In the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system, go to Camera.
2. Select Camera Tracking Off.
Participant Count CDR Details

When used with a RealPresence Group Series system and an EagleEye Cube HDCI camera, the camera
system tracks the number of conference participants in a room. Call information is collected in a Polycom
RealPresence Resource Manager Call Detail Report (CDR) and provides detailed data to system
administrators.
Note: To get the most accurate result of participant count data, the number of participants in a single
room should be 10 people or less.
169
Participant Count
Participant Description
People Minutes The total people count for each minute of the call. For
example, If there are five people in a sixty minute
meeting and five additional people join at 10 minutes
after the start of the meeting, the total People Minutes
will be 550. (5*60)+ (5*50).
People Count (call begin) Number of people on the call during the first minute of
the call, tracked with EagleEye Cube HDCI camera
system.
People Count (peak value) Peak number of people participating in the call, tracked
with the EagleEye Cube HDCI camera system.
People Count (call end) Number of people participating on the call during the
last minute of the call, tracked with the EagleEye Cube
HDCI camera system.
EagleEye Cube HDCI Camera Software Updates

Updates to the EagleEye Cube HDCI software are included with the RealPresence Group Series system
software updates. No license number or key is needed to update the camera software. Software for an
EagleEye Cube HDCI camera is automatically updated when connected with the RealPresence Group
Series system.
Procedure
» Connect the EagleEye Cube HDCI to the system.
The system detects the EagleEye Cube HDCI and updates it, if necessary.
Note: When the EagleEye Cube HDCI software update version is higher or equal to the
RealPresence Group Series system software, software update can't be performed.
Factory Restore the EagleEye Cube HDCI

If the EagleEye Cube HDCI camera isn’t functioning correctly or you need to recover from a corrupted
partition, you can use the restore button to reset the device.
This operation completely erases the camera’s settings and reinstalls the software. Keep the EagleEye
Cube powered on during the factory restore process.
Procedure
1. Connect the EagleEye Cube HDCI cable to the RealPresence Group Series system to power on.
2. Insert a straightened paper clip through the pinhole and press and hold the restore button for 5
seconds.
3. Release the restore button when the LED indicators alternate amber.
170
The camera enters factory restore mode. The factory restore takes approximately 2 to 3 minutes
to complete. The camera automatically powers off and back on when the process is complete.
Setting Up a Polycom EagleEye IV Camera

The Polycom EagleEye IV cameras are digital with a 4k sensor that is specifically designed to work with
RealPresence Group Series systems. Available accessories are a privacy cover, wide-angle lens, and
digital extender. EagleEye IV cameras have either 4x or 12x zoom lenses.
For information about setting up these cameras, refer to Installing the Polycom EagleEye IV Wide Angle
Lens, Setting Up the Polycom EagleEye IV Cameras, Setting Up the Polycom EagleEye IV Camera
Privacy Cover, and Setting Up the Polycom EagleEye Digital Extender which are available at Polycom
Support.
EagleEye IV Camera Orientation

After you have connected your EagleEye IV camera, you might want to change the camera's orientation.
EagleEye IV cameras can be mounted upside down to accommodate special video conferencing
situations. The orientation of the video display and pan/tilt functions work transparently so that the
inverted position is transparent to end users. The default orientation is normal, or not inverted.
Enable an Inverted Camera Position for the EagleEye IV Camera

You might want to invert the EagleEye IV camera in your environment.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs, and choose
EagleEye IV camera.
2. At Orientation, select Inverted and click Save.
Enable a Normal Camera Position

You might want to disable the inverted camera position in your environment.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs, and choose
EagleEye IV camera.
2. At Orientation, select Normal and click Save.
Replace the EagleEye IV Camera

On the EagleEye Director II camera, you can replace an EagleEye IV camera with another EagleEye IV
camera.
Procedure
1. Power off the EagleEye Director II camera.
2. Disconnect and remove the existing EagleEye IV camera.
3. Connect the desired EagleEye IV camera.
4. Power on the EagleEye Director II camera.
171
Polycom EagleEye Director II Camera System

The Polycom EagleEye Director II camera system is the next version of the Polycom EagleEye Director
camera.
The Polycom EagleEye Director II camera system is an automatic camera positioning system that works
in conjunction with a RealPresence Group Series system to provide accurate close-up views of the
person who is speaking. The EagleEye Director II camera system also provides smooth transitions
between the close-up view of the person who is speaking and the group view when there is no active
speaker.
Figure 1:
The EagleEye Director II camera system uses two cameras. Initially, the current view is captured by one
camera, while the other camera is searching and tracking the next target. If two persons speak
alternately, the camera tracks the person who is speaking, while the other camera tracks the other person
who is speaking. The camera system continuously scans the room and commands the movable camera
to pan, tilt, and zoom, framing users with face detection technology. By providing automatic and intelligent
views in various speaking scenarios during a conference, the EagleEye Director II camera system
delivers a user experience similar to a newscast video production.
The analytics camera captures group view video only when the EagleEye Director II camera system is in
tracking mode or when the analytics camera is in tilt position. At the same time, the two EagleEye IV
cameras in active state display a LED light. In any other state, the analytics camera does not send video
to the RealPresence Group Series system.
Note: The Polycom EagleEye Director II camera system is compatible with two Polycom EagleEye
IV-12X cameras and does not support a single camera configuration. The cameras must be
paired with the EagleEye Director II camera system. A wide angle adapter is supported if it is
used with both EagleEye IV cameras.
The EagleEye Digital Extender and RealPresence Digital Breakout Adapter can help with
installations that require longer connections between your camera and system (except for the
required audio connection). For information, see the Polycom RealPresence Group Series
172
The Horizontal Field of View (HFOV) of the analytics camera is 80 degrees. The analytics camera
provides participant count details and PIP video. The participants who are outside the HFOV are not
detected by the EagleEye Director II analytics camera system and are not counted or shown in the PIP.
The camera system detects the speaker through participant voices. If there is a microphone for a local
speaker along with the EagleEye Director II camera system, the performance of the EagleEye Director II
camera system affects the frame speaker behavior.
During an active conference call while using the camera system, Polycom recommends that you do not to
use a microphone for local speakers.
Position the EagleEye Director II Camera System

Follow these guidelines to position the EagleEye Director II camera system to work with your
Procedure
1. Make sure the EagleEye Director II camera system is on a level surface or mounting bracket.
The camera’s viewing angle is approximately 5 degrees above and 15 degrees below its direct line
of sight as shown below.
2. To ensure the optimal performance of the camera system face detection feature, follow these
suggestions:
• Provide ample lighting on faces of participants. This allows the EagleEye Director II camera
system to correctly frame faces, using the eyes, noses, and mouths as guidelines.
• Allow only minimal backlighting.
3. To ensure the best view from the camera system voice-tracking feature, follow these suggestions:
• Make sure that ambient room noise is quiet enough to allow the camera system to locate the
participant who is speaking.
• Set up the audio connection from the RealPresence Group Series system to the camera
system, whether you connect it directly to the audio output of the system or to an audio
processor managing the room audio.
4. Set the camera system on a wall. Place the camera between 5.5 and seven feet from the ground.
This figure shows optimal placement of the camera system:
173
5. Ensure that people are sitting within a three to 33 feet (0.91 m ~ 10.1 m) viewing range from the
device.
The following figure shows the viewing range of EagleEye Director II camera system.
Note: Before powering on the EagleEye Director II camera system, connect the camera system
to the RealPresence Group Series system using an HDCI cable. This prevents the camera
system from automatically entering sleep mode after three minutes.
174
Indicator Lights
Indicator lights and power sensors display when the EagleEye Director II camera system is powered on.
A light-emitting diode (LED) is integrated into the front of the EagleEye Director II camera system. These
LED lights emit colors that refer to various system states and allow you to identify the current state of the
EagleEye Director II camera system.
Figure 2:
The following table shows the LED status of EagleEye Director II camera system with its corresponding
behavior.
LED Color/State Behavior
Blue Power On, EagleEye Director II camera system is in active state
Blinking Blue Receive IR, EagleEye Director II camera system boot up
Fast Blinking Blue Power On, MCU is being initialized, Adjust Analytics camera status
Amber Standby/Asleep
Alternate Amber and Blue Software update, Factory restore, USB image update
Blinking Amber USB plugged in
Green In a call
Blinking Green Receive IR in a call
Fast Blinking Red EagleEye Director II camera system error
175
View System Status for EagleEye Director II Camera System

You might need to view the system status of an EagleEye Director II camera system on a RealPresence
Group Series system interface.
Procedure
» Do one of the following:
• In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Status.
• In the web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Status.
You cannot view the system status if the EagleEye Director II camera system is not connected or is not
selected as the current camera source.
System Status
Diagnostic Screen Description
Active Alerts Displays the status of any device or service listed within the Status
screens that has a current status indicator of red. Alerts are listed
in the order they occurred.
Call Control Displays the status of the Auto-Answer Point-to-Point Video and
Meeting Password settings.
Audio Displays the connection status of audio devices such as

microphones, Polycom SoundStation IP conference phone, and
Polycom SoundStructure card.
Camera Displays the connection status of the camera that is connected. If

the camera is not connected or is not selected as the current
camera source, this choice is not visible on the screen. In addition,
the details of the EagleEye cameras attached to the EagleEye
Director II camera system are displayed.
LAN Displays the connection status of the IP Network.
Servers • Always displays the Gatekeeper and SIP Registrar Server.

• Displays the active Global Directory Server, LDAP Server, or
Microsoft Server.
• If enabled, displays the Provisioning Service, Calendaring
Service, or Presence Service.
Log Management Displays the status of the Log Threshold setting.

When a system device or service encounters a problem, you see
an alert next to the System button on the menu.
EagleEye Director II Camera System Diagnostics

Most diagnostic information is available on both the web and the local interface, but some information is
specific to one or the other interface. From the web interface, go to Diagnostics > Audio and Video
Tests > Camera Tracking.
176
The screen includes the following diagnostic information for your camera system.
Speaker Test Tests the audio cable connections. A 473 Hz tone indicates that
the local audio connections are correct.
If you run a test during a call, people on the far site also hear the
test tone.
If you run the test from the system web interface during a call, the
people at the site you are testing hear the tone, but you don’t.
If you run the test from the system web interface during a call, the
people at the site you are testing will hear the tone, but you will
not.
Audio Meters Measures the strength of audio signals from ten internal
microphones, far-site audio, and any device connected to the
audio line in.
Meters function only when the associated input is enabled.
Note: Some audio meters are unavailable when a SoundStructure
digital mixer is connected to the room system.
Camera Tracking Provides diagnostics specific to the EagleEye Director II camera

system.
Audio
Verifies microphone functionality. To use this feature, speak aloud
and verify that you can see dynamic signal indications for four
vertical microphones and six horizontal microphones. If no signal
indication appears for a specific microphone, manually power off
the EagleEye Director II camera system and then power it back on.
Also verifies the reference audio signal: Set up a video call. Let the
far side speak aloud and verify that you can see dynamic signal
indications for the two reference audio meters.
If no signal indication appears for a specific microphone, make
sure the reference cable is connected firmly.
After you verify microphone functionality, calibrate the camera
again.
Video
• Left Camera shows video from the left camera.
• Right Camera shows video from the right camera.
• Analytics Camera shows video from the analytics camera.
• Color Bars displays the color bar test screen.
Note: If the EagleEye Director II camera system is connected but
is not selected as current camera source, this choice is not visible
on the screen.
177
Perform a Factory Restore

A factory restore completely erases the system and restores it to the factory software version and default
configuration. During a factory restore, the LED indicator on the front of the EagleEye Director II camera
alternates between blue and amber.
Note: Do not power off the camera during the factory restore process.
Procedure
1. With the camera is powered off, insert a straightened paper clip through the pinhole and press and
hold the Restore button.
2. While holding the Restore button, plug in the power cable to power on the camera.
3. Hold the Restore button for an additional five seconds, and then release it when the LED
alternates amber and blue.
The camera enters factory restore mode. The factory restore takes approximately eight minutes to
complete. The camera automatically powers off and back on when the process is complete.
Setting Up a Polycom EagleEye Producer System

The Polycom® EagleEye™ Producer system is a camera-peripheral technology that provides room framing
and participant counting. Using facial recognition technology, the device scans the room and commands
the movable Polycom® EagleEye™ III and IV cameras to pan, tilt, and zoom.
Position the EagleEye Producer system on a level surface, ideally on top of a monitor. You can mount the
Polycom® EagleEye™ III, Polycom® EagleEye™ IV cameras on top of the EagleEye Producer. The
EagleEye Producer includes a ‘bunk bed' mount for use with the universal camera mounting solution.
Available accessories include the EagleEye Digital Extender and the Digital Breakout Adapter.
Ensure that the EagleEye Producer field of view includes the all conference participants. The system
supports a wide angle lens on the EagleEye IV camera. EagleEye IV cameras are available with either 4x
or 12x zoom capability.
You can connect one EagleEye Producer to a RealPresence Group Series system at a time. Multiple
EagleEye Producer connections are not supported.
The EagleEye Producer system and EagleEye Director II camera system are tested to support the
accessories :
• 10 meter cable HDCI to mini-HDCI
• Digital Breakout Adapter
• EagleEye Digital Extender
For more information on the required cables, or setting or positioning the EagleEye Producer, refer to the
Polycom EagleEye Producer Setup Sheet document on Polycom Support.
178
Calibration
The EagleEye Producer internal camera is aligned with the EagleEye camera. If the alignment changes,
group framing is not accurate.
Automatically Calibrate the Room View

Deviations in tracking results can occur when the EagleEye Producer is being installed or moved. In
these instances, EagleEye Producer attempts to perform automatic calibration by automatically detecting
deviations and adjusting itself to display the best views. To automatically calibrate the room view, no
movement can be detected during the calibration period.
Procedure
1. From the RealPresence Group Series system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/
Video > Video Inputs > General Camera Settings and select the input used by the EagleEye
Producer.
Select the Automatic Image Calibration checkbox.
2. Enable Tracking.
Have one person sit so they are framed in a webcam view.
Manually Calibrate
You can realign the EagleEye Producer camera and EagleEye camera to display the best view of the
room for group framing by manually calibrating the room view.
Note: If you are using a touch panel, you need a RealPresence Group Series remote control to
manually calibrate the room view.
Before you manually calibrate the room view ensure that the EagleEye camera is properly attached to the
EagleEye Producer as shown in Set Up the Polycom EagleEye Producer.
Procedure
1. Ensure that the Make This Camera Your Main Camera video input setting in administration
settings in the Group system web interface specifies the EagleEye Producer as the main camera.
2. Turn Self View on in the local interface of the system to view the room in the self view window.
3. Press the Home button on the system remote control for five seconds to get to the Home
screen.
The EagleEye Producer LED changes to a fast blue blink when on the Home screen.
4. Press the Up and Down arrow buttons on the remote control to align the webcam with the
EagleEye camera to show the best room view when group framing.
5. To exit the Home screen, press any key on the remote control except the Up or Down arrow
button.
If no action is taken for five seconds, the system will automatically the Home screen. The LED
turns to blue.
Camera Tracking
The Polycom EagleEye Producer detects the people in the room and provides framing during a
conference. Frame Speaker with a Normal tracking speed and Medium view is enabled by default. When
an EagleEye Producer is connected to a RealPresence Group Series system, camera tracking starts
179
automatically when you initiate a call and stops automatically when you hang up from a call. You can also
manually start camera tracking in the local interface of the system. EagleEye Producer detects the people
in the room and sets up framing. You can set the tracking mode and speed, and specify the type of group
framing, which enables automatic tracking of group participants in the room and frames the active
speaker. EagleEye Producer is integrated with 4 microphones to detect the active speaker.
Polycom recommends calibrating the Polycom EagleEye Producer before adjusting camera features. For
instructions on how to calibrate the Polycom EagleEye Producer, refer to the Polycom RealPresence
EagleEye Producer User Guide at Polycom Support.
Indicator Lights
A light-emitting diode (LED) is integrated into the front of the EagleEye Producer device. These LED
lights emit colors that refer to various system states and allow you to identify the current state for the
EagleEye Producer system. Detailed LED and system states mappings are shown in the following table.
LED System State
Blue Power On, EagleEye Producer normal state
Blinking Blue On, not in a call, receive IR

EagleEye Producer boot up
Fast Blinking Blue Calibrate webcam room view
Amber Standby - asleep
Blinking Amber USB disk plugged in
Green On, In a call
Blinking Green On, in a call, receive IR in a call
Fast Blinking Red System error
Blink Needs attention, receive IR
Change the EagleEye Camera

On the EagleEye Producer, to change an EagleEye camera to another EagleEye camera , you must
power off the EagleEye Producer first.
Procedure
1. Power off the EagleEye Producer.
2. Disconnect and remove the existing EagleEye camera.
3. Connect the desired EagleEye camera.
For information about how to connect an EagleEye camera, see the Polycom EagleEye Producer
Setup Sheet.
4. Power on the EagleEye Producer.
180
Note: The camera on the EagleEye Producer can be either an EagleEye IV or EagleEye III camera.
When used with the EagleEye IV an additional adapter cable is required, which is included in the
EagleEye Producer kit.
An EagleEye Digital Extender and the Digital Breakout Adapter are available for the EagleEye
Producer. For more information on these accessories, refer to the RealPresence Group Series
Change Camera Tracking Settings

You can change camera tracking settings in the system web interface.
• In the system web interface of the RealPresence Group Series system, go to Admin Settings >
Audio/Video > Video Inputs > General Camera Settings and select the input used by the
Polycom EagleEye Producer.
Configure the following settings.
Setting Description
Tracking Mode Specifies the tracking mode:

◦ Frame Speaker - This is the default setting.
During a conference, this mode frames the
active speaker, then when someone else starts
speaking, the camera view changes to frame the
new speaker. Note that when the tracking mode
is set to Frame Speaker and the local
microphone is muted, the camera tracking mode
automatically switches to Frame Group.
◦ Frame Group - Enables automatic tracking and
framing of the group participants in the room
without displaying the camera motion between
frames.
◦ Frame Group with Transition - Enables
automatic tracking and framing of the group of
participants in the room.
◦ Off - Disables automatic tracking. All camera
control must be handled manually.
Tracking Speed Specifies the tracking speed:

◦ Slow - Detects meeting participants at a slow
speed rate.
◦ Normal - This is the default tracking speed.
Detects meeting participants at a normal speed
rate.
◦ Fast - Detects meeting participants at a fast
speed rate.
181
Setting Description
Framing Size Specifies the framing view:

◦ Wide - Establishes a wide view of meeting
participants.
◦ Medium - This is the default group framing view.
Establishes a medium view of meeting
participants.
◦ Tight - Establishes a close-up view of meeting
participants.
Enable Camera Tracking

You can enable EagleEye Producer camera tracking in the local interface. If camera tracking is enabled,
when you start a call, camera tracking starts automatically; when you end a call, camera tracking stops
automatically and group framing is disabled.
Procedure
» In the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system, go to Camera and select Camera
Tracking On.
Disable Camera Tracking

You can disable camera tracking in the local interface.
Procedure
» In the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system, go to Camera and select Camera
Tracking Off.
Update EagleEye Producer Software

Updates to the EagleEye Producer software are included with RealPresence Group Series system
software updates. No license number or key code is required to update the EagleEye Producer. Software
for an EagleEye IV camera is automatically updated when the camera is attached to the system with an
EagleEye Producer.
Procedure
» Connect the EagleEye Producer to the system.
The system detects the EagleEye Producer and updates it, if necessary.
Update the EagleEye Producer System Image

If you are unable to automatically update the EagleEye Producer system software by connecting to a
RealPresence Group Series system, you can update EagleEye Producer system manually by updating
the system image.
To update the EagleEye Producer system image, use a USB device with at least 200MB of space and
make sure the USB file system is in FAT32 format to perform a full system update.
Note: Do not unplug the USB drive during the update process.
182
Procedure
1. Create a folder named plcm-eep-cmd in the USB root directory.
2. Create a subfolder named update in the plcm-eep-cmd folder.
3. Copy the EagleEye Producer update image (polycom-eagleeyeproducer-xxx-1.0.0.xx-
xxxx.img) into the update folder.
4. Plug in the EagleEye Producer power cable to power it on and allow it to fully boot up.
The LED turns solid blue.
5. Plug the USB drive into EagleEye Producer.
The LED blinks amber and then turns solid blue in a few seconds.
6. Unplug the EagleEye Producer power cable, but leave the USB drive plugged in.
7. Plug in the EagleEye Producer power cable and allow it to boot up.
The LED turns solid blue. The EagleEye Producer starts the image update and the LED blinks
blue and amber. The image update takes approximately ten minutes to complete. The EagleEye
Producer automatically reboots when the image update is complete. The camera tilts up and then
down during the reboot and the LED returns to solid blue.
8. Remove the USB drive.
The update log is saved in [USB root directory]/eepout/[EEP SN]/log.
Download System Logs and Configurations

EagleEye Producer system logs and configurations are not uploaded to RealPresence Group Series . You
must use an empty USB drive and make sure the USB file is in FAT32 format to download the EagleEye
Producer system logs and configurations. You can use logs and configurations to troubleshoot EagleEye
Producer system software issues.
Procedure
1. Create a folder named plcm-eep-cmd in the USB root directory.
2. Create a subfolder named log in the plcm-eep-cmd folder.
3. Create a blank text file named downloadlogflg in the log folder.
4. Plug the USB drive into the EagleEye Producer.
The LED blinks amber and then turns solid blue.
5. Remove the USB drive.
The downloaded files are located in the following locations.
• The application logs and system information are in the [USB root directory]/
eepout/[EEP SN]/log/ folder.
• Configuration files are in the [USB root directory]/eepout/[EEP SN]/config/
folder.
• The system current running status is recorded in a file called sysstatus and is in the [USB
root directory]/eepout/[EEP SN]/ folder. The system status file includes current
CPU/memory usage and current running process information.
Participant Count CDR Details

When used with a RealPresence Group Series system and an EagleEye camera, the camera system
tracks the number of conference participants in a room. Call information is collected in a Polycom
183
RealPresence Resource Manager Call Detail Report (CDR) and provides detailed data to system
administrators.
Note: To get the most accurate result of participant count data, the number of participants in a single
room should be 10 people or less.
Participant Count
Participant Description
People Minutes The total people count for each minute of the call. For example, If
there are five people in a sixty minute meeting and five additional
people join at 10 minutes after the start of the meeting, the total
People Minutes will be 550. (5*60)+(5*50).
People Count (call begin) Number of people on the call during the first minute of the call,
tracked with EagleEye Producer camera system.
People Count (peak value) Peak number of people participating in the call, tracked with the
EagleEye Producer camera system.
People Count (call end) Number of people participating on the call during the last minute of
the call, tracked with the EagleEye Producer camera system.
Related Links
Call Detail Report (CDR) on page 284
Perform a Factory Restore

You can use the hardware restore button on the EagleEye Producer system to perform a factory restore
of the RealPresence Group Series system. A factory restore completely erases the system and restores it
to the software version and default configuration stored in its factory partition. During a factory restore, the
LED indicator on the front of the system blinks blue and amber.
Procedure
1. While the EagleEye Producer system is powered off, insert a straightened paper clip through the
pinhole and press and hold the Restore button.
2. While holding the Restore button, plug in the power cable to power on the EagleEye Producer.
3. Hold the Restore button for five additional seconds, and then release it when the LED alternates
amber and blue.
The EagleEye Producer enters factory restore mode. The factory restore takes approximately
eight minutes to complete. The EagleEye Producer automatically reboots when the process is
complete.
4. Calibrate the room view when the reboot is complete.
Note: Keep the Polycom EagleEye Producer powered on during the factory restore process.
184
Set Up the Polycom EagleEye Director

You can use the remote control or the RealPresence Group Series system web interface to set up the
EagleEye Director. You cannot configure the EagleEye Director using a Polycom touch device, but you
can start and stop camera tracking.
For detailed setup instructions, refer to Set up the Polycom EagleEye Director on Polycom Support.
Procedure
1. Power on the EagleEye Director.
You can verify that the device is detected and compatible with the system's software on the
System Status screen.
•
In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Status > EagleEye
Director.If you see EagleEye Director among the status settings, the device has been
detected.
2. Calibrate the cameras.
If you notice that the speaker is not framed accurately, ensure that the vertical bar of the EagleEye
Director is vertical. Placing the EagleEye Director on a horizontal surface can help to ensure that
the vertical bar is vertical. You might also need to recalibrate the cameras.
3. Adjust the room view.
Positioning the Polycom EagleEye Director

The Polycom® EagleEye™ Director is an automatic HD dual-camera racking system that works with
Follow these guidelines when you use the EagleEye Director with your system:
• Do not connect more than one EagleEye Director to a single RealPresence Group Series system.
• Avoid setting the EagleEye Director in the corner of a room. The EagleEye Director should be at
least 12 inches away from all of the walls.
• Make sure the EagleEye Director is on a level surface or mounting bracket.
• The camera's viewing angle is approximately 9 degrees above and 30 degrees below its direct line
of sight, as shown next.
• To ensure optimal performance of the EagleEye Director facial recognition feature, follow these
suggestions:
◦ Provide ample lighting on faces of participants. This allows the system to correctly frame
faces, using the eyes, noses, and mouths as guidelines.
◦ Allow only minimal backlighting.
• To ensure the best view from the EagleEye Director voice-tracking feature, follow these
suggestions:
185
◦ Make sure ambient room noise is quiet enough to allow the system to locate the participant
who is speaking.
◦ Be sure to set up the audio connection from the system to the EagleEye Director, whether you
connect it directly to the audio output of the system or to an audio processor managing the
room audio.
◦ Set the EagleEye Director on top of a monitor. Ideally, place the camera between 5.5 and 7
feet from the ground.
The following figure shows EagleEye Director placement.
• Ensure that people are sitting within the viewing range of between 3 and 22 feet from the device.
The following figure shows the EagleEye Director viewing range.
Indicator Lights
The following figure shows the location of the power indicator light on the back of the EagleEye Director.
186
This indicator light provides the following information.
Indicator Light System Status
Steady green light Cameras are ready; camera tracking is off
Steady red light Cameras are powering on
Blinking red light Factory restore on the cameras is starting
Blinking blue light Camera tracking is on
Adjust the Room View

You can adjust the room view on the EagleEye Director to get the best perspective for your video calls.
Procedure
• From the local interface, go to > Settings > Administration > Camera Tracking >
Calibration, and then select Begin Calibration.
•
From the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs, and
then select the Input used by the EagleEye Director.
• In the local interface, select Skip to move to the Adjust Room View screen.
• In the system web interface, select Adjust Room View.
3. Use the arrow buttons and zoom controls on the remote control or system web interface to show
the room view you want far site participants to see.
4. Select Finish to save the settings and return to the Camera Settings screen.
Calibrate the EagleEye Director Cameras

In Voice Tracking mode, you only need to calibrate the right camera. In Direct Cut mode, calibrate the
right camera and then left one. Ensure that only one person speaks while you are calibrating the cameras
and keep the background quiet. If you rearrange or move the EagleEye Director, recalibrate it.
Procedure
• In the local interface, go to > Settings > Administration > Camera Tracking >
Calibration.
187
•
In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs and
select Calibrate Voice Tracking.
2. Follow the directions in the Auto Calibration screen that appears.
When you click Start, auto-calibration begins. When the automatic process ends, you have these
choices:
• Yes, I see a green box around my mouth. Selecting this choice means auto-calibration
was successful and you can move forward with adjusting the room view, if you like.
• No, I see a green box, but it is not around my mouth. Selecting this choice means you
can try auto-calibration again or manually calibrate the camera.
•
No, I do not see a box at all. Selecting this choice means you must manually calibrate the
camera.
3. If necessary, follow these steps to manually calibrate the camera:
a. Use the arrow buttons and zoom controls on the remote control or system web interface to
zoom completely in, then aim the camera at your mouth.
b. Select Begin Calibration or Start and follow the onscreen instructions until a message
displays indicating successful calibration.
Camera Tracking in the Local Interface

You can start or stop camera tracking in the local interface. Whether you are or are not in a call, go to
Menu > Cameras and select Start Camera Tracking or Stop Camera Tracking.
Camera tracking can also start or stop automatically, based on the following actions:
• Camera tracking starts automatically when you make a call.
• Camera tracking stops after you hang up a call.
• Camera tracking temporarily stops when you mute the RealPresence Group Series system in a call.
It resumes when you unmute the system. If camera tracking is disabled, pressing Mute on the
remote control does not affect tracking.
Disable Camera Tracking for EagleEye Director

You can manually stop EagleEye Director tracking, which is also called automatic camera positioning.
Do one of the following
• In the local interface, go to Settings > Administration > Camera Tracking > Settings.
◦ For the Tracking Mode setting, select Off. In this mode, the tracking function is disabled. You
must manually move the camera using the remote control or a touch device.
• In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs, and then select
the Input used by the EagleEye Director.
◦ Disable the Use Voices to Track People setting.
• If the RealPresence Group Series system is paired with a Polycom touch device, touch Cameras
on the Home screen or the Call screen and select Stop Camera Tracking.
Enable Camera Tracking for EagleEye Director

If EagleEye Director tracking is enabled, the camera follows the person or people who are speaking.
While one camera tracks the person who is speaking, the other camera captures the room view. The
EagleEye Director shows the room view while the camera moves from one speaker to another. When the
tracking camera locates a person who is speaking, the EagleEye Director camera switches to a close-up
of that person. This tracking action, also called automatic camera positioning, can be manually started.
188

• In the local interface, go to Settings > Administration > Camera Tracking > Settings.
◦ For the Tracking Mode setting, select Voice. This is the default tracking mode. In this mode,
the camera automatically tracks the current speaker in the room using a voice tracking
algorithm.When you select the Voice Tracking Mode, you can also choose the Tracking
Speed. This speed determines how quickly the camera moves to each person who speaks.
The default speed is Normal.If voice tracking does not work as expected, make sure the
microphones are functioning properly.
• In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs, and then select
the Input used by the EagleEye Director.
◦ Enable the Use Voices to Track People setting.
• If the RealPresence Group Series system is paired with a Polycom touch device, follow these steps:
1. On the touch device, touch Cameras on the Home screen or the Call screen.
2. If the EagleEye Director is not currently selected, select it.
3. Touch Select Cameras and select the EagleEye Director camera.
4. Touch Control Camera.
5. Select Start Camera Tracking.
Transfer EagleEye Director Logs

The Polycom EagleEye Director logs contain important status and debug information that is not included
in the logs available for the RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. Attach a USB storage device formatted in FAT32 to the back panel of the EagleEye Director.
2. Restart the EagleEye Director by following these steps:
a. Unplug the 12v adaptor attached to the side of the EagleEye Director.
b. Wait a 5 seconds.
c. Plug the 12v adaptor into the side of the EagleEye Director.
It could take up to two minutes for the EagleEye Director to restart.
3. Remove the USB storage device.
A log file using the name format of eagleeyedirector_info_xxxxx.tar.gz is generated on
the USB storage device.
EagleEye Director Software Updates

Updates to EagleEye Director software is included with the RealPresence Group Series system software
updates. No license number or key is needed to update the camera software.
To update your EagleEye Director, connect it to the system before you run a software update. The
software update program detects the device and updates it if necessary.
189
Perform a Factory Restore for the EagleEye Director

If the EagleEye Director is not functioning correctly or you need to recover from a corrupted partition, you
can use the restore button to reset the device. This operation completely erases the camera's settings
and reinstalls the software. Keep the EagleEye Director powered on during the factory restore process.
The following figure shows you the location of the restore button on the back of the EagleEye Director.
Procedure
1. Press and hold the restore button on the back of the EagleEye Director for 2-3 seconds while the
power light cycles.
When normal video content is displayed on the monitor instead of a blue screen, the EagleEye
Director has been successfully restored.
2. Release the restore button.
Troubleshooting EagleEye Director Camera Calibration

When the system first detects the EagleEye Director, a calibration wizard starts. If the EagleEye Director
is not detected, try one of the following solutions:
• Ensure all cables are tightly plugged in, then attempt camera detection again. If you are using
EagleEye Director version 1.0 software, you might need to ensure that the ball stubs are tightly
pressed into the hole on the base after checking the cables.
• Ensure that all seven EagleEye Director tracking microphones are working correctly. Five of those
microphones are horizontal and two are vertical reference audio microphones. Calibration fails if
any of the microphones do not work.
• Restart the RealPresence Group Series system.
Manually power off the EagleEye Director by unplugging its power supply and unplugging the HDCI cable
from the RealPresence Group Series system. Then power on the EagleEye Director, plug the HDCI cable
into the system, and attempt camera detection again.
Troubleshooting EagleEye Director Camera Tracking

Tracking performance can be affected by room lighting. If the room is too bright for camera tracking to
work properly, you can improve the tracking performance by adjusting the Backlight Compensation setting
on the Cameras screen. To find this setting in the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/
Video > Video Inputs and select the appropriate Input.
Setting Up Polycom EagleEye Acoustic Camera

The Polycom EagleEye Acoustic camera is designed to be placed on top of your monitor, as shown next.
190
The Polycom EagleEye Acoustic camera can also be pointed down to show an item in front of the display,
as shown next.
If you are using the EagleEye Digital Extender or the Digital Breakout Adapter with the Polycom EagleEye
Acoustic camera, the audio from the camera is not passed to the system. You must use a tabletop
microphone array or a ceiling microphone array.
Indicator Lights
The following figure shows the location of the LED on the front of the EagleEye Acoustic camera.
1 IR Sensor
2 System Status
The system status light provides the following information.
191
Steady blue light System is on and awake.
Blinking blue light Camera firmware is being updated.
Steady amber light System is asleep.
Steady green light System is in a call.
192
Configuring Remote Control Behavior
Topics:
• Configure Remote Control Behavior

• Programming the Remote Control
You can configure the behavior of your remote control.
Configure Remote Control Behavior

You can customize how the remote control paired to your system behaves.
When you configure your system for a Zoom environment, the remote control must use DTMF tones by
default.
Procedure
Remote Control, Keypad, and Power.
Setting Description
Keypad Audio Confirmation Specifies whether to play a voice confirmation of

numbers selected with the remote control or
keypad.
Enable this setting when using your system in a
Zoom environment.
Numeric Keypad Function Specifies whether pressing number buttons on the

remote control or keypad moves the camera to
presets or generates touch tones (DTMF tones). If
you set this option to Presets, you can generate
DTMF tones by pressing the # key on the remote
control while in a call.
Choose Tones if your system is in a Zoom
environment.
Use Non-Polycom Remote Configures the system to accept input from a

programmable, non-Polycom remote control. In
most cases the Polycom remote works as
designed, even when you enable this feature.
However, try disabling this feature if you
experience difficulty with the Polycom remote. For
more information about system IR codes, refer to
the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Integrator
Reference Guide.
193
Setting Description
Channel ID Specifies the IR identification channel to which the

room system responds. Set the Channel ID to the
same channel as the remote control. The default
setting is 3. If you set the remote control to channel
3, it can control a room system set to any Channel
ID.
Hang-up Button Long Press Specifies the behavior of the remote control Hang-
up button when you press it for a long time.
• Hang-up / Power Off: Holding down the Hang-
up button powers off the room system.
• Hang-up / Sleep: Holding down the Hang-up
button puts the system to sleep.
• Hang-up Only: Holding down the Hang-up
button has no function other than hanging up
the call.
# Button Function Specifies the behavior of the # button on the

remote control.
• #, then @: Pressing the # button once displays
the hash symbol. Pressing the # button twice
quickly displays the @ symbol.
• @, then #: Pressing the # button once displays
the @ symbol. Pressing the # button twice
quickly displays the # symbol.
3. Click Save.
Related Links
Remote Control Operation on RealPresence Group 700 Systems on page 197
Power On the System on page 18
Power Off the System on page 18
Programming the Remote Control

Use the remote control to power on and off your system, or to put the system to sleep or wake it. For
details about how to use the remote control, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series User
Guide .
You can customize the behavior of the remote control to support the user's environment. Note the
following regarding remote control behavior:
• If the system is paired and connected with a RealPresence Touch, the remote control can perform
some limited functions.
• If the RealPresence Group Series system is paired and connected with a Polycom Touch Control,
the remote control is disabled.
• The room system remote control IR transmits a modulated frequency of 38 kHz.
194
• When a USB keyboard is connected to a room system, you can enter only numbers with the remote
control on the system's local interface on the Place a Call > Keypad or Place a Call > Contacts
screens.
Set the Remote Control Channel ID

You can set the remote control channel ID in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
Remote Control, Keypad, and Power.
2. Select the Channel ID.
3. Click Save.
Set the Remote Control Channel ID for a Specific System

You can configure the Channel ID so that the remote control affects only one RealPresence Group Series
system, even if other systems are in the same room. The Polycom Touch Control virtual remote control is
always set to channel 3.
If the remote control is set to channel 3, it can control a room system set to any Channel ID. If the system
does not respond to the remote control, set the remote control channel ID to 3 starting with step 3 in the
following procedure. Then follow the entire procedure to configure the system and remote control channel
ID settings.
While performing the following procedures, blocking the IR signal from the remote control can prevent the
signal from being received by the system, causing the system to take an action that corresponds to any of
the remote control button presses.
Procedure
1. Press and hold and for 2-3 seconds on the remote control.
2. After the IR red LED appears on the remote control, release both keys.
The LED remains lit for 10 seconds.
3. While the LED is lit, enter a 2-digit ID between 00 and 15.
If you do not enter the ID during the 10 seconds the LED is lit, the LED flashes six times and you
must repeat steps 1 and 2. Be sure to enter the ID during the next 10-second window.
If the channel ID is saved successfully, the LED flashes twice. Otherwise, the LED flashes six times and
you must repeat steps 1 - 3.
Confirm the Channel ID

You can confirm the correct channel ID to control your RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. While blocking the IR signal from the remote control using your hand or some other object, press
and hold and for 2-3 seconds.
2. After the LED on the remote control comes on, release both keys.
The LED remains lit for 10 seconds.
3. While the LED is lit, enter the 2-digit ID between 00 and 15 that you believe is the channel ID.
195
If you do not enter the ID during the 10 seconds the LED is lit, the LED flashes six times and you
must repeat steps 1 and 2. Be sure to enter the ID during the next 10-second window.
4. If you entered the current channel ID, the LED flashes twice.
Otherwise, the LED flashes six times and allows you to repeat step 3.
Recharge the Remote Control Battery

Your system setup sheet shows how to charge the battery in the remote control the first time. When the
remote control battery power is at 10% or less, a notification is displayed on the home screen. The low
battery notification returns after you dismiss other notifications, and is not displayed while the system is in
a call.
Procedure
1. Pull the battery out of the end of the remote control.
2. Insert the USB plug into any USB 2.0 port, such as the one on your system.
The RealPresence Group 300, RealPresence Group 310, and RealPresence Group 500 systems
have two USB 2.0 ports on the back of the systems, while the RealPresence Group 700 system
has one USB 2.0 port on the front.
3. Insert the USB plug into any USB 2.0 port, such as the one on your system.
4. While the battery is charging, the status light is orange.
After the status light on the battery turns green, remove it from the port.
5. Insert the charged battery into the remote control.
Note: Recharging the battery might take anywhere from 20 minutes to several hours.
The following figure illustrates these steps for the RealPresence Group 300, RealPresence Group 310,
RealPresence Group 500, and RealPresence Group 700 systems.
196
1 Pull the battery out of the end of the remote control.
2 Insert the USB plug of the battery into a USB 2.0 port.
3 Wait until the status light on the battery turns green.
4 Insert the charged battery into the remote control.
Remote Control Operation on RealPresence Group 700 Systems

The RealPresence Group 700 system can be powered on and off with the remote using the same buttons
as shown for the RealPresence Group 300, 310, and 500 systems; however, the Group 700 system
supports a low-power standard that limits the power supplied to the camera when the system is powered
off. So, if the EagleEye IV or EagleEye III camera is receiving its power only from the HDCI connector
attached to the system, it will not have an active IR receiver capable of powering on the system using the
handheld remote when in the Power Off state.
If the camera IR is the only exposed IR and you normally power the system on and off with the handheld
remote control, use one of these solutions:
• Provide direct power to the EagleEye III or EagleEye IV camera with the optional EagleEye camera
power supply, 1465-52748-040. This allows the IR sensor to remain in a Power On state, so that the
• Position the RealPresence Group Series system so that the IR receiver on the front of the system
has a line-of-sight to the remote control.
the system.
Related Links
197
Enabling Mobile Devices as Controllers
Topics:
• Enabling RealPresence Mobile
Enabling RealPresence Mobile

Polycom SmartPairing™ allows you to detect and pair a RealPresence Group Series system from the
RealPresence Mobile application on an Android or Apple iPad tablet. After you pair the application and
the system, you can use the RealPresence Mobile application to perform two basic functions:
• Use the application as a remote control for the room system.
• Swipe to transfer a call from the RealPresence Mobile application to the room system.
SmartPairing Prerequisites
Telnet must be enabled before you can use SmartPairing on RealPresence Group Series systems.
Because telnet is disabled by default in all Security Profiles, SmartPairing is also disabled by default. The
setting to enable telnet is not configurable when the Security Profile is set to Maximum or High.
Security Profiles and SmartPairing
Security Profile Telnet Setting Default SmartPairing Available?
Maximum / High Disabled, Not Configurable No
Medium / Low Disabled, Configurable Yes. To use SmartPairing, do the

following:
1 Enable telnet. In the system web
interface, go to Admin Settings >
Security > Global Security >
Access and at Enable Telnet
Access, select the checkbox.
2 Send an API command or use the
Configure SmartPairing
You can configure SmartPairing so that users can pair mobile devices to the RealPresence Group Series
system.
Procedure
1. In the RealPresence Group Series system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General
Settings > Pairing > SmartPairing.
198
Enabling Mobile Devices as Controllers
Setting Description
SmartPairing Mode Specifies the method used to pair with the room
system, if SmartPairing is enabled:
• Disabled
• Automatic
• Manual
Signal Volume Specifies the relative signal strength of the

ultrasonic signal within the loudspeaker audio
output signal. The selections are Auto, and levels
are 1 to10.
199
Enabling Content Sharing
Topics:
• Configure Content Sharing

• Adjust Audio Level for Content
• Connecting a Computer
• Configure Monitor 1 as the Content Monitor
• Configure Monitor 2 as the Content Monitor
• Setting Up a Polycom Content Display Application
• Closed Captioning
• Enable VisualBoard Content Sharing
• Prerequisites for the VisualBoard Application
• Configure the Polycom UC Board
• Sharing Content During Calls
• Configuring DVD Player Settings
Configure Content Sharing

You can configure content sharing in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface. For content
to display properly, the system's Monitor 2 must support Progressive mode, and the output resolution
should be set to a Progressive setting, such as 1280x720p or 1920x1080p. Interlaced output for Monitor 2
is not supported. Do not use the resolution setting 1920x1080i.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Video Inputs and select the
input you want to configure for content.
2. For the Display as setting, select Content for the input that will display content.
When you connect a content-sharing device such as a laptop to the input, the content starts
displaying. If the content-sharing device is already connected, you must manually show the
content from the local interface. For more information about sharing content, refer to the Polycom
RealPresence Group Series User Guide .
If default values for other settings in the system have not changed, you are ready to share content
on your system. However, if you disabled the H.239 protocol, you must enable the program for
content sharing by following these steps:
3. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Network > Dialing Preference.
4. Enable H.239.
Note: While in a call, you cannot enable or disable H.239.
200
Adjust Audio Level for Content

You can adjust the audio level for content in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
If the audio level of the call using content sharing needs to be adjusted, follow these steps to change the
level:
• In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Audio > Audio Input.
• Set the Audio Input Level.
Connecting a Computer
You can connect a computer directly to a RealPresence Group Series system. When you do this, other
call participants can see everything that you see on your computer.
When you connect to video and audio from your computer, the audio is muted unless the computer is
selected as a video source.
Refer to your system setup sheet for connection details.
Configure Monitor 1 as the Content Monitor

To use the VisualBoard application on your RealPresence Group Series system's Monitor 1, you must
configure monitor settings on the system web interface. If you are using a touch monitor as Monitor 1, you
can run the VisualBoard application on the monitor and touch the screen to interact with the application.
Some monitors might delay the time between writing and displaying, due to processing within the monitor.
When using the VisualBoard application with a monitor, configure your monitor or projector to use Game
Mode, if that setting is available.
Procedure
2. Under Monitor 1 for the Enable setting, select Manual.
3. For the Monitor Profile setting, select Content, then Far, then Near or Content, then Far.
Configure Monitor 2 as the Content Monitor

The VisualBoard application runs on Monitor 2 by default, but you might want to make configuration
changes to the monitor settings in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface. Some monitors
might delay the time between writing and displaying, due to processing within the monitor. When using
the VisualBoard application with a monitor, configure your monitor or projector to use Game Mode, if that
setting is available.
Procedure
2. To configure monitor 1, go to System > Admin Settings > Monitors.
At Enable, select either Auto or Manual. If you chose Manual, select any of the available profiles,
except Content, then Far, then Near or Content, then Far.
201
3. To configure monitor 2, at Monitor Profile, enable one of the content profiles, such as Content,
then Far, then Near, Content, then Far, Content, then Near, or the Content Only profile.
Setting Up a Polycom Content Display Application

The People+Content IP application enables a presenter to show content from a computer to other sites in
a video conference using only an IP network connection. The presenter can show PowerPoint® slides,
video clips, spreadsheets, or any other type of content from a computer. People+Content IP supports any
computer desktop resolution with color set to 16-bit or higher.
If the system is paired with a RealPresence Touch or a Polycom Touch Control, People+Content IP does
not require installation. After you connect the PC to the USB connection on the device, a version of
People+Content IP launches automatically.
Before a presenter can use a computer to show content with People+Content IP, do the following:
• Download the People+Content IP software application from the Polycom web site to the computer
or computers that the presenter will use to show content.
You don't need to change the computer resolutions and you don't need special cables or hardware,
but each computer must meet these requirements:
◦ Operating System: Windows 7 or 8
◦ Minimum computer: 500 MHz Pentium® III (or equivalent); 256 MB memoryRecommended
computer: 1 GHz Pentium III (or equivalent); 512 MB memory
• Connect the computer or computers to the IP network.
Download and Install Polycom People+Content Technology

You must download and install the Polycom People+Content application on a computer before you can
use it to show content.
Note: If the room system is paired with a Polycom touch device, you don’t need to install the application
onto your computer. After you connect your computer to the touch device over USB, a version of
the People+Content IP application launches automatically.
Procedure
1. On your computer, go to the Polycom People+Content IP support page.
2. Download the People+Content IP application for Mac or PC.
3. Open the zip file and click the application installation.
4. Follow the instructions in the installation wizard.
Closed Captioning
You can provide real-time text transcriptions or language translations of the video conference by
displaying closed captions on your RealPresence Group Series system. The captioner can be present or
listen to the conference audio with a phone or browser.
When the captioner sends a unit of text, all sites see it on the main monitor for 15 seconds until the text
disappears automatically.
202
Closed captions are supported between Polycom systems with software version 4.1.3 or later, including a
system hosting a multipoint call, HDX systems with any software version, and Polycom VSX® systems
with software version 7.0 or later.
Captions are provided in any language that uses the Latin alphabet.
Depending on the system's capabilities, captions can be entered using one of the following methods:
• Remotely through a dial-up connection to the system's serial RS-232 port
• In the room using equipment connected directly to the serial port
• In the room or remotely using the system web interface
Enter Closed Captions on the System Web Interface

Closed captioners can provide captions from inside the conference room, or from a remote location, by
entering the captions directly into the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Utilities > Tools > Closed Caption.
2. Log in using this information if prompted:
User Name: Your user name defined for the video conferencing system.
Password: Meeting password defined for your video conferencing system.
3. In the Closed Caption screen, type the caption text into the text field.
Text wraps to the next line after 32 characters.
4. Press Send to send the text to the sites in the conference.
Enter Closed Captions Using Equipment Connected to a Serial RS-232

Port
Closed captioners can provide captions from inside the conference room, using equipment connected
directly to the serial port of the RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. Ensure that the computer and the system are configured to use the same baud rate and parity
settings.
3. Set the RS-232 mode to Closed Caption.
4. On the computer, start the transcription application.
5. Enter text using the stenographic machine connected to the computer.
6. To stop sending closed captions, close the transcription application.
Dial-Up Connection to the System's RS-232 Serial Port

Closed captioners can provide captions from inside the conference room, or from a remote location, via a
dial-up connection to the serial port of the RealPresence Group Series system.
Ensure that the computer and the system use the same baud rate and parity settings.
203
Procedure
2. Set the RS-232 mode to Closed Caption.
3. Establish a dial-up connection between the computer and the system.
a. Connect a null modem adapter to the RS-232 serial port.
b. Connect an RS-232 cable to the modem and to the null modem adapter.
c. Connect the modem to a phone line.
d. Configure the modem for 8 bits, no parity.
You may need to configure the modem to answer automatically. You may also need to
configure it to ignore DTR signals.
4. On the computer, start the transcription application.
5. Enter text using the stenographic machine connected to the computer.
6. To stop sending closed captions, close the transcription application.
Enable VisualBoard Content Sharing

You must enable the VisualBoard application before you can use it with the RealPresence Group Series
system.
Procedure
1. From the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video/Content > Content.
2. Select Enable VisualBoard, and then select Save.
Prerequisites for the VisualBoard Application

Before you can begin using the VisualBoard application, ensure that you have done the following:
• The touch monitor should be HID compliant with HDMI interface only.
• Installed and configured one of the following: USB mouse or UC Board hardware
• Enabled the VisualBoard setting in the RealPresence Group Series system web interface at Admin
Settings > Audio/Video/Content > Content.
• When setting up the VisualBoard application, note that only one USB storage device can be
connected to one host port, whether it is connected directly or through a hub.
Configure the Polycom UC Board

With the Polycom® UC Board, you can show and annotate content in real-time from RealPresence Group
Series systems by using the stylus and receiver included with the UC Board hardware. You can use either
a second monitor or a whiteboard and projector. For flat, cold surfaces such as white boards with
projectors, Polycom suggests that you use the Polycom UC Board.
Two monitors are required to use the Polycom UC Board. The second monitor can be either a projector
used with a whiteboard, or a monitor.
204
Polycom recommends the following installation tips:

• Use LED backlit, LCD displays instead of CFL LCD displays.
• Do not use plasma backlit displays.
• The UC Board hardware sensor and pen are designed for cold surfaces, such as white boards with
projectors.
• Mount the hardware sensor on the top of the display device. Room lights can interfere with the
sensor when it is mounted on the bottom of the display.
The UC Board sensor supports one stylus at a time. It does not support using two styluses
simultaneously.
For more information on setting up and using the UC Board, refer to the Polycom UC Board Quick Start
Guide, available with the UC Board hardware and at Polycom Support.
To set up two monitors and configure to show content:
1. To configure monitor 1, in the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Audio/Video >
Monitors. At Enable, select either Auto or Manual. If you chose Manual, select any of the
available profiles.
2. To configure monitor 2, at Monitor Profile, enable one of the content profiles.
To improve performance, configure your monitor or projector to use Game Mode, if that setting is
available.
Sharing Content During Calls

You can present content during calls when you use sources such as the following:
• A DVD player connected directly to a video input on a system
• People+Content IP installed on a computer, with any system
• A computer connected directly to a system or a Polycom touch device
• A USB drive connected to a Polycom touch device, such as the RealPresence Touch
RealPresence Group Series systems achieve maximum content frame rate of 30 fps for 1080p with a
1080p Resolution option key installed, and 60 fps for 720p. If you use Content as the Quality
Preference in your network IP settings, you can achieve a content frame rate of 60 fps for 1080p with the
1080p Resolution option key installed.
For more information about sharing content during a call, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group
Series User Guide .
Configuring DVD Player Settings

To play content from a DVD, do the following for your RealPresence Group Series system type:
• With a RealPresence Group 310 or a RealPresence Group 500 system, you can connect a DVD
player to an HDMI or VGA input to play content.
• With a RealPresence Group 700 system, you can also connect a DVD player to the system's video
input to play DVDs in calls.
• Using a DVD player with a RealPresence Group 300 system is not supported.
205
Adjust DVD Audio Settings for Content

DVD inputs are active when you select the camera source configured as DVD. This means that both the
audio and video inputs are active—you cannot select one or the other. Because the microphone inputs
remain active while the DVD player is playing, call participants might want to mute the microphones while
playing DVDs. You can configure DVD audio settings in the RealPresence Group Series system web
interface.
Procedure
Input.
2. Set Line In Level for playback volume of the DVD player relative to other audio from the system.
Enable DVD Audio Out Always On unless you have the DVD inputs and outputs both connected
to the same device to play and record.
206
Configuring Call Recording
Topics:
• Polycom RealPresence Media Suite Recording

• Configure Monitor Settings for Recording on a RealPresence Group 700 System
Polycom RealPresence Media Suite Recording

Users can use Polycom® Media Suite solution to record calls directly from the RealPresence Group
Series system, remotely log in to Polycom RealPresence Media Suite to record or live stream calls. On
the RealPresence Group 700 system, you can record calls on Monitor 3.
RealPresence Media Suite is an enterprise recording, streaming and video content management solution
that offers users and administrators a self-service user portal to record calls on their systems.
Enable Recording Controls

You can use a system to record the audio and video of a call.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Recording Service.
2. At Enable RealPresence Media Suite, select the checkbox.
3. Enter the connection information in the following settings.
Setting Description
Domain Name Enter the server domain name for RealPresence

Media Suite.
User Name Enter the server user name for RealPresence

Media Suite.
Password Enter the server password for RealPresence Media

Suite.
Server Address Enter the IP address for the RealPresence Media

Suite server.
4. Click Save to save the connection settings.
Recording Calls Remotely

From RealPresence Media Suite's User Portal, any user can start recording, create a live stream event,
and share video files. The Polycom RealPresence Media Suite is also a streaming and recording system
that participates in standards-based video and telepresence calls.
207
The RealPresence Media Suite solution allows users to record and live stream a call by dialing into a
RealPresence Group Series system from a RealPresence Media Suite portal. If users have access to a
RealPresence Media Suite portal, they can log in to the portal to dial in to a system from which they want
to record a call. This method is also ideal for an administrator of a remote system. For information about
using this method, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Media Suite, Appliance Edition User Guide or
Polycom RealPresence Media Suite, Virtual Edition User Guide at support.polycom.com.
Users can also remotely record calls in the following ways:
• Dial RealPresence Media Suite directly: Use the default recording settings defined by a
RealPresence Media Suite administrator. Before recording a call using this method, users must
obtain the IP address, H.323 extension, or SIP URL of the RealPresence Media Suite.
• Dial a RealPresence Media Suite Video Recording Room (VRR): A VRR is a virtual capture
server with a specific recording profile that is defined by a RealPresence Media Suite administrator.
Before recording a call using this method, users must obtain the VRR number and the IP address,
H.323 ID, or SIP address of the RealPresence Media Suite.
When a recording is initiated remotely from the RealPresence Media Suite user portal, users cannot
control the recording from the system.
For more information on recording with these two methods, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group
Series User Guide .
If you have access to a RealPresence Media Suite portal, you can use additional features, such as
copying the URL for a recording to share with others. For more features, see the Polycom RealPresence
Media Suite User Guide at support.polycom.com.
The following connection methods are supported for dialing a RealPresence Media Suite.
Media Suite Type Connection Method Example
Media Suite system If the both the video conferencing 10.11.12.13

system and the RealPresence
Media Suite system are not
registered to the gatekeeper or to a
SIP server, dial the RealPresence
Media Suite IP address.
If both the video conferencing 1234

Media Suite system are registered
to a gatekeeper, dial the
RealPresence Media Suite E.164
extension for H.323.
If both the video conferencing CS123

Media Suite system are registered
to a SIP server, dial the
RealPresence Media Suite SIP
address.
208
Media Suite Type Connection Method Example
VRR For SIP calls: If the RealPresence Media Suite IP

is 11.12.13.14 and the VRR number
[VRR number]@[RealPresence
is 4096,dial 11.12.13.14##4096.
Media Suite IP] or [SIP peer prefix]
[VRR number] If the SIP peer prefix of the
RealPresence Media Suite is 8888
and the VRR number is 4096, dial
88884096.
For H.323 calls: If the RealPresence Media Suite IP

is 11.12.13.14 and the VRR number
[RealPresence Media Suite
is 4096,dial 11.12.13.14##4096.
IP]##[VRR number] or
[RealPresence Media Suite E.164 If the RealPresence Media Suite E.
prefix][VRR number] 164 prefix is 8888 and the VRR
number is 4096, dial 88884096.
Configure Monitor Settings for Recording on a

RealPresence Group 700 System
You can configure monitor settings for recording on a RealPresence Group 700 system.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, select Admin Settings > Audio/Video > Monitors.
2. Select one of the following settings for Monitor 3:
• Record Mode with Content. Select this setting to record what the speaker says, along with
any content audio. This records near, far, and content audio.
• Record Mode. Select this setting to record only what the speaker says. This records near,
far, and content audio.
209
Customizing the Local Interface
Topics:
• Change the Background Image on the Home Screen

• Change the Startup Image on the Home Screen
• Set Up the Address Bar
These topics describe how to configure your system by using the configuration screens on the local
interface. If you are in the room with the system, you can navigate the screens and enter information by
using the remote control and the onscreen keyboard. When you reach a text field, press the Select button
on the remote control to display the onscreen keyboard. Note that the onscreen keyboard is automatically
displayed when you reach the System Name field in the setup wizard.
Be aware that only those configuration screens needed to get the system connected are included in the
local interface. Most of the administrative settings are available only in the system web interface.
In the system's local interface, go to > Settings > Administration. The local interface has a subset of
the administration settings that are available in the system web interface.
When a RealPresence Group Series system is paired with a Polycom Touch Control, the following
statements are true:
• You can change the system's configuration using the system web interface only.
• During pairing, when prompted to enter the Admin ID and Admin Password, but no Admin password
has been configured, you must submit a blank password.
If you enable a provisioning service, any settings provisioned by the RealPresence Resource Manager
system might be displayed as read-only settings in the system web interface Admin Settings. For more
information about automatic provisioning, refer to the RealPresence Resource Manager system
documentation at support.polycom.com.
Change the Background Image on the Home Screen

You can upload a custom image to display as the background of all monitors for a multi-screen system or
on the main monitor of a single RealPresence Group Series system. The image must have a pixel size of
1920 x 1080 (width by height) in a .jpg file format, and a file size less than 5 MB.
Procedure
Settings > Background.
2. Browse to the desired image file and click Choose File > Upload.
The custom image displays on the main monitor or monitors.
Related Links
Change the Background Image on page 227
210
Change the Startup Image on the Home Screen

The system local interface displays a default background image when the RealPresence Group Series
system first powers on. You cannot delete this image, but you can upload your own image to replace it.
When you change the image in the system web interface, the new image also appears on the
RealPresence Touch device.
You must upload an image with pixel size of 1920 x 1080 (width by height) in a .jpg file format.
Procedure
Settings > Startup Background.
2. Click Choose File to search for and select the image you want to upload.
3. When the image name appears next to Choose File, click Upload.
Set Up the Address Bar

You can customize what displays in the address bar of the RealPresence Group Series system’s local
interface Home screen.
The system local interface displays an address bar at the bottom of the Home screen. The address bar
can contain the following information:
• None
• IP Address
• H.323 Extension
• SIP Address
• Pairing Code
Procedure
Settings > Address Bar.
Setting Description
Address Bar (Left Element) Allows you to select which element you want
displayed on the left side of the address bar on the
local interface. The choices are:
• None
• IP Address
• 323 Extension
• Pairing Code
211
Setting Description
Address Bar (Right Element) Allows you to select which element you want
displayed on the right side of the address bar on
the local interface. The choices are:
• None
• SIP Address
• 323 Extension
• Pairing Code
212
Calling
Topics:
• Call a Favorite Contact

• Call a Speed Dial Contact
• Call a Recent Call Contact
• Place a Call
• Searching Directory Contacts to Call
• Browse Global Contact Entries to Call
• Place a Cascaded Call
• Placing an Audio-Only Call
• Large Conference
Call a Favorite Contact

In the RealPresence Group Series system web interface, at Place a Call, you can call a favorite contact.
Procedure
1. In the Contacts section, enter a name and click Search.
2. Select a contact name and click Call.
Related Links
Managing Favorites Contacts and Groups on page 134
Call a Speed Dial Contact

In the RealPresence Group Series system web interface on the Place a Call screen, you can call Speed
Dial contacts and can edit the Speed Dial contact list. After you have enabled Speed Dial, users can use
it as a shortcut for calling a contact.
Procedure
» In the Speed Dial section, select a contact from the list and click Call.
To place a call within your company's telephone system, enter the internal extension instead of the
full number.
Related Links
Remove Speed Dial Contacts on page 138
213
Calling
Call a Recent Call Contact

On the RealPresence Group Series system web interface Place a Call screen, you can place calls to
Recent Call contacts.
Procedure
» In the system web interface Place a Call screen's Recent Calls section, do one of the following:
• Find an entry and click the Call link next to the entry.
• Click More to view a list of calls with more details, then select an entry and click Call.
Place a Call
You can manually dial calls from the Dashboard or Place a Call page.
Procedure
1. Click Manual Dial.
2. Enter the number.
3. Click Call.
The call is placed according to the default settings you selected in Admin Settings > Network >
Dialing Preferences. You can select settings other than the defaults in the two lists below the text
entry field.
4. To require a password, select Meeting Password and enter a password in the field that displays
below the check box.
Searching Directory Contacts to Call

Directory contacts are called “global contact entries” in the RealPresence Group Series system local
interface. These global contact entries are assigned to a default global Favorites group named Global
Entry. The global directory contains address book entries downloaded from an enabled global directory
server.
You can search the global directory to return a list of all global directory entries that match your search
criteria, then select contacts in the global directory to call. Up to 200 search results can be displayed at a
time from a Polycom Global Directory Service (GDS) or Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP)
global directory.
To browse LDAP global directory entries, LDAP must be enabled through Polycom RealPresence
Resource Manager. If LDAP is not enabled through RealPresence Resource Manager, you can still
search the global directory, but you cannot browse the global directory.
Browse Global Contact Entries to Call

You can browse the global contact entries to call in the global directory in the RealPresence Group Series
214
Calling
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, select Place a Call > Contacts.
2. At Search, enter a contact name and click Search.
3. Select Call to place a call or select an entry to view the contact's information.
Place a Cascaded Call

From your RealPresence Group Series system, you can include multiple sites in a cascaded call if the
sites you call have internal multipoint capability.
The following diagram shows a cascaded call with multiple sites.
Keep the following points in mind regarding cascaded calls:

• H.239 is not supported in cascaded calls.
• Cascaded multipoint is not supported in SIP calls.
• HD and SD multipoint are not supported when the system hosts a cascaded call.
• You cannot change the near-end layout.
• The encryption padlock icon might not accurately indicate whether a cascaded call is encrypted.
• You cannot call a group of contacts by using Speed Dial or Favorites to call the group.
• You cannot place group calls on RealPresence Group 300 or 310 systems. They can participate
either dialing into a system hosting one or being called by the hosting system.
Procedure
1. Create and call a group in the directory, or place calls one at a time to several other sites.
2. Ask each far site to call additional sites.
Along with these additional sites, each far site in the original multipoint call can add one audio-only
connection.
215
Calling
Placing an Audio-Only Call

You can now place SIP or H.323 audio-only calls on RealPresence Group Series systems through the
system web interface, the local interface, a RealPresence Touch device, API, or a Polycom® IP 7000
conference phone. Keep the following in mind when placing audio-only calls:
• If you start a conference with a SIP audio-only call, you cannot add an audio or video call to the
conference. To add other calls with SIP audio calls, first start with a video participant, then add SIP
audio calls.
• You cannot view video or share content as an audio-only participant during a conference call.
• Audio calls are supported when the Enable Audio-only Calls setting is enabled or when the
system is paired to a Polycom SoundStation IP 7000.
For information on placing audio-only calls on the local interface, refer to the Polycom RealPresence
Group Series User Guide .
Large Conference
You can provision RealPresence Group Series systems to join large conference AVMCU and Skype for
Business meetings.
RealPresence Group Series has the ability to join large conference meeting with up to 250 participants in
a call. Large conference meetings with participant count above 250 are supported with minor limitations.
RealPresence Group Series system behavior in large conference meetings
RealPresence Group Normal Meetings Normal Meetings Large Meetings

Series Role
Less than 75 75 to 250 Participants More than 250
Presenter / Attendee Participants Participants
Roster Full Roster List No Roster List No Roster List
Video View Gallery View Gallery View Gallery View
Video/Audio/Content All participants All participants For 250 participants

( Presenter + Attendee) +
Next 25 participants can
receive, but cannot share
Video and Content.
216
Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence
Touch Device
Topics:
• Positioning the RealPresence Touch Device

• Run the RealPresence Touch Device Setup Wizard (OOB)
• Power Off the RealPresence Touch
• Wake the RealPresence Touch
• Enable the RealPresence Touch Device
• Set the Language
• Pairing the Device
• Managing the RealPresence Touch Device
• Security Certificates for RealPresence Touch
• Customize the RealPresence Touch Screens
• Setting Up and Configuring Directory Servers for the RealPresence Touch
• Enable Microsoft Skype Mode for RealPresence Touch
• Enable Skype for Business Mode
• Disable Skype for Business Mode
• Updating Software
• Troubleshooting the RealPresence Touch Device
Positioning the RealPresence Touch Device

Ensure that the RealPresence Touch is conveniently located for use during a meeting, such as on a
conference table, so that systems can be controlled by the Polycom RealPresence Touch device. Place
the device in a location where you can easily touch the screen and see the RealPresence Group Series
system monitor displays. The RealPresence Touch device can be positioned horizontally at either a 30
degree or 65 degree viewing angle.
Run the RealPresence Touch Device Setup Wizard

(OOB)
Before you can pair the RealPresence Touch device to a RealPresence Group Series system, you must
set up the hardware and use the set up wizard.
217
Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device
Procedure
1. Ensure that you have completed the setup wizard on the system.
The setup wizard allows you to set an Admin ID and password, where you can limit access to the
Admin Settings. The default Admin ID is admin and the default admin password is the 14-digit
system serial number on the Settings > System Information > Information > System Detail
screen in the local interface or on the back of the system. You can also enable EAP / 802.1
authentication by providing the identity and password.
2. Connect the Ethernet cable to the RealPresence Touch.
3. Plug the Ethernet cable into the wall outlet:
• If your room provides Power Over Ethernet, you can connect the Ethernet cable directly to a
LAN outlet.
• If your room does not provide Power Over Ethernet, you must connect the Ethernet cable to
the power supply adapter. Then connect the power supply adapter to a LAN outlet and
power outlet.The RealPresence Touch powers on and displays the language selection
screen.
4. Choose your language and follow the onscreen instructions.
5. After the RealPresence Touch connects to the network, enter the system IP address at Device
Address, then enter the Admin ID and Password.
6. Tap Pair.
Power Off the RealPresence Touch

If you need to move your RealPresence Touch device to another area, power off the device before you
disconnect the Ethernet cable.
Procedure
1. On any screen, tap Menu, Settings, and then Administration.
2. Sign in using your Admin ID and password.
3. Scroll down to Power and Pairing.
4. Touch RealPresence Touch Power until a Shutting down... message displays.
The RealPresence Touch is powered off.
Wake the RealPresence Touch

The RealPresence Touch goes to sleep after two minutes of inactivity. To wake it, you can touch the
screen.
Procedure
» Touch the screen.
The last screen that was displayed before the sleep state is displayed.
218
Enable the RealPresence Touch Device

Before your users can control the system with the RealPresence Touch device, you must enable the
device on the RealPresence Group Series system's web interface. Once the device is enabled, you can
pair it to the system.
Procedure
1. On the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > Polycom
Touch Device.
2. Select the Enable Polycom Touch Device check box and click Save.
Note that only one device can be paired to a system at a time.
Set the Language

Your selected language displays on the RealPresence Touch device until you pair it with a Polycom
RealPresence Group Series system. After you pair it with the RealPresence Group Series system, the
RealPresence Touch device uses the RealPresence Group Series system's language setting.
Procedure
1. Go to Menu > Settings > Administration.
2. Enter the Admin ID and Password if required.
3. Select Language and select language.
4. Click Save.
The selected language updates on the RealPresence Touch device.
Pairing the Device

When you configure the RealPresence Touch to pair with a particular RealPresence Group Series
system, the RealPresence Touch makes an IP connection to the room system. If the connection is lost,
the RealPresence Touch automatically attempts to restore the connection.
After you have completed RealPresence Touch setup, you can pair to a different system using
RealPresence Touch settings.
Pairing States
The following table describes the pairing and connection states:
State Description
Unpaired The RealPresence Touch is not associated with a

system.
219
State Description
Paired and Connected The RealPresence Touch is associated with a system

through the pairing process. This is normal operating
mode. A RealPresence Touch can be connected to only
one system at a time.
Paired and Disconnected The RealPresence Touch is associated with a system,

but communication is disrupted, usually because of a
system power off or LAN issue. Communication is
automatically restored when a system and the touch
device are successfully connected to the LAN.
Pair For the First Time

To pair your RealPresence Touch with a RealPresence Group Series system that has not been paired
before, you must enter the system's credentials before connection can be established.
Procedure
1. After completing the out-of-box (OOB) setup wizard, the RealPresence Touch displays the pairing
screen.
2. Tap the Manually Pair tab.
3. Enter the IP Address, Admin ID, and Password for the system.
4. Tap Pair.
The pairing connection begins, and the Home screen displays when the pairing is successful.
Pair to a Previously Paired System

If you have paired with a RealPresence Group Series system before, you can select it from a previously
paired list of systems. You do not have to enter the system credentials again, unless the credentials have
changed.
Procedure
1. On the Home screen, tap Menu, Settings, then Administration.
2. Sign in using your admin ID and password.
3. Scroll down to Power and Pairing and tap UNPAIR AND RETURN TO PAIRING SCREEN.
4. On the Recently Paired tab, tap the system that you want to pair with.
If you unpair from the system, any current calls on the system are still active. To hang up the calls,
repair to the room system and select More Options, then Participants, More Options, and
Remove or Remove All.
After the room system and the RealPresence Touch are paired, the system web interface and the
RealPresence Touch interface display information about each other and about their connection status.
Unpair a RealPresence Touch

You can unpair the RealPresence Touch and a RealPresence Group Series system.
220
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > Polycom
Touch Device.
2. Clear the check box next to Enable Polycom Touch Device.
3. Click Save.
The system cannot pair with any touch device while the Enable Polycom Touch Device check
box is cleared.
Remove a System from the Paired System List

After attempting to pair a device, a “Cannot Pair as a Dedicated Device” message might be displayed.
This means that another device is already paired to the same RealPresence Group Series system. An
administrator can determine which device is paired and can unpair the device using the system web
interface.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > Polycom
Touch Device.
2. Click Forget this Device.
3. Click Save.
Now you can pair another system.
Managing the RealPresence Touch Device

You can remotely manage certain features of your RealPresence Touch when it is paired to a
RealPresence Group Series . For a list of supported browsers, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group
Series Release Notes .
You can manage the following features remotely:
• Download Logs: Downloads the RealPresence Touch logs to the location specified in the device.
• Network Settings: Specifies whether the system acquires an IP address automatically or manually.
With the manual method, the other settings that are available from the RealPresence Touch
become available on the web.
• Pair: Pairs and unpairs from systems. Before you can connect to or pair with a device, you must
know the device's IP Address and the User Name and password used to connect.
• Security: System security allows configuration of the following settings :
◦ Changes the admin ID and password of the RealPresence Touch.
◦ Provision to disable the TLS v1.0.
• Software Updates: Updates the RealPresence Touch software. You can update from the default
Polycom server or your own server by entering the appropriate IP address.
• View RealPresence Touch Screens: Shows the screen currently being displayed on the
RealPresence Touch. You can click Refresh at any time to see if the screen has changed.
221
Disable TLS
You can disable TLS v1.0 or v1.1 on your RealPresence Touch web user interface or embedded interface.
TLS v1.0 is enabled by default for the system.
Procedure
1. In the RealPresence Touch web interface, go to Security > Encryption.
2. Select a TLS version to disable.
3. Click Save.
Open a Remote Management Window

You can open a remote management window for your RealPresence Touch in a RealPresence Group
Series system web browser.
Procedure
1. In a web browser, enter the IP address of the RealPresence Touch device.
2. In the login window, enter the ID and Password you use to access the administrative features of
the RealPresence Touch.
You can access the remote management features by using the Navigation menu or the
Dashboard. To return to the Dashboard, click the Home icon.
Pair Using RealPresence Touch Web Interface

To pair your RealPresence Touch with a RealPresence Group Series system, you must enter the system's
credentials before connection can be established.
Procedure
1. In the RealPresence Touch web interface, click Pairing.
2. At Device, select RealPresence Group Series .
3. Enter the IP Address or Host Name, User Name, and Password for the system.
4. Click Pair.
Unpair Using the RealPresence Touch Web Interface

You can unpair the RealPresence Touch and a RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. In the RealPresence Touch web interface, click Pairing.
2. Click Unpair.
Change the RealPresence Touch User Name and Password

You can change the security credentials for the RealPresence Touch device.
Procedure
1. In the RealPresence Touch web interface, click Security.
222
2. At Admin ID, enter your admin ID.

3. At Current Password, enter the current password.
4. At Password, enter the new password.
5. At Confirm Password, reenter the new password.
6. Click Save.
Configure Network Settings

The RealPresence Touch device has a separate admin settings that allow administrators to configure
network and security settings on the device.
Procedure
1. From the Home screen on the device, touch Administration.
2. Tap Network Settings.
Set IP Address Specifies how the RealPresence Touch device

obtains an IP address.
• Obtain IP address automatically. Select if the
device gets an IP address from the DHCP
server on the LAN.
• Enter IP address manually. Select if the IP
address is not automatically assigned.
IP Address Displays the IP address currently assigned to the

device, if it obtains the IP address automatically. If
you select Enter IP address manually, enter the
IP address here.

device. If you selected Enter IP address
manually, enter the subnet mask here.

device. If you selected Enter IP address
manually, enter the gateway IP address here.
223
DNS Servers Displays the DNS servers assigned to the device.

You can specify IPv4 DNS server addresses only
when the IPv4 address is entered manually. When
the IPv4 address is obtained automatically, the
DNS server addresses are also obtained
automatically.
• Server 1: If the RealPresence Touch device
does not automatically obtain a DNS server
address, add a DNS server address here.
• Server 2: If the RealPresence Touch device
does not automatically obtain a DNS server
address, add a DNS server address here.
VLAN Specifies the identification of the Virtual LAN. This

setting is available only when 802.1p/Q is enabled.
The value can be any number from 1 to 4094.
LAN Speed Specifies whether to use 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps for

the LAN speed of the RealPresence Touch
controller. This setting is auto-negotiated and read-
only.
To change the Autonegotiation setting, in the
RealPresence Group Series system web interface,
go to Admin Settings > Network > LAN
Properties > LAN Options. Select or clear the
Autonegotiation checkbox.
Duplex Mode Choose the Duplex mode that is supported by the

switch, either Full or Half. This setting is auto-
negotiated and read-only.
To change the Autonegotiation setting, use the
RealPresence Group Series system web interface,
and go to Admin Settings > Network > LAN
Properties > LAN Options. Select or clear the
Autonegotiation checkbox.
Enable EAP/802.1X Specifies whether EAP/802.1X network access is

enabled. The following authentication protocols are
(under EAP 802.1X in the system local interface)
supported:
• EAP-MD5
• EAP-PEAPv0 (MSCHAPv2)
• EAP-TTLS
• EAP-TLS
EAP/802.1X Identity Specifies the system's identity used for 802.1X

authentication. This setting is available only when
(under EAP 802.1X in local interface)
EAP/802.1X is enabled. The field cannot be blank
224
EAP/802.1X Password Specifies the system's password used for 802.1X

authentication. This setting is required when EAP-
(under EAP 802.1X in local interface)
MD5, EAP-PEAPv0, or EAP-TTLS is used.
Enable Recent Calls and Speed Dial

You can enable the recent calls and speed dial icons in the RealPresence Group Series system web
interface.
• Recent Calls: In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > System
Settings > Recent Calls. Select the Enable Recent Calls checkbox.
• Speed Dial: In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Home
Screen Settings > Speed Dial. Select the Enable Speed Dial checkbox.
Security Certificates for RealPresence Touch

If your organization has deployed a public key infrastructure (PKI) for securing connections between
devices on your network, Polycom recommends that you have a strong understanding of certificate
management and how it applies to your RealPresence Touch device before you integrate these products
with the PKI.
Systems can use certificates to authenticate network connections to and from the system. The system
uses configuration and management techniques typical of PKI to manage certificates, certificate signing
requests, and revocation checking. ANSI X.509 standards regulate the characteristics of certificates and
revocation.
Note: For more information on Certificate settings, refer Security Certificates in RealPresence Group
Series Administrator Guide.
Related Links
Customize the RealPresence Touch Screens

You can use the RealPresence Group Series system web interface to configure how information is
displayed on the Home screen of the RealPresence Touch device. These settings are included in the
System settings profile, and included in bundled provisioning when using RealPresence Resource
Manager.
225
You can configure the RealPresence Touch home screen in the system web interface.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing >
RealPresence Touch Home Screen Configuration.
2. Configure the settings on the Home Screen Settings screen that are described in the following
topics.
Choose the Home Screen Icons

You can choose home screen icons for your RealPresence Group Series system local interface. By
default, two icon buttons appear in the lower center of the RealPresence Touch Home screen; users see
only the Place a Call and Show Content icons. However, you can customize the number of screens and
Home screen icons in a preferred order. Once you customize the Home screen configuration, users can
scroll through one to three Home Screens, with up to three icons on each screen.
Procedure
1. In the web user interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing > RealPresence
Touch Home Screen Configuration.
2. Under Configure Home Screen, click Configure Home Screen Options.
3. At Home screen 1 > Button 1, select one to three icon buttons to appear per screen in your
preferred order.
You can select from the following icon buttons:
• None (no icon)
• Place a Call
• Show Content
• Keypad
• Contacts
• Speed Dial
• Recent
• System Information
• User Settings
• Administration
4. If you want to include more than one Home screen, continue selecting icon buttons for Home
Screen 2 and Home Screen 3 until all screens are configured.
For example, Home Screen 1 > Button 1 > Recent Call Button 2 > Place a Call > Button 3 >
Contacts.
5. To save your selections, click Save.
Your new selections should display on the Home screens of the RealPresence Touch device.
Choose the Place a Call Screen Icons

You can customize the Place a Call screen to display certain icon buttons for your RealPresence Group
Series system. Since there are four ways to place a call by default, after you tap the Place a Call button,
all the selections display on the screen. You can customize one of the icon buttons to be the default. All of
the other Place a Call icon buttons continue to display at the top of the screen.
226
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Pairing >
RealPresence Touch Home Screen Configuration.
2. Under Configure Home Screen, click Place A Call Screen.
3. Under Select Preferred Sub Menu, choose from the following:
• Keypad
• Contacts
• Recent Calls
• Speed Dials
4. Click Save.
Your new selections should display on the RealPresence Touch Place a Call screen.
To revert back to the default icons, at Configure Home Screen, select Default Configuration,
and click Save.
Change the Background Image

The RealPresence Touch device allows you to upload a custom background image that is separate from
the RealPresence Group Series system monitor background. If a custom image is not loaded, the image
from the primary system screen displays as the RealPresence Touch device background when it is paired
with the system (default behavior). To create a custom background on the RealPresence Touch, you must
upload an image with pixel size of 1920 x 1080 (width by height) in a .jpg file format that is less than 5
MB.
Procedure
Settings > RealPresence Touch Background.
2. Browse to the desired image file and click Choose File > Upload.
The custom image displays paired RealPresence Touch Home screen.
Related Links
Change the Background Image on the Home Screen on page 210
Setting Up and Configuring Directory Servers for the

RealPresence Touch
The global directory provides a list of other systems that are registered with the Global Directory Server
and available for calls.
The other systems appear in the directory, allowing users to place calls to other users by selecting their
names.
Set Up Directory Servers for the RealPresence Touch

You can use the RealPresence Touch device to set up directory servers.
Procedure
1. In the RealPresence Touch web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > Directory Servers.
227
Directory Servers Authentication Global Directory Entry Calling

Supported Protocols Groups Information
Microsoft NTLM v2 only Contact groups but not Might include:

distribution lists
Skype for Business • SIP address (SIP
Server 2015 URI)
LDAP Any of the following: Not Supported Might include:

with H.350 or Active • NTLM v2 only • 323 IP address (raw
Directory IPv4 address, DNS
• Basic
name, H.323 dialed
• Anonymous digits, H.323 ID, or
H.323 extension)
• SIP address (SIP
URI)
• ISDN number
• Phone number*
Polycom GDS Proprietary Not Supported Might include:

• 323 IP address (raw
IPv4 address, DNS
name, or H.323
extension)
• ISDN number
* To successfully call a phone number from the LDAP directory, the phone number must be stored in one
of the following formats:
You can configure the system to use the following directory server when the system is
automatically provisioned by a RealPresence Resource Manager system.
Directory Servers Authentication Global Directory Entry Calling

Supported Protocol Groups Information
Skype for Business NTLM v2 only Contact groups but not Might include:
Server 2015 distribution lists
• SIP address (SIP
URI)
* To successfully call a phone number from the LDAP directory, the phone number must be stored in one
of the following formats:
228
Related Links
Configure the Skype for Business Directory Server on page 48
Enable Microsoft Skype Mode for RealPresence Touch

After the RealPresence Group Series system is registered with the Skype for Business Server online or
on-premises, you can enable Skype mode for the system to provide a consistent environment for all
Office 365 products in your deployment. When the system is signed into Skype for Business Online,
Skype mode is required and enabled automatically, and users can control the system only with the
RealPresence Touch device. You cannot disable Skype Mode in Skype for Business Online deployments.
In Skype mode, the system local interface has limited operations; refer to the Polycom RealPresence
Group Series Release Notes for a limitations list.
Procedure
Settings > Skype Mode.
2. Select Enable Skype mode.
3. Click Save.
For information on using the Skype Mode user interface, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Touch in
Skype Mode Quick Tips or the Polycom RealPresence Group Series User Guide at support.polycom.com.
Note: During a Skype for Business conference call from the RealPresence Group Series system, the
participant details screen displays when you try to disconnect the call by remote control. If a
RealPresence Touch device is paired with the RealPresence Group Series system, the remote
control will not respond and call ends directly when you press the end button on the
RealPresence Touch.
Enable Skype for Business Mode

After the Polycom® RealPresence® Group Series system is registered with the Skype for Business Server
Online or On-premises, you can enable Skype mode.
When the Polycom® RealPresence® Group Series system is signed into Skype for Business Online,
Skype mode is required and enabled automatically, and users can control the Polycom® RealPresence®
Group Series system with the RealPresence Touch device. You cannot disable Skype Mode in Skype for
Business Online deployments.
Procedure
1. In the Polycom® RealPresence® Group Series system web interface, go to Admin Settings >
General Settings > Home Screen Settings > Skype Mode.
2. Select Enable Skype mode.
3. Click Save.
229
Disable Skype for Business Mode

You can disable Skype mode in the Polycom® RealPresence® Group Series system web interface. You
cannot disable Skype Mode in Skype for Business Online deployments. To disable Skype for Business
mode:
Procedure
1. In the Polycom® RealPresence® Group Series web interface, go to Admin Settings > General
Settings > Home Screen Settings > Skype Mode.
2. Select Disable Skype mode
3. Click Save.
Updating Software
The RealPresence Touch must run a software version that is compatible with the software version on the
The RealPresence Touch, after pairing with the system, verifies the compatibility of the RealPresence
Touch panel and operating system software and requests a software update.
For additional details on software compatibility, refer to the appropriate version of the release notes
available at Polycom Support.
If you need to update your system at the same time you update the Polycom touch device, update the
system software first.
Update files for the RealPresence Touch are located on the Polycom support server. You can store the
update files on a USB device, RealPresence Resource Manager system, or on your own web server. No
license number or key is needed to update the RealPresence Touch.
You can configure the Polycom touch device to get software updates using any of the following methods:
• A Polycom RealPresence Resource Manager system
• A server on your network
• The online software server hosted by Polycom
• A USB 2.0 storage device in FAT32 format that you connect to the side of the device
Dynamic Polycom Touch Device Software Updates

You can post software for a Polycom touch device on a RealPresence Resource Manager system. Then,
configure the device to get updates from the applicable RealPresence Group Series system by entering
the Production URL or Trial URL on the device Software Update screen.
When using a RealPresence Resource Manager system to automatically update the software for a
system with an associated Polycom touch device, use the same management server for the touch device
updates. This helps you control the version of software installed on the touch device.
When a Polycom touch device is connected to a provisioned system, a RealPresence Resource Manager
can receive status updates from and provide software updates to the touch device. For supported
RealPresence Resource Manager versions, go to http://support.polycom.com/PolycomService/support/us/
support/service_policies.html and click Current Interoperability Matrix.
230
For information about configuring production and trial versions of software update packages, refer to the
Polycom RealPresence Resource Manager System Operations Guide available at support.polycom.com.
Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site

You can post software to your web server and then configure the RealPresence Touch device to receive
updates.
Procedure
1. Make sure that your server enables clients to download files with the following extensions or with
no extension:
• .tar.gz
• .txt
• .sig
• .plcm
2. Define a URL on your server that the RealPresence Touch can use for software updates, and
create a corresponding root directory to it.
3. Go to support.polycom.com, and navigate to the page for the system that you use with the
RealPresence Touch.
4. Save and extract the RealPresence Touch operating system software package (.tar file) from the
Polycom website to the root directory of the web server.
Managing Polycom Touch Device Software on Your Server

When checking for software updates on your server, Polycom touch devices check only for what is
referred to as the “current” release of the RealPresence Group Series system software. By default, the
current release is the software distribution package that was most recently extracted on your server.
Over time, you might extract other versions of the software on your server, resetting the current release
with every extraction. In addition, you could accumulate multiple versions of the same software.
Each software distribution package contains two commands that you can use to maintain all of the
software extracted on your server.
• The setcurel command sets a specific version of software as the current release.
• The removerel command removes a specific version of a software release from your server.
Set a Software Version as Current

Use the setcurrel command to set a specific version of RealPresence Touch software as the current
release on your server.
Procedure
1. Run the setcurrel command with X.X.X-XXX as the software version you want to set as the
current release:
• Unix or Linux: <root dir>/vega/platform/setcurrel.sh X.X.X-XXX
• Windows: <root dir>\vega/platform/setcurrel.bat X.X.X-XXX
2. Follow the onscreen instructions for setting the current release.
231
Remove a RealPresence Touch Software Version

Use the removerel command to remove a specific version of a RealPresence Touch software release
from your server.
Procedure
1. Run the removerel command with X.X.X-XXX as the software version you want to set remove
from the server:
• Unix or Linux: <root dir>/vega/platform/setcurrel.sh X.X.X-XXX
• Windows: <root dir>\vega/platform/setcurrel.bat X.X.X-XXX
Update Software from the Web Interface

Using the RealPresence Touch device web interface, you can update the device software from the
Polycom server or your own server.
Procedure
1. Open a supported browser.
2. Configure the browser to allow cookies.
3. In the browser address line, enter the IP address of your RealPresence Touch device using the
format http://IPaddress (for example, http://10.11.12.13).
4. Enter the Admin ID as the user name (default is admin), and then enter the Admin remote access
password.
The default password is the RealPresence Touch serial number.
The first time you open the device web interface each day, and after you select any of the interface
options, you might need to enter a user name and password.
5. On the device's Home Page, click Software Update.
6. Enter the server address for the update.
The default server address, polycom, is the address for the Polycom public soft-update repository
and has the latest released software version available.
7. Click Save.
8. Click Check for Software Updates.
9. Click Download and Install Software.
Download progress displays during installation.
Update Software from the Local Interface

Using the RealPresence Touch interface, you can update the RealPresence Touch software from the
Polycom server or your own server.
Procedure
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration and then touch Software Update.
2. Enter the path and address of the update site where you posted the RealPresence Touch software
in the in the Server Address field.
To use the Polycom server, enter polycom.
232
3. Touch Check for Software Updates.

4. Touch Download and Install Software.
Update RealPresence Touch Software from a USB Storage Device

You can update the RealPresence Touch quickly using a USB storage device without updating the
RealPresence Touch factory restore partition.
Procedure
1. Open a browser and navigate to support.polycom.com.
2. Under Documents and Downloads, select Telepresence and Video.
3. Navigate to the page for the system that you use with the RealPresence Touch.
4. Save the RealPresence Touch operating system software package (.tar) file from the Polycom
website to the root directory of the USB device.
5. Ensure the RealPresence Touch Ethernet cord is connected and the RealPresence Touch is
powered on.
6. Connect the USB device to the side of the RealPresence Touch.
7. An automatic prompt asks you if you want to update the platform software.
Touch Yes.
Update the Software and the Factory Restore Partition From a USB
Storage Device
You can use a USB storage device to update RealPresence Touch software and the RealPresence Touch
factory restore partition.
If you cannot update your RealPresence Touch device using a server or with RealPresence Resource
Manager, you can load the software onto a USB storage device and use that to update the device.
Another benefit of using a USB device is that you can choose to perform both a factory restore and
update your device software simultaneously.
The following attributes ensure that your USB device supports the software update procedure:
• Use USB 2.0 devices (some USB 3.0 devices might not work with the RealPresence Touch).
• Format the primary partition as FAT32.
• Place all software update data into the root directory of the primary partition.
Procedure
3. Navigate to the page for the version of the system that you use with the RealPresence Touch.
4. Save the RealPresence Touch operating system software package (.tar) file from the Polycom
website to the root directory of the USB device.
5. Disconnect the Ethernet power cable from the RealPresence Touch.
6. Connect the USB device to the side of the RealPresence Touch.
7. Press and hold the RealPresence Touch factory restore button with a bent paper clip for ten
seconds and simultaneously reconnect the Ethernet power cable to the RealPresence Touch.
8. Follow the on-screen instructions of the setup wizard to complete the update.
The setup wizard is available during initial setup, after a system reset with system settings deleted,
or after using the factory restore button.
233
Troubleshooting the RealPresence Touch Device

You might need to diagnose and troubleshoot issues with your RealPresence Touch device.
Related Links
Perform a Factory Restore on the RealPresence Touch on page 236
Perform a Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device on page 237
Transfer RealPresence Touch Logs to a USB Storage Device on page 235
View Call Statistics on page 234
View System Details and Connection Status on page 234
View System Details and Connection Status

You can view certain RealPresence Group Series system details about the paired system on the
RealPresence Touch; this information might be useful for troubleshooting or for technical support.
Procedure
1. On any screen on the RealPresence Touch, tap Menu and then Settings.
The System Information screen is displayed.
2. Under Device Connection Status, tap the room system that you want information on.
System details and connection status information is listed for the connected room system.
Related Links
Troubleshooting the RealPresence Touch Device on page 234
View Call Statistics

When your RealPresence Group Series system is paired with a RealPresence Touch, you might want to
view certain call statistics, such as bitrates, compression formats, and packet loss during a call.
Note: In a Skype for Business call, for packet loss information, check the QoE report on the AVMCU
server.
Procedure
1. During a call, on any screen, tap Call Statistics (located at the top left of your screen).
Call statistics for each stream in the current call are now displayed.
2. To view statistics for another call participant, switch to that participant and tap Call Statistics
again.
To view more information about a specific stream, navigate to the desired stream and tap More
Information.
Related Links
Download RealPresence Touch Logs

You can download RealPresence Group Series system logs using the RealPresence Touch.
234
Procedure
1. In the RealPresence Touch web interface, click Download Logs.
2. A .tar file is downloaded to your local computer.
You can extract the file and open it to review the log information.
Transfer RealPresence Touch Logs to a USB Storage Device

You might find log files useful when troubleshooting. You can transfer RealPresence Touch logs to a USB
storage device. The USB storage device must be in FAT32 format.
Procedure
1. Insert a USB storage device into the RealPresence Touch device.
2. On the RealPresence Touch device, do one of the following:
• Tap Administration and enter the user name and password for the device.
• Tap Menu > Administration and enter your user name and password.
3. Tap Transfer RealPresence Touch Logs to USB Device.
A message displays while the logs are being transferred to the USB storage device.
After a success message displays, click OK.
Related Links
Manually Reboot a RealPresence Touch Device

To assist in troubleshooting, you might need to manually reboot your device.
Note: As a best practice, do not disconnect the ethernet cable from the device to reboot it.
Procedure
1. Turn the device over.
2. Press the reboot button shown in the figure above until the device’s screen goes black.
It restarts and displays the splash screen in a few seconds.
235
3. Wait for the device to power back on.
Restart a RealPresence Touch Device

You can restart a RealPresence Touch device when it’s paired with a RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. On the device, go to Settings > Administration.
2. Enter the administrator password.
3. Tap Restart Touch Controller.
Restart a System from a RealPresence Touch Device

When the RealPresence Group Series system is paired with a RealPresence Touch device and is
enabled for Skype for Business, you can restart the room system using the RealPresence Touch device.
Procedure
1. On the RealPresence Touch device, navigate to Settings > Administration.
2. Enter the administrator password.
3. Under RealPresence Group Series , tap Restart Room System.
Perform a Factory Restore on the RealPresence Touch

If the RealPresence Touch device is not functioning correctly or you have forgotten the Administration
password, you can use the factory restore button to reset the device. This operation completely erases
the RealPresence Touch device's settings and reinstalls the default platform and applications. Do not
power off the device during the factory restore process.
The restore button pinhole is on the back of the RealPresence Touch, as shown in the following figure.
Procedure
1. Disconnect the ethernet cable to power off the device.
2. Using a pin or paper clip, insert it into the pin hole, and press and hold the factory restore button.
3. Continue to hold the factory restore button for a full 5 seconds and connect the Ethernet cable.
4. Wait for the RealPresence Touch device to power on and display the setup wizard (also called the
OOB, out-of-box wizard).
5. Follow the instructions on the setup wizard.
When the process is complete, the device displays the splash screen and then the home screen.
236
Related Links
Perform a Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device

If you want to install a particular software build on the RealPresence Touch, you can perform a a factory
restore using a USB storage device. Do not power off the device during the factory restore process.
Procedure
1. Copy a build package (.tgz file) to the root directory of a USB storage device.
2. Disconnect the ethernet cable to power off the device.
3. Insert the USB storage device into the side USB port of the device.
4. Using a pin or paper clip, insert it into the pin hole, and press and hold the factory restore button.
5. Continue to hold the factory restore button for a full 5 seconds and connect the Ethernet cable.
6. Wait for the RealPresence Touch device to power on and display the setup wizard (also called the
OOB, out-of-box wizard).
When the process is complete, the device displays the splash screen and then the home screen.
Related Links
Test the Software Download URL

If your RealPresence Group Series system or Polycom touch device is not updating properly, and you
entered polycom as the Server Address, the system resolves downloads.polycom.com to an IP address.
The system then checks for a software update using http.
Procedure
1. Open a browser.
2. Try to access the appropriate URL for your system or device.
System or Device Test URL
Polycom Touch Control http://downloads.polycom.com/video/

venus_group_series/dists/venus/info.txt
RealPresence Touch http://downloads.polycom.com/video/rp_touch/

vega/info.txt
RealPresence Group Series http://downloads.polycom.com/video/group_series/

rseries/info.txt
3. If the computer returns platform, or apps and platform, you can reach the Polycom software
server from your location and the URL is working.
237
Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control
Device
Topics:
• Positioning the Polycom Touch Control

• Set Up the Polycom Touch Control
• Enable the Polycom Touch Control
• Configuring the Software
• Powering On the Polycom Touch Control
• Power Off the Polycom Touch Control
• Wake the Polycom Touch Control
• Pairing States for the Polycom Touch Control
• Pairing the Polycom Touch Control Device
• Managing the Polycom Touch Control Remotely
• Updating the Software
• Troubleshooting on the Polycom Touch Control Device
Positioning the Polycom Touch Control

Before you use your touch device for the first time, ensure that it is placed properly in the meeting room.
RealPresence Group Series systems can be controlled by the Polycom Touch Control. When the Polycom
Touch Control is not paired with a RealPresence Group Series system, the device can be used as a
virtual remote control. To use the Polycom Touch Control as a virtual remote control, ensure that the
infrared (IR) transmitter on the front of the device is facing the system you want to control. Also, make
sure that the Polycom Touch Control is conveniently located for use during a meeting.
Set Up the Polycom Touch Control

The Polycom Touch Control allows you to control a RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. Ensure that the correct software is installed on the system that you want to control, and that you
have completed the setup wizard on the system.
2. Connect the Ethernet cable to the underside of the Polycom Touch Control.
3. If you intend to use the Polycom Touch Control to show content from a computer, connect the USB
cable to the underside of the Polycom Touch Control.
4. If you want to connect the stand, route the Ethernet and USB cables through the opening in the
stand.
238
Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device
Then attach the stand to the Polycom Touch Control by tightening the mounting screw with a
screwdriver.
5. Plug the Ethernet cable into the wall outlet:
• If your room provides Power Over Ethernet, you can connect the Ethernet cable directly to a
LAN outlet.
• If your room does not provide Power Over Ethernet, you must connect the Ethernet cable to
the power supply adapter. Then connect the power supply adapter to a LAN outlet and
power outlet.The Polycom Touch Control powers on and displays the language selection
screen.
6. Choose your language and follow the onscreen instructions to pair the Polycom Touch Control with
your system, or select Pair Later on the Pairing screen to skip pairing.
7. After the Polycom Touch Control connects to the network, enter the RealPresence Group Series
system IP address and touch Connect.
By default, the IP address of the system is displayed on the bottom of its Home screen. If the
system is configured to allow pairing and you enter the IP address for the system correctly, the
Touch Control displays a prompt for the system admin user ID and password.
When the Polycom Touch Control has paired and connected with the system, the Polycom Touch
Control displays a success message, and the menus on the system monitor become unavailable.
Related Links
Pair the Polycom Touch Control Device on page 244
Enable the Polycom Touch Control on page 239
Powering On the Polycom Touch Control on page 242
Enable the Polycom Touch Control

You must enable the Polycom Touch Control device on the system web interface before users can use
the device to control a RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
Touch Device.
2. Select the Enable Polycom Touch Device check box and click Save.
Your touch device is now enabled and you can pair it to a room system. Note that only one device can be
paired to a room system at a time.
Related Links
Set Up the Polycom Touch Control on page 238
Configuring the Software

Before you use the Polycom Touch Control, you must configure the LAN setting, and optionally, the
regional setting on your RealPresence Group Series system.
The Polycom Touch Control has separate Admin Settings that allow you to update its software and
configure LAN, regional, and security properties for the device.
Related Links
Configure Admin ID and Password on page 242
239
Configure Location and Time Settings on page 241

Configure LAN Properties on page 58
Configure LAN Settings

Before you can pair the Polycom Touch Control with the RealPresence Group Series system, you must
configure the LAN settings.
Procedure
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.
2. Touch the LAN Properties tab.
3. Configure the following IP Address (IPv4) settings.
Setting Description
Set IP Address Specifies how the Touch Control obtains an IP

address.
the Touch Control gets an IP address from the
DHCP server on the LAN.
address is not automatically assigned.
IP Address Displays the IP address currently assigned to the

Touch Control, if the Touch Control obtains its IP
address automatically.
If you select Enter IP address manually, enter the
IP address here.

Touch Control.
the subnet mask here.

Touch Control.
the gateway IP address here.
4. Configure the following DNS settings.
Setting Description
Domain Name Displays the domain name currently assigned to

the touch control.
If the Polycom Touch Control does not
automatically obtain a domain name, enter one
here.
240
Setting Description
DNS Servers Displays the DNS servers currently assigned to the

touch control.
If the touch control does not automatically obtain a
DNS server address, enter up to two DNS servers
here.
You can specify IPv4 DNS server addresses only
when the IPv4 address is entered manually. When
the IPv4 address is obtained automatically, the
DNS Server addresses are also obtained
automatically.
5. View the general settings.
Setting Description
Duplex Mode Displays the duplex mode. Read-only.
LAN Speed Displays the LAN speed. Read-only.
Configure Location and Time Settings

You can configure location settings on the Polycom Touch Control.
Procedure
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration.
2. Touch the Location tab.
3. Select a language from the Language menu.
4. Configure the following settings under Date and Time.
Setting Description
Time Zone Specifies the time difference between GMT

(Greenwich Mean Time) and your location.
Time Server Specifies connection to a time server for automatic

Touch Control time settings.
The date and time must be manually reset every
time the Touch Control restarts, in the following
cases:
• Time Server is set to Off.
• Time Server is set to Manual or Auto, but the
Touch Control cannot connect to a time server
successfully.
Time Server Address Specifies the address of the time server to use
when Time Server is set to Manual.
241
Setting Description
Time Format Specifies your format preference for the time

display and lets you enter your local time.
Related Links
Configure Admin ID and Password on page 242
Configure Admin ID and Password

You can set an admin ID and password, which allows you to limit access to the Polycom Touch Control
Administration settings.
Procedure
1. From the Home screen touch Administration.
An admin ID and password might be configured for the Touch Control Administration settings. The
default ID is admin and the default password is 456.
2. Touch the Security tab.
3. Set the following security settings.
Setting Description
Admin ID Specifies the ID for the administrator account. The

default Admin ID is admin.
Admin Password Specifies the password for administrator access

when logging in to the Polycom Touch Control. The
default password is 456.
When this password is set, you must enter it to
configure the Polycom Touch Control Admin
Settings. The password must not contain spaces.
Related Links
Configure Location and Time Settings on page 241
Powering On the Polycom Touch Control

You can power on the Polycom Touch Control. For details, see the following topic.
Related Links
Power Off the Polycom Touch Control

You can power off the Polycom Touch Control.
242
Procedure
1. From the Touch Control Home screen, touch User Settings.
2. Scroll to the Power section.
3. Select Touch Control Power.
4. In the menu that appears, select Power Off the Touch Control.
If you choose to power off the Polycom Touch Control, you must disconnect and reconnect the
LAN cable to power it on again.
Wake the Polycom Touch Control

The Polycom Touch Control goes to sleep after two minutes of inactivity.
Procedure
» Touch anywhere on the screen to wake the device.
Pairing States for the Polycom Touch Control

The Polycom Touch Control device displays the following pairing states:
State Description
Paired The Polycom Touch Control is successfully connected

to the RealPresence Group Series system through the
pairing process, including providing the system admin
ID and password. A single Polycom Touch Control can
be paired to multiple RealPresence Group Series
systems and, once paired, the Polycom Touch Control
can switch between systems without needing to enter
admin IDs or passwords.
Unpaired The ability to pair or connect to the Polycom Touch

Control is disabled on the RealPresence Group Series
system.
Connected A Polycom Touch Control has an active pairing

connection to the RealPresence Group Series system.
A single Polycom Touch Control can be paired to
multiple systems, but can be connected to only one
RealPresence Group Series system at a time.
Disconnected The Polycom Touch Control does not have an active

pairing connection to a system, but is still paired if at
least one system that has previously paired with the
Polycom Touch Control has not unpaired.
Related Links
Unpair the Polycom Touch Control Device on page 244
243
Pairing the Polycom Touch Control Device

When you configure the Polycom Touch Control device to pair with a particular RealPresence Group
Series system, the device makes an IP connection to the system. If the connection is lost for any reason,
the Polycom Touch Control automatically attempts to restore the connection.
You can pair the Polycom Touch Control and system during initial device setup.
After you have completed Polycom Touch Control setup, you can pair to a different system using Polycom
Touch Control settings and unpair using the system web interface.
When you use a Polycom Touch Control with the system, you must be sure to update the RealPresence
Group Series software before you update the Polycom Touch Control software. Only Polycom Touch
Control software versions 4.x or later work with RealPresence Group Series systems.
Pair the Polycom Touch Control Device

You can pair the Polycom Touch Control and a RealPresence Group Series system using the system web
interface. If you do not want to pair during setup, select Pair Later. If you choose to skip pairing, many
Polycom Touch Control features are not available.
Procedure
» After selecting a language, enter the RealPresence Group Series system IP address in the
Polycom Touch Control interface and touch Connect.
Related Links
Pair to a System After Setup

You can use the Polycom Touch Control to pair with a RealPresence Group Series system after running
the setup wizard.
Procedure
1. On the Polycom Touch Control Home screen, touch System.
2. Scroll to Device Connection Status and then touch the Info icon next to the system name.
3. Touch View Pairing Settings.
4. Change the system IP address and touch Connect.
Unpair the Polycom Touch Control Device

You can unpair the Polycom Touch Control and RealPresence Group Series system using the system
web interface.
Procedure
Touch Control.
2. Disable Allow Pairing or select Forget this Device.
The RealPresence Group Series system cannot pair with any Polycom Touch Control while Allow
Pairing is disabled.
244
Related Links
Pairing States for the Polycom Touch Control on page 243
Managing the Polycom Touch Control Remotely

You can remotely manage certain features of your Polycom Touch Control from within your enterprise
environment.
This list describes the features you can manage remotely:
• Download Logs: Downloads the Polycom Touch Control logs to the location specified in the
device.
• Network Settings: Specifies whether the system acquires an IP address automatically or manually.
With the manual method, the other settings that are available from the Polycom Touch Control
become available on the web.
• Pair: Pairs and unpairs from RealPresence Group Series systems. Before you can connect to or
pair with a device, you must know the device's IP Address and the User Name and Password used
to connect.
• Security: Changes the admin ID and password of the Polycom Touch Control.
• Software Updates: Updates the Polycom Touch Control software. You can update from the default
Polycom server or your own server by entering the appropriate IP address. You can configure the
updates to occur automatically or manually.
• View Polycom Touch Control Screens: Shows the screen currently being displayed on the
Polycom Touch Control. You can click Refresh at any time to see if the screen has changed.
Open the Remote Management Window

You can open the Polycom Touch Control in a browser window to perform remote management functions.
Procedure
1. In one of the supported web browser windows, enter the IP address of the Polycom Touch Control.
2. In the login window, enter the ID and Password you use to access the administrative features of
the Polycom Touch Control.
You can access the remote management features by using the Dashboard or the Navigation
menu. You return to the Dashboard by clicking the Home icon.
Transfer Polycom Touch Control Logs to a USB Storage Device

You might find log files useful when troubleshooting. You can transfer the Touch Control logs to an
external USB storage device.
Procedure
1. Ensure that a USB device is connected to the USB port on the right side of the Polycom Touch
Control.
2. From the Home screen touch Administration.
An admin ID and password might be configured for the Touch Control Administration settings. The
default ID is admin and the default password is system 456.
3. Under Security, select Transfer Touch Control Logs to USB Device.
245
A popup message displays when the log transfer completes successfully.
Updating the Software

The Polycom Touch Control must run a software version that is compatible with the software version on
the RealPresence Group Series system.
It is recommended that you install the latest compatible Polycom Touch Control software for any given
RealPresence Group Series system software version. When checking for software updates, the Polycom
Touch Control first checks for the presence of a USB storage device. The system then lists the available
Polycom Touch Control updates.
For additional details on software compatibility, refer to the appropriate version of the release notes
available at support.polycom.com.
If you need to update a RealPresence Group Series system at the same time you update the Polycom
Touch Control, update the system software first.
Update files for the Polycom Touch Control are located on the Polycom support server. You can store the
update files on a USB device, RealPresence Resource Manager system, or on your own web server.
No license number or key is needed to update the Polycom Touch Control. You can configure the device
to get software updates using any of the following methods:
• A Polycom RealPresence Resource Manager system
• A USB 2.0 storage device in FAT32 format that you connect to the side of the device
Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site for the Polycom Touch
Control
You can post software to your web server and then configure the Polycom Touch Control to receive
updates.
Procedure
no extension:
• .tar.gz
• .txt
• .sig
• .plcm
2. Define a URL on your server that the Polycom Touch Control can use for software updates, and
3. Go to support.polycom.com, and navigate to the page for the RealPresence Group Series system
that you use with the Polycom Touch Control.
4. Save and extract the Polycom Touch Control Panel software package (.zip file) and the Polycom
Touch Control Operating System software package (.zip file) from the Polycom website to the root
directory of the web server.
246
5. Open a command line interface and enter the command appropriate for your operating system to
generate an info.txt file that lists the folders with updates:
• Unix or Linux: <rootdir>/dists/venus/geninfo.sh
• Windows: <rootdir>\dists\venus\geninfo.sh
Update Software Manually from the Web Interface

You can manually update Polycom Touch Control software from the Polycom server or your own server.
Polycom recommends that you set the maintenance window times so that the Polycom Touch Control is
updated about an hour after the last RealPresence Group Series system update has completed.
Procedure
3. In the browser address line, enter the IP address of the Polycom Touch Control using the format
http://IPaddress (for example, http://10.11.12.13).
4. If necessary, enter the Admin ID as the user name (default is admin), and then enter the Admin
remote access password, if one is set.
The default password is system 456.
The first time you open the system web interface each day, you might need to enter a user name
and password after you select any of the interface options.
5. On the Home Page, under Touch Control details, click Software Update.
6. Enter the server address for the update, then click Save.
The default server address, polycom, is the address for the Polycom public soft-update repository
and has the latest released software version available.
7. Click Check for Software Updates to find the latest build on the server.
The Polycom Touch Control Operating system and panel software versions are listed.
8. Click Download and Install Software.
Download progress is displayed during installation.
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the update.
Update Software Automatically in the Web Interface

You can automatically update the Polycom Touch Control software from the Polycom server or your own
server. The Polycom Touch Control automatically performs a software update when one of the following
conditions are true:
• Auto Update is enabled (with Download and Install Software selected), and the scheduled time
occurs for a software update. (Example: Scheduled time is set for 3 p.m., so the software update
begins at 3 p.m.)
• Auto Update is enabled (with Download and Install Software selected), and the paired Group
Series system finishes its software update (which triggers a Polycom Touch Control software
update).
Procedure
247
For a list of supported browsers, refer to the Polycom RealPresence Group Series Release
Notes .
3. In the browser address line, enter the IP address of the RealPresence Group Series system using
the format http://IPaddress (for example, http://10.11.12.13).
4. If necessary, enter the Admin ID as the user name (default is admin), and then enter the Admin
5. On the Home Page, under Touch Control details, click Update Software.
6. Enter the server address for the update, then click Save.
The default server address, polycom, is the address for the Polycom public soft-update
repository and has the latest released software version available.
7. To make automatic updates and update your software to the latest build on the server, select
Automatically Check for Software Updates.
8. When the Export Restrictions notice appears, touch Accept Agreement.
9. Specify the automatic update options:
a. Touch Hour, Minute, and AM/PM to specify the beginning of the time window within which
the Polycom Touch Control checks for updates.
b. Touch Duration to select the length of the time within which the Polycom Touch Control
can check for updates.
After the Start Time and Duration settings are configured, the Polycom Touch Control
calculates a random time within the defined update window at which to check for updates.
It then checks for updates at this time on a daily basis as long as the Start Time and
Duration values do not change. If the Start Time or Duration values change, a new random
time within the new time window is calculated.
c. Touch Action for Available Software Updates and select whether to be notified of
available status updates only or to download and install software when updates are
available.
10. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the update.
Update Software Automatically in the Local Interface

Using the Polycom Touch Control interface, you can automatically update the software from the Polycom
server or your own server.
Polycom recommends that you set the maintenance window times so that the Polycom Touch Control is
updated about an hour after the last RealPresence Group Series system update has completed.
Procedure
1. From the Home screen, touch Administration and then touch Updates.
2. Enter the path and address of the update site where you posted the Polycom Touch Control
software in the Server Address field.
3. Enable Automatically Check for Software Updates.
248
a. Touch Hour, Minute, and AM/PM to specify the beginning of the time window within which
the Polycom Touch Control checks for updates.
b. Touch Duration to select the length of the time within which the Polycom Touch Control
can check for updates.
After the Start Time and Duration settings are configured, the Polycom Touch Control
calculates a random time within the defined update window at which to check for updates.
Duration values do not change. If the Start Time or Duration values change, a new
random time within the new time window is calculated.
c. Touch Action for Available Software Updates and select whether to be notified of
available status updates only or to download and install software when updates are
available.
Update Software Manually in the Local Interface

You can manually update the Polycom Touch Control Software using the Polycom Touch Control
interface.
Procedure
2. Enter the path and address of the update site where you posted the Polycom Touch Control
software in the in the Server Address field.
4. Select only the updates that you want to install.
a. When the Export Restrictions notice appears, touch Accept Agreement.
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the update.
Update Software from a USB Storage Device

You can use a USB storage device to either update or downgrade Polycom Touch Control software
versions.
The following device attributes ensure that your USB device successfully supports the procedure:
• Use USB 2.0 devices (some USB 3.0 devices might not work with the RealPresence Group Series
systems).
• Format the primary partition as FAT32.
• Put all software update data in the root directory of the primary partition.
Procedure
3. Navigate to the page for the RealPresence Group Series system that you use with the Polycom
Touch Control.
4. Download the latest version of these .zip distribution package files to your hard drive:
• Polycom Touch Control Operating System
249
• Polycom Touch Control Panel Software

5. Extract all contents of the files you downloaded to the root directory of the USB device.
When extracting multiple distribution packages, a pop up message might appear asking if you
want to overwrite certain files that already exist. Select Yes to All.
6. Connect the USB device to the side of the Polycom Touch Control.
9. Select only the updates that you want to install.
Follow the on-screen instructions of the setup wizard to complete the update. The setup wizard is
available during initial setup, after a system reset with system settings deleted, or after using the
factory restore button.
Set a Software Version as Current for the Polycom Touch Control

You can use the setcurrel command to set a specific version of Polycom Touch Control software as
the current release on your server.
Procedure
1. Run the appropriate setcurrel command with X.X.X-XXX as the software version you want to
set as the current release.
Software Type Unix or Linux Command Windows Command
Panel <root dir>/dists/venus/apps/ <root dir>\dists\venus\apps

setcurrel.sh X.X.X-XXX \setcurrel.bat X.X.X-XXX
Operating system <root dir>/dists/venus/platform/ <root dir>\dists\venus\platform

setcurrel.sh X.X.X-XXX \setcurrel.bat X.X.X-XXX
Remove a Polycom Touch Control Software Version

Use the removerel command to remove a specific version of a Polycom Touch Control software release
from your server.
Procedure
1. Run the removerel command with X.X.X-XXX as the software version you want to set remove
from the server.
Software Type Unix or Linux Command Windows Command
Panel <root dir>/dists/venus/apps/ <root dir>\dists\venus\apps

removerel.sh X.X.X-XXX \removerel.bat X.X.X-XXX
Operating system <root dir>/dists/venus/platform/ <root dir>\dists\venus\platform

removerel.sh X.X.X-XXX \removerel.bat X.X.X-XXX
250
2. Follow the onscreen instructions for removing the software version.
Troubleshooting on the Polycom Touch Control

Device
For information on troubleshooting the Polycom Touch Control, see the following related topics.
• View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call on the Polycom Touch Control
• View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call with the Remote Control
Related Links
Perform a Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device on the Polycom Touch Control on page 252
View System Details on page 251
Polycom Touch Control Indicator Light

When the Polycom Touch Control is on, the Home button is lit.
View System Details

You might need to view certain details to do tasks, such as pairing, or to perform troubleshooting tests to
provide information for your own testing on your RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. On the Home screen, touch System.
The following Touch Control information displays:
• Model
• Hardware Version
• Serial Number
• Panel Software
• Operating System Version
• Kernel Version
• MAC Address
• IP Address
2. To view the paired system details, touch the <Product Name > System tab.
Related Links
Perform a Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device on the Polycom Touch Control on page 252
Troubleshooting on the Polycom Touch Control Device on page 251
Perform a Factory Restore on the Polycom Touch Control

If the RealPresence Group Series system is not functioning correctly, you can use the factory restore
button to reset the system.
The factory restore operation completely erases the system's flash memory and reinstalls the software
version and default configuration stored in its factory partition.
251
The following items are not saved:

• Software updates
• All system settings including option keys and the remote control channel ID
• Directory entries
• CDR data
Procedure
1. Disconnect the LAN cable to the Polycom Touch Control to power off the device.
2. Disconnect all USB devices.
The restore button is on the underside of the Polycom Touch Control, as shown in the following
figure.
3. Insert a pin or paper clip into the pin hole, then press and hold the factory restore button while you
reconnect the LAN cable to the device. Continue to hold the factory restore button down for about
10 seconds. Wait for the device to power on and display the setup wizard (also called the OOB,
out-of-box wizard).
During the factory restore process, the default platform and applications are reinstalled and the
LED indicator blinks blue and amber. Do not power off the device during the process. After it is
complete, the device displays a success message.
4. Wait for the device to power on and display the setup wizard (also called the OOB, out-of-box
wizard).
If the device requires login information, the default for the admin ID is admin and the password is
serial number. As a best practice, remember to change the default admin ID and password for
security.
Perform a Factory Restore Using a USB Storage Device on the

Polycom Touch Control
If the RealPresence Group Series system is not functioning correctly, you can perform a a factory restore
to reset the system using a USB storage device.
Procedure
1. Disconnect the LAN cable to the Polycom Touch Control to power off the device.
2. Copy a build package (.tar file) to the root directory of a USB storage device.
3. Insert the USB storage device into the side USB port of the device.
The restore button is on the underside of the Polycom Touch Control, as shown in the following
figure.
252
4. Insert a pin or paper clip into the pin hole, then press and hold the factory restore button while you
reconnect the LAN cable to the device. Continue to hold the factory restore button down for about
10 seconds after the device powers on.
During the factory restore process, the default platform and applications are reinstalled. Do not
power off the device during the factory restore process. The device displays a success message
when the process is complete.
5. Wait for the device to power on and display the setup wizard (also called the OOB, out-of-box
wizard).
If the device requires login information, the default for the admin ID is admin and for the password
is 456. As a best practice, remember to change the default admin ID and password for security.
Related Links
View System Details on page 251
Troubleshooting on the Polycom Touch Control Device on page 251
253
System Maintenance
Topics:
• Managing System Profiles

• Controlling the System Fan Speed
• Restoring and Resetting a System
• Logs
• Retrieving Log Files
• Upgrading System Software
• Downgrading System Software
Managing System Profiles

If you manage systems that support multiple applications, you can use profiles to change RealPresence
Group Series system settings. You can store a system profile on a computer as a .profile file using the
system web interface. The number of profiles you can save is unlimited. Polycom recommends only using
profiles as a way to back up system settings. Attempting to edit a stored profile or upload a stored profile
from one system to a different system can result in instability or unexpected results.
The following settings are included in a profile:
• Home screen settings
• User access levels
• Icon selections
• Option keys
• System behaviors
Passwords are not included when you store a profile.
Store a Setting Profile

You can store the current setting profile on your computer.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Utilities > Services > Profile Center.
2. Click Download next to Current Settings Profile to download the profile file from the
3. Save the file to a location on your computer.
Upload a Profile
You can upload a setting profile from your computer.
254
System Maintenance
Procedure
1. Reset the RealPresence Group Series system to restore default settings.
2. In your web browser address line, enter the system's IP address.
3. In the system web interface, go to Utilities > Services > Profile Center.
4. Next to Upload Settings Profile, click Browse and browse to the location of the profile .csv file on
your computer.
5. Click Open to upload the .csv file to your system.
Perform a Factory Restore of a System

If your RealPresence Group Series system is not functioning correctly, or if you have forgotten the admin
password, you can reset it to its factory setting. The restore button pinhole is on the bottom of the
RealPresence Group 300, 310, and 500 systems, as shown in the following figure.
The restore button pinhole is on the front of the RealPresence Group 700 system, as shown in the
following figure.
Procedure
1. Power off the system.
2. Straighten a paper clip and insert it into the pinhole.
3. Using the paper clip, press and hold the restore button.
4. While continuing to hold the restore button, press the power button once.
5. Keep holding the restore button for 10 more seconds, then release it.
During the factory restore process, the system displays the Polycom startup screen and the usual
software update screens on HDMI monitors. Other types of monitors will be blank. Do not power off the
255
System Maintenance
system during the factory restore process. The system restarts automatically when the process is
complete.
Related Links
Perform a System Reset on page 256
Perform a Factory Restore to Install a Specific Software Version on page 256
Perform a System Reset

You can reset a system in the RealPresence Group Series system local interface.
Procedure
1. Go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics > Reset System.
2. Enable Delete System Settings.
3. Click Reset System.
After about 15 seconds, the system restarts and displays the setup wizard.
Related Links
Perform a Factory Restore of a System on page 255
Perform a Factory Restore to Install a Specific Software Version on page 256
Perform a Factory Restore to Install a Specific Software Version

If you start a factory restore while a USB storage device is connected, the RealPresence Group Series
system restores from the USB storage device instead of the system's factory partition.
For about the first five minutes of the factory restore process, the system is erasing data on the SD card
and extracting data from the USB storage device. This process runs from a special memory partition and
graphics are not available, so your monitor will be blank.
If you prefer, you can have the system prepare the SD card by rewriting the data with zeroes and
reformatting the card, thereby eliminating any traces of old data. Be aware that this step adds about 20
minutes to the beginning of the factory restore process, when all you will see is a blank screen. You will
notice, however, that the LED indicator shows a fast blink of blue and amber lights during this process.
The lights blink normally during the rest of the restore process.
Procedure
1. Copy the build package (.tar file) and the sw_keys.txt file to the root directory of a USB storage
device.
2. (Optional) Create a text file named zeroize.txt on the root directory of the USB storage device,
then edit the file by entering the word TRUE in all capital letters.
If the zeroize.txt file contains the word FALSE, or if the file is not in the root directory of the USB
storage device, the system uses the standard method of erasing data from the SD card.
3. Power off the system by pressing the power button on your system. Do not unplug the power cord.
4. Plug the USB storage device into your system.
5. While holding the restore button, press the power button once.
6. Keep holding the restore button for 10 more seconds, then release it.
The software version of the update file on the USB storage device is displayed in the system web
interface.
7. Click Start Update to begin the factory restore.
After the SD card is prepared, the system displays the Polycom startup screen and the usual
software update screens on HDMI monitors. Other types of monitors are blank. Do not power off
256
System Maintenance
the system during the factory restore process. The system restarts automatically when the process
is complete.
Related Links
Perform a Factory Restore of a System on page 255
Perform a System Reset on page 256
Delete Data and System Files

You can remove sensitive data and configuration information from the RealPresence Group Series
system for security purposes.
Procedure
1. Power off the RealPresence Group 300, 310, 500, or 700 system by holding down the Power
sensor for 3 to 5 seconds.
2. Unplug all network connections.
3. Perform a factory restore.
4. Wait for the system to start up and display the setup wizard.
5. Power off the system.
Controlling the System Fan Speed

The Maximum Ventilation option reduces thermal stress to the power supply by increasing the fan speed
from 35% to 80%. This option is useful when the system is used in higher thermal areas, such as
enclosures with limited ventilation, 24/7 operations, hosting multipoint calls, and sharing content.
By default the option is on, resulting in an increase of the fan speed up to 80% duty cycle. But when the
option is not set to on, the fan runs at a lower speed, 35% duty cycle, reducing the fan speed and
increasing thermal stress on the power supply.
Note: The Maximum Ventilation option is not available on RealPresence Group Series 700 hardware
version 20 and above, 3x0, and 500 systems.
Configure the System Fan Speed

To set the fan speed for your system, you must use the Maximum Ventilation Option in the system web
interface.
The Maximum Ventilation option is not available on RealPresence Group Series 300, 500, and on
Polycom RealPresence Group 700 systems with a hardware version higher than or equal to 20.
Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Log Settings > Maximum
Ventilation Option.
257
System Maintenance
Restoring and Resetting a System

If the RealPresence Group Series system is not functioning correctly or you have forgotten the Admin
Room Password, you can reset the system with Delete System Settings enabled. This procedure
effectively refreshes your system, deleting all settings except for the following:
• Current software version
• Remote control channel ID setting
• Directory entries
• CDR data and logs
Related Links
General Troubleshooting on page 271
Logs
Logs contain information about system activities and configurations to help you troubleshoot issues.
Note: If your system experiences a sudden loss of power, your system loses all logs since the last
system reboot or log download.
Related Links
Configure System Log Level and Remote Logging on page 259
View Log File Status on page 258
Retrieving Log Files on page 261
View Log File Status

You can view the log file status for your RealPresence Group Series system in the system web interface.
Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Status and select the More
Info link for Log Threshold.
Related Links
Logs on page 258
Configure System Log Management

When the RealPresence Group Series system log fills past your configured threshold, the system triggers
the following actions:
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Security > Log Management.
258
System Maintenance
Setting Description
Current Percent Filled Displays as a percentage how full the logs are.
When the logs are full, system deletes the oldest
entries.
Percent Filled Threshold Reaching the configured threshold triggers a

notification, creates a log entry, and transfers the
log if you set Transfer Frequency to Auto At
Threshold. Off disables logging threshold
notifications.
Folder Name Specifies the folder name for log transfers. Select
one of the following:
• System Name and Timestamp: Folder name
is the system name and the timestamp of the
log transfer. For example, if the system name is
Marketing, the folder name might be
marketing_<date_and_time>.
• Timestamp: Folder name is the timestamp of
the log transfer (for example,
<yyyyMMddhhmmssSSS>).
• Custom: Lets you specify a folder name for
manual log transfers.
Storage Type Specifies the type of storage device used for log file
transfers.
Transfer Frequency Specifies when the system transfers logs:

• Manual: The transfer starts when you select the
Start Log Transfer button, which is visible only
on the local interface. If the log fills before you
transfer, new events overwrite the oldest
events.
• Auto at Threshold: The transfer starts
automatically when the system reaches the
Percent Filled Threshold.
Configure System Log Level and Remote Logging

You can determine how the RealPresence Group Series system logs capture device and server events.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Log Settings.
259
System Maintenance
Setting Description
Log Level Sets the minimum log level of messages stored in

the system’s flash memory.
Debug logs all messages, while Warning logs the
fewest number of messages.
It’s recommended that you use the default value
Debug.
When you enable remote logging, the log level is
the same for both remote and local logging.
Enable Remote Logging Specifies whether remote logging is enabled.

Enabling this setting causes the system to send
each log message to the specified server.
The system immediately begins forwarding its log
messages after you click Save.
The system supports remote logging encryption
using TLS. If you use UDP or TCP transport, Poly
recommends remote logging only on secure, local
networks.
Remote Log Server Address Specifies the server address and port. If you don’t
specify the port, the system uses a default
destination port. The system determines the default
port by how you configure Remote Log Server
Transport Protocol:
• UDP: 514
• TCP: 601
• TLS: 6514
You can specify the address and port in the
following formats:
• IPv4 address: 192.0.2.0:<port>, where
<port> is the elective destination port number in
the 1-65535 range.
• IPv6 address: [2001::abcd:
1234]:<port>, where <port> is the elective
destination port number in the 1-65535 range.
• FQDN:
logserverhost.company.com:<port
>, where <port> is the elective destination port
number in the 1-65535 range.
Remote Log Server Transport Protocol Specifies the transport protocol for sending logs to
a remote server:
• UDP
• TCP
• TLS (secure connection)
260
System Maintenance
Setting Description
Enable H.323 Trace Logs additional H.323 connectivity information.
Enable SIP Trace Logs additional SIP connectivity information.
Send Diagnostics and Usage Data to Polycom Sends crash log server information to Polycom to
help us analyze and improve the product. Click the
Polycom Improvement Program button to view
information about how your data is used.
Related Links
Logs on page 258
Retrieving Log Files

You might find log files useful when troubleshooting. You can generate log files for the RealPresence
Group Series systems and touch devices. The following related topics explain how to retrieve those log
files.
Related Links
Logs on page 258
Download System Log Files on page 261
Transfer System Log Files on page 261
Download System Log Files

You can use the RealPresence Group Series system web interface to get system logs. The date and time
of system log entries are shown in GMT.
Procedure
1. Go to Diagnostics > System > Download Logs.
2. Click Download system log and then specify a location on your computer to save the file.
In the dialog boxes that appear, designate where you want the file to be saved.
Related Links
Transfer System Log Files on page 261
Transfer System Log Files

You can transfer logs to a USB flash drive to free up space on your RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. In the local interface, go to Settings > Administration > Security > Log Management.
261
System Maintenance
2. Click Transfer System Log to USB Device.
Note: Wait until the system displays a message that the log transfer has completed successfully
before you remove the USB flash drive.
The system saves a file in the USB flash drive named according to the settings in the system web
interface.
Related Links
Download System Log Files on page 261
SNMP Reporting
The RealPresence Group Series system supports SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3.
SNMP can provide the following event information about your system:
• Alert conditions located on the system alert screen
• Details of jitter, latency, and packet loss
• Low battery power in the remote control
• System power on
• Successful or unsuccessful administrator login
• Call fail for a reason other than a busy line
• User help request
• Video or audio call connection or disconnection
SNMPv3 does the following:
• Provides secure connections between the SNMP manager and agent
• Supports both IPv4 and IPv6 networks
• Logs all configuration change events
• Supports a user-based security model
• Supports trap destination addresses
Configure SNMP Management

You can monitor your RealPresence Group Series system remotely with SNMP.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > SNMP.
Setting Description
Enable SNMP Enables administrators to monitor the system

remotely using SNMP.
Enable Legacy Notifications Supports sending notifications compatible with the

legacy MIB.
262
System Maintenance
Setting Description
Enable New Notifications Supports sending notifications compatible with the

new MIB.
Version1 Enables your system to use the SNMPv1 protocol.
Version2c Enables your system to use the SNMPv2c protocol.
Version3 Enables your system to use the SNMPv3 protocol.

Enabled by default, you can’t configure other
SNMPv3 settings unless this is on.
Read-Only Community Specifies the SNMP community string for your

system. For security reasons, don’t use the default
community string (public).
Note: Poly doesn’t support SNMP write

operations for configuring or provisioning
systems. The community string is for read
operations and outgoing SNMP traps.
Contact Name Specifies the name of the person responsible for

remotely managing the system.
Location Name Specifies the system location.
System Description Provides details about the system.
User Name Specifies the User Security Model (USM) account

name for SNMPv3 message transactions. The
maximum length is 64 characters.
Authentication Algorithm Specifies the type of SNMPv3 authentication

algorithm used.
• SHA
• MD5
Authentication Password Specifies the SNMPv3 authentication password.

The maximum length is 48 characters.
Privacy Algorithm Specifies the cryptographic privacy algorithm for

SNMPv3 packets.
• CFB-AES128
• CBC-DES
Privacy Password Specifies the SNMPv3 privacy (encryption)

password. The maximum length is 48 characters.
263
System Maintenance
Setting Description
Engine ID Specifies the unique ID of the SNMPv3 engine. You

might need this information to match the
configuration of an SNMP console application. The
ID is automatically generated, but you can create
your own as long as it is between 10 and 32
hexadecimal digits. You can separate each group
of two hex digits by a colon (:) to form a full 8-bit
value. A single hex digit delimited on each side with
a colon is equivalent to the same hex digit with a
leading zero (for example, :F: is equivalent to :
0f:).
The ID can’t be all zeros or Fs.
Listening Port Specifies the port SNMP uses to listen for system
messages (the default is port 161).
Transport Protocol Specifies the transport protocol used.

• TCP
• UDP
Destination Address1 Specifies the IP addresses of SNMP managers

where SNMP traps are sent.
Destination Address2
Each address has four settings:
Destination Address3
• IP address (accepts IPv4 and IPv6 addresses,
hostnames, and FQDNs)
• Message type (Trap or Inform)
• Protocol (SNMP v1, v2c, or v3)
• Port where SNMP traps are sent (default is 162)
Disabling the Port setting also disables the
corresponding destination address.
Download MIBs for SNMP Management

You can download MIB data for your RealPresence Group Series system.
A MIB helps your SNMP management console resolve SNMP traps and provide human-readable
descriptions of those traps.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > Servers > SNMP.
2. Click the desired link:
• Download Legacy MIB
• Download MIB
264
System Maintenance
Upgrading System Software

Polycom recommends that you upgrade your software to the latest available release. You can easily
update your RealPresence Group Series system software and system options by performing a few tasks
outlined here.
Be aware of these points when performing system upgrades:
• If you did not purchase additional system options, you need only to provide a serial number to
activate the software. You do not need an option key.
• If you do not have a support agreement, contact an authorized Polycom dealer to get an upgrade
key.
• If you are running a major or minor software version (x.y), you can update to a maintenance version
(x.y.z) without an upgrade key. For example, you do not need a software key to update from version
4.3.0 to 4.3.1 or from 4.1.0 to 4.1.5.
• If you are running a major software version and the software has had a major upgrade, you need a
software update key. For example, you need a key to update from version 4.0.0 to 5.0.0.
• If you are running a major or minor software version and the software has had a minor upgrade
within the same major version (x.y1 to x.y2), you need a software update key to get the new
software. For example, you need a key to update from version 4.2.0 to 4.3.0.
• For DoD Unified Capabilities Approved Product List (UC APL) software releases, go to
www.polycom.com/solutions/industry/federal_government/certification_accreditation.html.
Preparing to Upgrade
Ensure you have the required information ready before you begin installing and activating software
updates or options:
• License numbers and system serial numbers.
• Software or option keys. Obtain these by logging in to Polycom Support and requesting them from
the Activation/Upgrade link. If you do not have a support agreement, contact an authorized Polycom
dealer to get a key.
RealPresence Group Series systems perform several internal restarts while running software updates.
Each restart takes about 2 or 3 minutes and improves the reliability of the update process by freeing up
memory. If you are updating a system using a web browser, the internal restart is not visible from the
You can downgrade software to an earlier version at any time. Downgrade do not require software options
keys.
You need an account on Polycom Support before you begin. Be sure to set up an account if you don't
already have one.
Related Links
Downgrading System Software on page 270
Obtain Software or System Option Keys on page 40
System Software Updates

You can configure your RealPresence Group Series system to get software updates using any of the
following methods:
• A Polycom® Resource Manager system
265
System Maintenance

• Distribution files uploaded from your computer using a system web interface to access the system
• A USB 2.0 storage device that you connect to the system
If you use your system within a Department of Defense (DoD) environment, contact your Information
Assurance Office (IAO) for approval before using a USB device with your system.
For additional details on system hardware and software compatibility, see the product release notes
available at Polycom Support.
Downgrading Tips
Be aware of these points when performing system downgrade:
• When you use your system within a DoD environment, be sure to contact your Information
Assurance Office (IAO) for approval before using a USB storage device with your system.
• Before downgrading, refer to the release notes to verify the interoperability of the camera,
peripheral, hardware, and software versions you plan to install.
• When you downgrade the system software, the Polycom EagleEye Producer, Polycom EagleEye
Director and Polycom EagleEye Director II are automatically downgraded to a compatible version.
• When you downgrade the system software, the Polycom RealPresence Touch software is
automatically downloaded to a compatible version after being paired. However, the RealPresence
Touch platform version 2.0 might not automatically downgrade to version 1.0. In this case, to
manually downgrade from version 2.0 to 1.0, you must use a USB storage device or initiate a
downgrade from a server repository that includes version 1.0.
• When you downgrade the system software to version 6.1.1, RealPresence Touch software does not
automatically downgrade. You must manually downgrade RealPresence Touch software through
USB storage device.
• You must downgrade Polycom Touch Control software with a USB storage device.
• Because of changes in software functionality and the user interface, some settings might be lost
when you downgrade. Polycom recommends that you store your system settings using profiles and
download your system directory before updating your system software. Do not manually edit locally
saved profile and directory files.
• You can downgrade system software to a minimum version 6.0.0.
Upgrade or Downgrade Software through Software Server

You can manually install RealPresence Group Series system software updates from the Polycom server
or your own web server.
Procedure
1. Open a supported browser, and configure it to allow cookies.
2. In the browser address line, enter the IP address of the system using the format http://IPaddress
(for example, http://10.11.12.13).
3. In the system web interface, select Admin Settings.
If necessary, enter the Admin ID as the user name (default is admin), and then enter the Admin
4. Go to General Settings > Software Updates.
266
System Maintenance
5. Under Software Server in the Server Address field, enter the path and address of the update site
where you posted the system software (for example, http://10.11.12.100/
rpsystem_repo).
6. Click Check for Software Updates to have the system detect updates.
The system contacts the designated server to find available updates.
7. If the system indicates an update is available, click Start Update to install it.
8. When the Export Restrictions notice appears, click Accept Agreement.
Note: After the downgrade, if the system does not respond, perform a factory restore.
Upgrade or Downgrade Software through Local Drive

You can manually install RealPresence Group Series system software updates from the local drive.
Procedure
1. Open a supported browser, and configure it to allow cookies.
2. Navigate to Polycom Support.
4. Navigate to the page that has the desired software update for your system.
5. Save the software package (.tar) file to the local drive.
6. In the browser address line, enter the IP address of the system using the format http://IPaddress
(for example, http://10.11.12.13.)
7. In the system web interface, select Admin Settings.
8. Go to General Settings > Software Updates.
9. Under Manual Software Updates, select Browse to select the software package from your local
drive.
10. Select Start Transfer to have the system detect the file.
11. Select Start Update to install it.
12. When the Export Restrictions notice appears, select Accept Agreement.
Automatically Upgrade or Downgrade Software

You can automatically install RealPresence Group Series system software updates from the Polycom
server or your own web server.
Procedure
1. Open a supported browser and configure it to allow cookies.
267
System Maintenance
2. Enter the IP address of the system using the format http://IPaddress (for example, http://
10.11.12.13).
3. Go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Software Updates > Software Server.
4. In the Server Address field, enter the path and address of the update site where you posted the
system software (for example, http://10.11.12.100/rpsystem_repo).
5. Under Automatic Software Updates, select Automatically Check for and Apply Software
Updates.
6. When the Export Restrictions notice appears, click Accept Agreement.
a. Select Automatic Software Downgrade from Software Server to allow the RealPresence
Group Series system to downgrade the software.
b. Set the Hour, Minute, and AM/PM to specify the beginning of the time window within
which the system checks for updates.
c. From the Duration list, select the length of the time within which the system can check for
updates.
d. After the Start Time and Duration settings are configured, the system calculates a random
time within the defined update window at which to check for updates.
Duration values do not change. If the Start Time or Duration values change, a new
random time within the new time window is calculated.
8. Click Save.
For information about the latest software version, including version dependencies, refer to the release
notes for your system .
You can also have your system automatically check for and apply software updates. If your organization
uses a management system for provisioning endpoints, your system might get software updates
automatically.
Update System Software from a USB Storage Device

You can use a USB storage device to update one or multiple systems with a setup wizard to guide you
through the process.
The setup wizard is available during initial setup, after a system reset with system settings deleted, or
after using the factory restore button.
If the system is paired with a Polycom touch device, you cannot use the touch device USB port to update
the system software. If you use your system within a DoD environment, be sure to contact your
Information Assurance Office (IAO) for approval before using a USB device with your system.
268
System Maintenance
Procedure
1. If you are updating to a major or minor release (x.y), obtain keys (.txt) for each system that you
want to update from the Polycom website.
2. Save the text file as sw_keys.txt and place it in the root directory of the USB storage device.
3. Open a browser and navigate to Polycom Support.
5. Navigate to the page that has the desired update for your system.
6. Save a software package (.tar) file from the Polycom website to the root directory of a USB
storage device.
7. Connect the USB storage device to the USB port on the back of the system.
The system detects the USB storage device and prompts you to confirm that you want to update
the software.
8. Click OK.
Follow the setup wizard instructions to complete the update.
Related Links
Downgrading System Software on page 270
Configure Your Web Server as the Update Site

You can post software to your web server and then configure the RealPresence Touch device to receive
updates.
Procedure
no extension:
• .tar.gz
• .txt
• .sig
• .plcm
2. Define a URL on your server that the RealPresence Touch can use for software updates, and
3. Go to support.polycom.com, and navigate to the page for the system that you use with the
RealPresence Touch.
4. Save and extract the RealPresence Touch operating system software package (.tar file) from the
Polycom website to the root directory of the web server.
Dynamic System Software Updates

You can use a Polycom RealPresence Resource Manager system to update multiple RealPresence
Group Series systems.
For more information about updating system software in dynamic mode, setting an automatic software
update policy, and testing a trial version software update package, refer to the Polycom RealPresence
Resource Manager System Operations Guide available at Polycom Support.
269
System Maintenance
Ensuring System Compatibility with Peripherals

If your RealPresence Group Series system is used with an EagleEye Producer, EagleEye Director, or a
Polycom touch device, such as a RealPresence Touch or Polycom Touch Control device, you must
ensure that the version of the system is compatible with the peripheral software version.
For additional details on software compatibility, see the release notes for the system version you are
going to use at Polycom Support.
If you need to update your Polycom system and your RealPresence Touch, or Polycom Touch Control,
complete your updates in this order:
• RealPresence Group Series system (which includes the Polycom EagleEye Producer and the
Polycom ®EagleEye™ Director update)
• RealPresence Touch or Polycom Touch Control device
Downgrading System Software

When your RealPresence Group Series system is provisioned with a provisioning server, such as
Polycom RealPresence Resource Manager, the system automatically detects software on the
provisioning server and downgrades to the software version on the provisioning server.
If your system is not provisioned, you can put the software package on a USB device to downgrade the
system to an earlier version.
Related Links
Preparing to Upgrade on page 265
Update System Software from a USB Storage Device on page 268
Determine the Software Version

Before you downgrade RealPresence Group Series system software, Polycom recommends that you
check the current system software version you are running.
Procedure
» In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Information > System Detail or
click the System link in the system web interface.
Delete System Settings

When you want to reinstall an older version of software with a USB device after upgrading to a later
version, Polycom recommends first deleting your RealPresence Group Series system settings.
Procedure
» In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics > Reset System and
select Delete System Settings.
270
Troubleshooting
Topics:
• General Troubleshooting
• View Remote Sessions on the System
• Placing a Test Call
• RealPresence Group System Indicator Lights
• EagleEye Producer Indicator Lights
• Audio and Video Tests
• System Diagnostics
• Viewing System Details on the Local Interface
• Provisioning Service Registration Failure
• Call Detail Report (CDR)
• Troubleshoot a Manual System Software Update
• Knowledge Base
• Before You Contact Polycom Technical Support
• Contacting Technical Support
General Troubleshooting
The following table provides general troubleshooting information, including symptoms, problems and
possible solutions for your RealPresence Group Series system.
Symptom Problem Solution
The system does not respond to the The remote control battery is not Charge the remote control battery.
remote control. charged.
The room lights operate in the 38 Turn off the room lights and try the
Kz range and interfere with the remote control again.
remote control signals.
A touch control device, such as the Only one device can be paired at a
RealPresence Touch, might be time. To use the remote control,
paired to the room system. unpair the touch control device.
When configured for Skype for the When the system is configured for
Business/Office 365 user Skype Mode by the system
experience, the system is paired to administrator, use the
the RealPresence Touch device. RealPresence Touch as the only
control device.
271
Troubleshooting
Symptom Problem Solution
Picture is blank on the main The room system is sleeping. This Pick up the remote control to wake
monitor. is normal after a period of inactivity. up the system.
The monitor remains blank after The monitor is powered off. Power on the monitor.
you pick up the remote control.
The monitor's power cord is not Connect the monitor's power cord
plugged in. and the power on the monitor.
The monitor is not correctly Verify that the monitor is connected

connected to the room system. correctly according to the set up
sheet that you received with the
system.
When using two monitors, the The room system is not configured In the system web interface, go to
second monitor is blank. for more than one monitor. Admin Settings > Audio/Video >
Monitors and configure the second
monitor to Auto or Manual.
Configure the other Monitor 2
settings.
You lost the administration You cannot access the Refer to the factory restore topics to
password for your system or administration settings without a learn how to reset your system.
device. valid password.
The system is experiencing video You have not configured the Refer to the following Lost Packet
issues during calls, such as packet Network Quality settings in the Recovery topic link.
loss. system web interface.
Related Links
Restoring and Resetting a System on page 258
Lost Packet Recovery and Dynamic Bandwidth Settings on page 80
View Remote Sessions on the System

You can view a list of remote sessions that are connected to the RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > Sessions.
2. In the system web interface, go to Admin Settings > General Settings > Date and Time > Time
in Call.
272
Troubleshooting
Placing a Test Call

To test a feature that is only available in an active video call, you can call a Polycom test number.
Polycom support is available to assist you when you encounter difficulties. First though, If you are having
problems making a call, try the troubleshooting tips and then call our test numbers. When you finish
configuring the RealPresence Group Series system, you can call a Polycom video site to test your setup.
You can find a list of worldwide numbers that you can use to test your system at www.polycom.com/
videotest.
When placing test calls, try these ideas:
• Make sure the number you dialed is correct, then try the call again. For example, you might need to
dial 9 for an outside line or include a long distance access or country code.
• To find out if the problem exists in your system, ask the person you were trying to reach to call you
instead.
• Find out if the system you are calling is powered on and is functioning properly.
• If you can make calls but not receive them, make sure that your system is configured with the
correct number.
RealPresence Group System Indicator Lights

RealPresence Group Series 300, 310, and 500 Indicator Lights
Indicator lights and power sensors display when the system or device is powered on. The following figure
shows the location of the power sensor and indicator light on the front of the RealPresence Group 300,
310, and 500 systems.
1 LED indicator light
2 IR receiver
3 Power sensor
Use the USB port for any USB 2.0 device. If your RealPresence Group 700 system operates with the
Maximum Security Profile, the status display area does not display the software version or IP address.
RealPresence Group Series 700 Indicator Lights

The following figure identifies the features on the front of the RealPresence Group 700 system.
273
Troubleshooting
1 LED indicator light
2 Power sensor
3 Status display area
4 USB 2.0 port
5 Restore button
RealPresence Group Series Indicator Status

The following table includes the status for the LED indicators that display on the RealPresence Group
Series system.
LED off Off
Amber Sleep
Blue On
Not in a call
Green In an audio or a video call
Red Microphones muted
Blinking blue System starting
Blinking blue and amber Software update
EagleEye Producer Indicator Lights

An LED is integrated into the front of the EagleEye Producer unit. Different LED lights refer to different
system states. These allow you to identify the current system state for the EagleEye Producer system.
Detailed LED and system states mappings are shown in the following table.
274
Troubleshooting
LED Indicator Lights System State
LED System State
Blue Power On, EagleEye Producer Normal State
Blinking Blue On, Not in a Call, Receive IR

EagleEye Producer Boot Up
Fast Blinking Blue Calibrate Webcam Room View
Amber Standby - Asleep
Blinking Amber USB disk plugged in
Green On, In a call
Blinking Green On, In a call, Receive IR in a call
Fast Blinking Red System error
Blink Needs attention, Receive IR
Audio and Video Tests

You can perform audio and video diagnostic tests on your RealPresence Group Series system.
Speaker Test Tests the audio cable connections. A 473 Hz tone

indicates that the local audio connections are correct.
If you run a test during a call, people on the far site also
hear the test tone.
Audio Meters Measures the strength of audio signals from

microphones, far-site audio, and any device connected
to the audio line in.
Meters function only when the associated input is
enabled.
275
Troubleshooting
Camera Tracking Provides diagnostics specific to the EagleEye Director,

if the camera is connected to the system.
Audio
• Verifies microphone functionality. To use this
feature, speak aloud and verify that you can see
dynamic signal indications for two vertical
microphones and five horizontal microphones. If no
signal indication appears for a specific microphone,
manually power off the EagleEye Director and then
power it back on.
• Also verifies the reference audio signal: Set up a
video call. Let the far side speak aloud and verify
that you can see dynamic signal indications for the
two reference audio meters. If no signal indication
appears for a specific microphone, firmly connect
the reference cable.
After you verify microphone functionality, calibrate the
camera again.
Video
• Right Camera shows video from the right camera.
Note: If you connect EagleEye Director but don’t

selected it as the current camera source, this
choice doesn’t display on the screen.
Related Links
Audio Meters on page 276
Audio Meters
Audio meters show you real-time audio input and output signals for your RealPresence Group Series
system, including microphones, far-site audio, and other connected audio devices. To avoid or fix audio
distortion, you can configure the Audio Meter setting in the local or web interface.
The meters help you identify the left and right audio channels on the system.
Related Links
Audio and Video Tests on page 275
Access Diagnostic Screens in the Local Interface on page 277
276
Troubleshooting
Set Audio Meter Levels

You can set audio meter levels for your RealPresence Group Series system so that normal and loud
audio peaks are within an acceptable audio range.
Procedure
• In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > Audio and Video Tests > Audio Meter.
• In the local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics > Audio Meter.
2. To test the audio levels, do one of the following:
• To check the near-site audio, speak into your microphones.
• To check the far-site audio, ask a call participant to speak or call a phone in the far-site room
to hear it ring.
3. For normal speech and program material, set the audio signal levels so that you see peaks
between +3 dB and +7 dB.
Occasional peaks of +12 dB to +16 dB with loud transient noises are acceptable. If you see +20
on the audio meter, the audio signal is 0 dBFS and the audio might be distorted. A meter reading
of +20dB corresponds to 0dBFS in the room system audio. A signal at this level is likely clipping
the audio system.
System Diagnostics
To assist in troubleshooting, you can view RealPresence Group Series system diagnostics in either the
system web interface or the local interface.
Access Diagnostic Screens in the Web Interface

You can access RealPresence Group Series system diagnostics in the system web interface.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, go to Diagnostics > System > System Status.
2. For details, click More Info.
Access Diagnostic Screens in the Local Interface

You can access RealPresence Group Series system diagnostics in the system local interface.
Procedure
» In the system local interface, select Settings > System Information > Diagnostics.
This screen includes the following system diagnostic details:
277
Troubleshooting
Near End Loop Tests the internal audio encoders and decoders,
the external microphones and speakers, the
internal video encoders and decoders, audio
hardware, and the external microphones, speakers,
cameras, and monitors.
Monitor 1 displays the video and plays the audio
that is sent to the far site in a call.
This test is not available when you are in a call.
Ping Tests whether the system can connect with a far-

site IP address that you specify.
PING returns abbreviated Internet Control Message
Protocol results. It returns H.323 information only if
the far site is configured for H.323. It returns SIP
information only if the far site is configured for SIP.
If the test is successful, the system displays a
message.
Trace Route Tests the routing path between the local system
and the IP address entered.
If the test is successful, the system lists the hops
between the system and the IP address you
entered.
Color Bars Tests the color settings of your monitor for optimum
picture quality.
If the color bars generated during the test aren’t
clear or the colors don’t look correct, adjust the
monitor settings.
Speaker Test Tests the audio cable connections. A 473 Hz tone

indicates that the local audio connections are
correct.
If you run a test during a call, people on the far site
also hear the test tone.
Audio Meters Measures the strength of audio signals from

microphones, far-site audio, and any device
connected to the audio line in.
Meters function only when the associated input is
enabled.
278
Troubleshooting
Camera Tracking Provides diagnostics specific to the EagleEye

Director, if the camera is connected to the system.
Audio
• Verifies microphone functionality. To use this
feature, speak aloud and verify that you can see
dynamic signal indications for two vertical
microphones and five horizontal microphones. If
no signal indication appears for a specific
microphone, manually power off the EagleEye
Director and then power it back on.
• Also verifies the reference audio signal: Set up
a video call. Let the far side speak aloud and
verify that you can see dynamic signal
indications for the two reference audio meters.
If no signal indication appears for a specific
microphone, firmly connect the reference cable.
After you verify microphone functionality, calibrate
the camera again.
Video
• Right Camera shows video from the right
camera.
Note: If you connect EagleEye Director but don’t

selected it as the current camera source,
this choice doesn’t display on the screen.
Sessions Displays the following information about each

session connected to the system:
• Connection type, such as web or local interface
• ID associated with the session, typically Admin
or User
• Remote IP address (addresses of people
logged in to the system from their computers)
279
Troubleshooting
Reset System Note: Do not use this setting unless your

administrator tells you to do so.
Even if a password is already set, enter the
password again to reset the system.
Returns the system to its default settings. When
you select this setting using the remote control, you
can do the following:
• Keep your system settings (such as system
name and network configuration) or restore
system settings.
• Keep or delete the directory stored on the
system. System reset does not affect the global
directory.
• Keep or delete all PKI certificates and certificate
revocation lists (CRLs).
Before you reset the system, you might ask your
administrator to download the Call Detail Report
(CDR) and CDR archive. For more information
about these reports, contact your administrator.
Related Links
Audio Meters on page 276
Viewing System Details on the Local Interface

You might need to view certain RealPresence Group Series system details on the local interface to do
video conferencing tasks, such as pairing, or to perform troubleshooting tests to provide information for
your own testing or for technical support. You can also review information about calls, network usage, and
performance on the various system screens in the local interface.
Available system menus vary based on how your administrator configured the system. Therefore, this
section might describe settings that you cannot access on your system. To find out more about these
settings, please talk to your administrator.
The System Information screen has the following choices:
• Information
• Status
• Diagnostics
• Call Statistics (in a call only)
Access the Information Screen

You can access RealPresence Group Series system status screen in the local interface.
Procedure
» Go to > System Information > Information to view the following system details.
280
Troubleshooting
System Detail Displays the following system information:

• System Name
• Model
• Hardware Version
• System Software
• Serial Number
• MAC Address
• IP Address
Network Displays the following network information:

• IP Address
• Host Name
• 323 Name
• 323 Extension (E.164)
• SIP Address
• Link-Local
• Site-Local
• Global Address
Usage Displays the following usage information:

• Time in Last Call
• Total Time in Calls
• Total Number of Calls
• System Up Time
Access the Status Screen

You can access RealPresence Group Series system status screen in the local interface.
Procedure
» Go to > System Information > Status.
When a system device or service encounters a problem, you see an alert next to the Settings
button on the menu. This screen includes the following system status details for the out of a call
status:
281
Troubleshooting
Status Screen Description
Active Alerts Displays the status of any device or service listed

within the Status screens that has a current status
indicator of red. Alerts are listed in the order they
occurred. When a system device or service
encounters a problem, you see an alert next to the
Settings button on the menu.
Call Control Displays the status of the Auto-Answer Point-to-

Point Video and Meeting Password settings.
Audio Displays the connection status of audio devices

such as the microphones and SoundStation IP.
EagleEye Director Displays the connection status of the EagleEye

Director, if one is connected. If the camera system
is not connected, this choice is not visible on the
screen.
VisualBoard Displays the connection status of the VisualBoard,

if one is connected. If VisualBoard is not
connected, this choice is not visible on the screen.
LAN Displays the connection status of the IP network.
Servers • Always displays the Gatekeeper and SIP

Registrar Server.
• Displays the active Global Directory Server,
LDAP Server, or Microsoft Server.
• If enabled, displays the Provisioning Service,
Calendaring Service, or Presence Service.
Servers • Displays the Gatekeeper and SIP Registrar

Server status.
• Displays the active Global Directory Server,
LDAP Server, or Microsoft Server status.
• If enabled, displays the Provisioning Service,
Calendaring Service, or Presence Service
status.
Log Management Displays the status of the Log Threshold setting.

You can download system logs, call detail reports,
and configuration profiles using the system web
interface.
When a system device or service encounters a problem, you see an alert next to the Settings button on
the menu. This screen includes the following system status details for in a call status:
• If the RealPresence Group Series system detects an EagleEye Director, a status line for the device
is displayed.
• When a change occurs in the system status or a potential problem exists, you see an alert next to
the System button on the menu.
282
Troubleshooting
Status Screen Description
Call Statistics Displays information about the call in progress. In

multipoint calls, the Call Statistics screens show
most of this information for all systems in the call.
Related Links
View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call With the Remote Control on page 283
View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call With the Remote
Control
You might need to view call statistics on the RealPresence Group Series system local interface to do
some troubleshooting for users. You can only view call statistics during a call. During a point-to-point call,
you can view call statistics about a call participant or about an active stream. As a shortcut during a call,
press the Back button on your remote control for two or more seconds to display the Call Statistics
screen.
Procedure
» Go to System Information > Call Statistics.
Streams associated with the participant are displayed beneath the participant information. To view
more information about a specific stream, navigate to the desired stream and select More
Information.
Related Links
Access the Status Screen on page 281
View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call with the Remote
Control
During a RealPresence Group Series system multipoint call, you can view call statistics about any of the
call participants or about an active stream.
Procedure
1. Go to > System Information > Call Statistics.
A list of participants in the call displays.
• To view a participant's details, select Participants, navigate to the desired participant, and
select More Information. The participants' active streams are displayed beneath the
participant information.
• To quickly access information about a particular stream or streams associated with a
particular user, navigate to Streams for calls using Advanced Video Coding (AVC) or
Participant Streams for calls using Scalable Video Coding (SVC). Use the Back and Next
Participant buttons to navigate to the participant with the stream or streams you want to
view. Navigate to the desired stream and select More Information.
• To quickly access a list of all active audio, video, and content streams within the call,
navigate to Active Streams (available in SVC calls only). Select the desired stream, and
select More Information.
283
Troubleshooting
View Call Statistics for an Active Point-to-Point Call on the Polycom

Touch Control
During a point-to-point call, you can view call statistics about a call participant or about an active stream.
Procedure
1. Touch Participants.
Participant information displays.
2. Touch View Call Statistics.
Streams associated with the participant are displayed beneath the participant information. To view
more information about a specific stream, navigate to the desired stream and touch . From an
individual stream view you can touch Next Stream to view the next stream in the list.
View Call Statistics for an Active Multipoint Call on the Polycom

Touch Control
During a multipoint call, you can view call statistics about any of the call participants or about an active
stream.
Procedure
1. Touch Participants. A list of participants in the call displays.
2. Touch View Call Statistics and do one of the following:
• To view a participant's details, navigate to the desired participant, and touch .
• The participants' active streams are displayed beneath the participant information. To view
more information about a specific stream, navigate to the desired stream and touch "I".
• From an individual stream view you can select Next Stream to view the next stream in the
stream list. To quickly access a list of all active audio, video, and content streams within the
call, navigate to Active Streams. This setting is available in SVC calls only. Select the
desired stream and touch "I".
Provisioning Service Registration Failure

If automatic provisioning is enabled but the RealPresence Group Series system does not register
successfully with the provisioning service, you might need to change the Domain, User Name, Password,
or Server Address used for registration. For example, users might be required to periodically reset
passwords used to log into the network from a computer. If such a network password is also used as the
provisioning service password, you must also update it on the system. To avoid unintentionally locking a
user out of network access in this case, systems do not automatically retry registration until you update
the settings and register manually on the Provisioning Service screen.
Call Detail Report (CDR)

When enabled, the Call Detail Report (CDR) feature keeps a record of every incoming, outgoing, and
missed call that occurs on the system. If a call does not connect, the report shows the reason. In
multipoint calls, each far site is shown as a separate call, but all have the same conference number.
284
Troubleshooting
The CDR database is limited to the 150 most recent entries. If you are concerned about tracking all CDR
records, ensure that you download the records at regular intervals so that the limit of 150 entries is not
exceeded and records are not lost.
The size of a CDR can become unmanageable if you don't download the record periodically. A full report
with 150 entries results in a CDR of approximately 50 KB. Your connection speed can also affect how fast
the CDR downloads. You can set up a schedule to download and save the CDR after every 120 calls to
keep track of all call entries and make the file easy to download and view.
Note: The RealPresence Resource Manager system captures CDR information for the EagleEye
Producer and the EagleEye Director II cameras and generates it to the RealPresence Resource
Manager system CDR. The call details include People Minutes and People Count (Call Begin)
at the beginning of a call and People Count (Peak Value) at the end of a call.
Data Description
Row ID Each call is logged on the first available row. A call is a

connection to a single site, so there might be more than
one call in a conference.
Start Date The call start date, in the format dd-mm-yyyy.
Start Time The call start time, in 24-hour format hh:mm:ss.
End Date The call end date.
End Time The call end time.
Call Duration The length of the call.
Account Number If Require Account Number to Dial is enabled on the

system, the value entered by the user is displayed in
this field.
Remote System Name The far site’s system name.
Call Number 1 The number dialed from the first call field, not
necessarily the transport address.
For incoming calls — The caller ID information from the
first number received from a far site.
Call Number 2 For outgoing calls — The number dialed from the
second call field, not necessarily the transport address.
(If applicable for call)
For incoming calls — The caller ID information from the
second number received from a far site.
Transport Type The type of call — Either H.323 (IP) or SIP.
Call Rate The bandwidth negotiated with the far site.
System Manufacturer The name of the system manufacturer, model, and

software version, if they can be determined.
285
Troubleshooting
Data Description
Call Direction In—For calls received.

Out—For calls placed from the system.
Conference ID A number given to each conference. A conference can

include more than one far site, so there might be more
than one row with the same conference ID.
Call ID Identifies individual calls within the same conference.
Total H.320 Channels Used Number of narrow-band channels used in the call.
Endpoint Alias The alias of the far site.
Reserved Polycom use only.
View Name Names the web or local interface used in the call.
User ID Lists the ID of the user who made the call.
Endpoint Transport Address The actual address of the far site (not necessarily the
address dialed).
Audio Protocol (Tx) The audio protocol transmitted to the far site, such as
G.728 or G.722.1.
Audio Protocol (Rx) The audio protocol received from the far site, such as
G.728 or G.722.
Video Protocol (Tx) The video protocol transmitted to the far site, such as
H.263 or H.264.
Video Protocol (Rx) The video protocol received from the far site, such as
H.261 or H.263.
Video Format (Tx) The video format transmitted to the far site, such as
CIF or SIF.
Video Format (Rx) The video format received from the far site, such as
CIF or SIF.
Disconnect Local ID and Disconnect Reason The identity of the user who initiated the call and the
reason the call was disconnected.
Q.850 Cause Code The Q.850 cause code showing how the call ended.
Total H.320 Errors The number of H.320 errors experienced during the
call.
286
Troubleshooting
Data Description
Average Percent of Packet Loss (Tx) The combined average of the percentage of both audio
and video packets transmitted that were lost during the
five seconds preceding the moment at which a sample
was taken. This value does not report a cumulative
average for the entire call. However, it does report an
average of the sampled values.
Average Percent of Packet Loss (Rx) The combined average of the percentage of both audio
and video packets received that were lost during the
five seconds preceding the moment at which a sample
was taken. This value does not report a cumulative
average for the entire call. However, it does report an
average of the sampled values.
Average Packets Lost (Tx) The number of packets transmitted that were lost
during a call.
Average Packets Lost (Rx) The number of packets from the far site that were lost
during a call.
Average Latency (Tx) The average latency of packets transmitted during a

call based on round-trip delay, calculated from sample
tests done once per minute.
Average Latency (Rx) The average latency of packets received during a call
based on round-trip delay, calculated from sample tests
done once per minute.
Maximum Latency (Tx) The maximum latency for packets transmitted during a
Maximum Latency (Rx) The maximum latency for packets received during a
Average Jitter (Tx) The average jitter of packets transmitted during a call,
calculated from sample tests done once per minute.
Average Jitter (Rx) The average jitter of packets received during a call,
Maximum Jitter (Tx) The maximum jitter of packets transmitted during a call,
Maximum Jitter (Rx) The maximum jitter of packets received during a call,
Call Priority The AS-SIP call precedence level assigned to the call
(populated only when AS-SIP is enabled on the
system).
287
Troubleshooting
Related Links
Participant Count CDR Details on page 183
Enable the Call Detail Report

Enable the Call Detail Report feature to keep a record of the system's most recent call entries. When
enabled, you can download call records and view the room system's call history. Within five minutes after
ending a call, the CDR is written to memory. You can download the data in CSV format for sorting and
formatting.
Procedure
Recent Calls.
2. Under Recent Calls, mark the Call Detail Report check box.
Download a Call Detail Report (CDR)

You can download a CDR using the RealPresence Group Series system web interface.
Procedure
1. In the system web interface, click Utilities > Services > Call Detail Report (CDR).
2. Click Most Recent Call Report and then specify whether to open or save the file on your
computer.
Troubleshoot a Manual System Software Update

If your system does not successfully perform a software update, you can use Polycom best practices to
troubleshoot the issue.
If you entered polycom as the server address, it should resolve as downloads.polycom.com to an IP
address using DNS. The RealPresence Group Series system then checks for a software update using
http protocol. If this does not occur, do the following.
Procedure
1. On a local computer, open a supported browser on the same network as the system.
2. Try to access http://downloads.polycom.com/video/group_series/rseries/info.txt.
a. If successful, it will return platform, which signifies that you can connect to the Polycom
software server from your location.
b. If not successful, you did not connect to the Polycom server. Your network might be
blocking the link; contact your IT department to help troubleshoot the issue. If this does not
resolve the problem, the server might be down. Contact Polycom Support to learn the
server status.
Knowledge Base
For more troubleshooting information for your RealPresence Group Series system, you can search the
Knowledge Base at Polycom Support.
288
Troubleshooting
Before You Contact Polycom Technical Support

If you are not able to make test calls successfully and you have verified that the equipment is installed
and set up correctly, contact your Polycom distributor or Polycom Technical Support at Polycom Support.
Enter the following information about your RealPresence Group Series system, then ask a question or
describe the problem. This information helps us to respond faster to your issue. In addition, please
provide any diagnostic tests or troubleshooting steps that you have already tried.
Locate the System Serial Number

You can view the system serial number on the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
» To locate the system serial number (14 digits), go to Settings > System Information >
Information > System Detail or locate the number on the back of the system.
Locate the Software Version

You can view the software version on the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
» To locate the software version, go to Settings > System Information > Information > System
Detail.
Locate Active Alert Messages

You can view the active alert messages on the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
» To locate the active alert messages, go to Settings > System Information > Status > Active
Alerts for messages generated by your system.
Locate the IP Address and H.323 Extension Settings

You can view IP Address and H.323 extension settings on the local interface of the RealPresence Group
Series system.
Procedure
» To locate the IP Address and H.323 Extension settings, go to Settings > System Information >
Information > Network.
Locate the LAN Status

You can view the LAN status on the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
» In the system web interface, go to Settings > System Information >Status > LAN.
289
Troubleshooting
Locate Diagnostics on the Local Interface

You can view diagnostics on the local interface of the RealPresence Group Series system.
Procedure
» In the system local interface, go to Settings > System Information > Diagnostics.
Contacting Technical Support

If you are not able to make test calls successfully on your RealPresence Group Series system and you
have verified that the equipment is installed and set up correctly, contact your Polycom distributor or
Polycom Technical Support.
To contact Polycom Technical Support, go to Polycom Support.
Enter the following information, then ask a question or describe the problem. This information helps us to
respond faster to your issue:
• The 14-digit serial number from the System Detail screen or the back of the system
• The software version from the System Detail screen
• Any active alerts generated by the system
• Information about your network
• Troubleshooting steps you have already tried
You can find the system detail information in the local interface by going to Settings > System
Information > Information or in the system web interface by clicking System in the blue bar at the top of
the system web interface screen.
Polycom Solution Support

Polycom Implementation and Maintenance services provide support for Polycom solution components,
such as RealPresence Group Series systems, only. Additional services for supported third-party Unified
Communications (UC) environments integrated with Polycom solutions are available from Polycom Global
Services, and its certified Partners, to help customers successfully design, deploy, optimize, and manage
Polycom visual communication within their third-party UC environments. UC Professional Services for
Microsoft Integration is mandatory for Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook, Skype for Business
Server 2015 integrations. For additional information and details please refer to http://www.polycom.com/
services/professional_services/index.html or contact your local Polycom representative.
290
System Panel Views
Topics:
• Polycom RealPresence Group 300 System

• Polycom RealPresence 500 System
The following section provides information on the RealPresence Group Series system back panel views.
Related Links
Setting Up a Microphone on page 22
Available Microphone Inputs by System on page 22
SoundStructure Digital Mixer on page 23
Polycom RealPresence Group 300 System

The following figure and accompanying table below shows how the system web interface settings relate
to hardware input and outputs on the back of the RealPresence Group 300 system.
Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
Ref. Number Admin Settings > Input/ Output Formats Description
1 Audio/Video > Video Video Input HDCI Input for the camera
Inputs > Input 1
2 N/A Microphone Input Polycom Audio input for up to

Microphone two Polycom
microphone arrays
or a SoundStation
IP 7000 speaker
phone or
SoundStructure
mixer
291
System Panel Views
Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
3 Audio/Video > Audio Output 3.5mm Stereo Audio output for

Audio > Audio main monitor audio
Output or external speaker
system
System tones and
sound effects +
Audio from the far
site +
4 Audio/Video > Video Output 1 • HDMI version Output for Monitor 1

Monitors > Monitor 1.3 with
1 embedded audio
• DVI-D

Monitors > Monitor 1.3 (available only with
2 a monitor option
• DVI-D
key)
6 N/A USB Connectors USB 2.0 USB for Software

Update, remote
control battery
charging
7 General Settings > Serial Port RS-232 Serial port

Serial Ports
8 Network > LAN LAN Port Ethernet Connectivity for IP

Properties and SIP calls,
People+Content IP,
and the system web
interface
9 N/A Power Input 12 V 6.25 A Power input

292
System Panel Views
Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
1 Audio/Video > Video Video Input 1 HDCI Input for Camera 1

Inputs > Input 1
2 Audio/Video > Video Video Input 2/Audio HDMI version 1.3 Auxiliary video and
Inputs > Input 2 Input 1 audio input
Audio/Video >
Audio > Audio Input
> Type: HDMI
3 Audio/Video > Video Video Input 2 VGA Video input for

Inputs > Input 2 Content
Note: Use either the HDMI or VGA video input, but not both.
4 Audio/Video > Audio Input 2 3.5mm Stereo Stereo line-level

Audio > Audio Input input
> Type: 3.5mm
3.5mm audio is
independent and
not associated with
any video input

Microphone two Polycom
microphone arrays
or a SoundStation
IP 7000 speaker
phone or
SoundStructure
mixer
6 Audio/Video > Audio Output 1 3.5mm Stereo Audio output for

system
Audio Mix Routed to
the Output:
System tones and
sound effects +
Audio from the far
site + Audio
connected to audio
input 2 when
associated with
video input 2
293
System Panel Views
Location in Web
Interface:
Supported

When format is
1 embedded audio
HDMI, audio output
• DVI-D for main monitor
audio
Audio Mix Routed to
the Output:
System tones and
sound effects +
Audio from the far
site + Audio
connected to audio
input 2 when
associated with
video input 2
8 Audio/Video > Video Output 2 • HDMI version Output for Monitor

Monitors > Monitor 1.3 2; does not include
2 audio
• DVI-D
NOTE:
RealPresence
Group 310 systems
require a dual
monitor option key
to allow dual
monitor output.
9 N/A USB Connectors USB 2.0 USB for software

update, remote
control battery
charging

Serial Ports

Properties calls, People
+Content IP, and
the system web
interface
Polycom RealPresence 500 System

294
System Panel Views
Location in Web
Interface:
Supported

Inputs > Input 1
2 Audio/Video > Video Video Input 2/Audio HDMI version 1.3 Auxiliary video and
Inputs > Input 2 Input 1 audio input
Audio/Video >
Audio > Audio Input
> Type: HDMI
3 Audio/Video > Video Video Input 2 VGA Video input for

Inputs > Input 2 Content
Note: Use either the HDMI or VGA video input, but not both.
4 Audio/Video > Audio Input 2 3.5mm Stereo Stereo line-level

Audio > Audio Input input
> Type: 3.5mm
3.5mm audio is
independent and
not associated with
any video input

Microphone four Polycom
microphone arrays
or a SoundStation
IP 7000 speaker
phone or
SoundStructure
mixer
295
System Panel Views
Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
6 Audio/Video > Audio Output 1 3.5mm Stereo Audio output for

system
Audio Mix Routed to
the Output:
System tones and
sound effects +
Audio from the far
site + Audio
connected to audio
input 2 when
associated with
video input 2

When format is
1 embedded audio
HDMI, audio output
• DVI-D for main monitor
audio
Audio Mix Routed to
the Output:
System tones and
sound effects +
Audio from the far
site + Audio
connected to audio
input 2 when
associated with
video input 2
8 Audio/Video > Video Output 2 HDMI version 1.3 Output for Monitor
Monitors > Monitor 2; does not include
DVI-D
2 audio
9 N/A USB Connectors USB 2.0 USB for software

update, remote
control battery
charging

Serial Ports

+Content IP, and
the system web
interface
296
System Panel Views
Location in Web
Interface:
Supported

The figure and accompanying table below shows how the system web interface settings relate to
hardware input and outputs on the back of the RealPresence Group 700 system.
Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
1 N/A Power Input 100-240 VAC 2.3 A Power input

Inputs > Input 1
3 Audio/Video > Video Video Input 1 HDMI version 1.4 Input for Camera 1
Inputs > Input 1

Inputs > Input 2
5 Audio/Video > Video Video Input 2 HDMI version 1.4 Input for Camera 2
Inputs > Input 2
Note: Use either the HDCI or HDMI for video inputs 1 and 2, but not both.
6 Audio/Video > Video Video Input 3 VGA Video input

Inputs > Input 3 associated with
audio input 3
297
System Panel Views
Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
7 Audio/Video > Audio Input 3 3.5mm Stereo Audio input for

Audio > Audio Input stereo line-level
> Type: 3.5mm
Audio is included in
local audio mix
when video source
is selected
3.5mm audio is
independent and
not associated with
any video input
8 Audio/Video > Video Video Input 3 HDMI version 1.4 Video and audio
Inputs > Input 3 input
Note: Use either the HDMI or VGA for video input 3, but not both.
9 Audio/Video > Video Video Input 4 Composite Video Video input

Inputs > Input 4
Associated with
audio input 4 (audio
is disabled until
video input 4 is
selected)
10 Audio/Video > Video Video Input 4 Component Video Video input

Inputs > Input 4 associated with
audio input 4 (audio
is disabled until
video input 4 is
selected)
11 Audio/Video > Audio Input 4 RCA Associated with

Audio > Audio Input video input 4
> Type: Component
Inactive until video
input is selected
Audio is included in
local audio mix
when video source
is selected
Note: Use either the Composite/RCA or Component for input 4, but not both.
12 Audio/Video > Audio Input 2 RCA Auxiliary audio input

Audio > Audio Input
Intended as
> Type: Line
microphone input;
sent to far end only
298
System Panel Views
Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
13 N/A Audio Input 1 Polycom Audio input for up to

Microphone four Polycom
microphone arrays
or a SoundStation
IP 7000 speaker
phone or
SoundStructure
mixer
14 N/A Audio Output 2 RCA Audio output for

main monitor audio
Audio Mix Routed to
the Output:
System tones and
sound effects +
Audio from the far
site + Audio input
from audio inputs 3
and 4 when
associated video is
selected
15 Audio/Video > Video Output 1 VGA Output for Monitor 1

Monitors > Monitor
1
16 Audio/Video > Video Output 1 HDMI version 1.3 Output for Monitor 1
Monitors > Monitor
Audio Output 1 Audio Mix Routed to
1
the Output:
System tones and
sound effects +
Audio from the far
site + Audio input
from audio inputs 3
and 4 when
associated video is
selected

Monitors > Monitor
2
18 Audio/Video > Video Output 2 HDMI version 1.3 Output for Monitor 2
Monitors > Monitor
2

Monitors > Monitor
3
299
System Panel Views
Location in Web
Interface:
Supported
20 Audio/Video > Video Output 3 HDMI version 1.3 Video and audio
Monitors > Monitor output for Monitor 3.
Audio Output 3
3 Audio output (near-
end + far-end +
content) when set
for recording
Note: Use either the HDMI or VGA for video outputs 1, 2, and 3, but not both.

Serial Ports
22 N/A USB Connectors USB 3.0 USB for Software

Update, remote
USB 2.0
control battery
charging
23 Network > LAN PC LAN Port Ethernet Ethernet switch port

Properties > LAN
Options

+Content IP, and
the system web
interface
300
Port Usage
Topics:
• Inbound Ports for RealPresence Group Series

• Outbound Ports for RealPresence Group Series
Inbound Ports for RealPresence Group Series

IP port usage information for your system is important when you are setting up new videoconferencing
equipment and you must know the type, protocol, or function of the port, and if it is configurable.
The following table shows the IP port usage for inbound traffic to RealPresence Group Series systems.
Configuration
On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
Inbound Security Enable/ e Port
Port Type Protocol Function Profile) Disable? Number
22 Static TCP Secure API Yes Admin No

Settings >
Security>
Global
Security >
Access
Enable SSH
Access:
Enable to
open port 22
22 Static TCP Polycom Yes Admin No

Touch Settings >
Control over General
SSH Settings >
Pairing >
Polycom
Touch
Device>
Enable
Polycom
Touch Device
301
Port Usage
Configuration
On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
23 Static TCP Telnet No Admin No

Diagnostics Settings >
Security >
Global
Security >
Access >
Enable Telnet
Access
24 Static TCP Polycom API No Admin No

Settings >
Security >
Global
Security >
Access >
Enable Telnet
Access
80 Static TCP Web UI over Yes Admin Admin

HTTP Settings > Settings >
Security > Security >
RealPresenc
Global Global
e Touch over
Security > Security >
HTTP
Access > Access >
Enable Web Web Access
Access Port (http)
- Disables
HTTP and
HTTPS port
Admin
Settings >
Security >
Global
Security >
Access >
Restrict to
HTTPS
- Disables
HTTP port
302
Port Usage
Configuration
On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
161 Static UDP SNMP No Admin Admin

Settings > Settings >
Security > Servers >
Global SNMP >
Security > Listening
Access > Port
Enable
SNMP
Access
Admin
Settings >
Servers >
SNMP >
Enable
SNMP
443 Static TLS Web UI over Yes Admin No

HTTPS Settings >
Security >
RealPresenc
Global
e Touch over
Security >
HTTPS
Access >
Enable Web
Access
1719 Static UDP H.225.0 RAS No Admin No

Settings >
Network > IP
Network > H.
323 > Use
Gatekeeper
1720 Static TCP H.225.0 Call Yes Admin No

Signaling Settings >
Network > IP
Network > H.
323 > Enable
IP H.323
303
Port Usage
Configuration
On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
5001 Static TCP People Yes Admin No

+Content™ IP Settings >
client Audio / Video
application > Video Input
for content > General
sharing. Camera
Used by Settings >
systems and Enable
the People
RealPresenc +Content IP
e Touch
device
5060 Static TCP SIP (Protocol Yes Admin No

depends on Settings >
UDP
Transport Network > IP
Protocol Network >
setting) SIP > Enable
SIP
Admin
Settings >
Network > IP
Network >
SIP >
Transport
Protocol
5061 Static TLS SIP Yes Admin No

Settings >
Network > IP
Network >
SIP > Enable
SIP
Admin
Settings >
Network > IP
Network >
SIP >
Transport
Protocol
304
Port Usage
Configuration
On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
49152- Dynamic TCP H.245 Yes Admin Admin

65535 Settings > Settings >
Network > IP Network > IP
Network > H. Network >
323 > Enable Firewall >
IP H.323 Fixed Ports >
TCP Ports
(1024-65535)
16384- Dynamic UDP RTP/RTCP Yes Admin Admin

32764(Defaul Video and Settings > Settings >
t) Audio Network > IP Network > IP
Network > H. Network >
323 > Enable Firewall >
IP H.323 Fixed Ports >
UDP Ports
Admin
(1024-65535)
Settings >
Network > IP
Network >
SIP > Enable
SIP
Outbound Ports for RealPresence Group Series

IP port usage information for your system is important when you are setting up new videoconferencing
equipment and must know the type, protocol, or function of the port, and if it is configurable.
The following table shows IP port usage for outbound traffic from RealPresence Group Series systems.
305
Port Usage
Configuration
On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
Outbound Security Enable/ e Port
80 Static TCP Polycom Yes Uncheck No

Product "Register"
Registration checkbox
for during the
RealPresenc setup wizard
e Group
Series
system
software
installation
and for the
RealPresenc
e Touch
device
123 Static UDP NTP Yes Admin No

Settings >
General
Settings >
Date and
Time >
System Time
> Time
Server
162 Static UDP SNMP TRAP No Admin Yes - Admin

Settings > Settings >
Servers > Servers >
SNMP > SNMP >
Enable Destination
SNMP Address
<1,2,3> >
Admin
Port
Settings >
Servers >
SNMP >
Destination
Address
<1,2,3>
306
Port Usage
Configuration
On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
389 Static TLS LDAP No Admin Yes

Settings >
- Admin
Servers >
Settings >
Directory
Servers >
Servers >
Directory
Server Type
Servers >
Server Type
= LDAP
- Admin
Settings >
Servers >
Directory
Servers >
Server Port
389 Static TLS LDAP to ADS No Admin No

(External Settings >
Authenticatio Security >
n) Global
Security >
Authenticatio
n > Enable
Active
Directory
External
Authenticatio
n
443 Static TLS RealPresenc No Admin No

e Resource Settings >
Management Servers >
(Provisioning, Provisioning
Monitoring, Service >
Softupdate) Enable
Provisioning
443 Static TLS Microsoft No Admin No

Exchange Settings >
Server Servers >
(Calendaring) Calendaring
Service >
Enable
Calendaring
Service
307
Port Usage
Configuration
On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
443 Static TLS Microsoft No Admin No

Skype Settings >
Address Servers >
Book Directory
Servers >
Server Type
514 Static UDP SYSLOG No Diagnostics > Yes -

System > outgoing port
System Log can be
Settings > specified in
Enable the Remote
Remote Log Server
Logging Address
field.
Diagnostics >
System >
System Log
Settings >
Remote Log
Server
Transport
Protocol =
UDP
601 Static TCP SYSLOG No Diagnostics > Yes -

System Log can be
Enable the Remote
Remote Log Server
Logging Address
field.
Diagnostics >
System >
System Log
Settings >
Remote Log
Server
Transport
Protocol =
TCP
308
Port Usage
Configuration
On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
1718 Static UDP H.225.0 No Admin No

Gatekeeper Settings >
Discovery Network > IP
Network > H.
323 > Use
Gatekeeper =
Auto
1719 Static UDP H.225.0 RAS No Admin Yes -

Settings > outgoing port
Network > IP can be
Network > H. specified in
323 > Use the Primary
Gatekeeper Gatekeeper
IP Address
field
1720 Static TCP H.225.0 Call Yes Admin No

Signaling Settings >
Network > IP
Network > H.
323 > Enable
IP H.323
3601 Static TCP GDS No Admin No

Settings >
Servers >
Directory
Servers >
Server Type
309
Port Usage
Configuration
On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
5060 Static UDP TCP SIP Yes Admin Yes -

Network > IP can be
Network > specified in
SIP > Enable the dial string
SIP (user@domai
n:port)
AND
Note that the
Admin
transport
Setting >
protocol used
Network > IP
depends on
Network >
Admin
SIP >
Settings >
Transport
Network > IP
Protocol =
Network >
Auto, TCP, or
SIP >
UDP
Transport
Protocol
5061 Static TLS SIP Yes Admin Yes -

Network > IP can be
Network > specified in
SIP > Enable the dial string
SIP (user@domai
n:port)
AND
Admin
Setting >
Network > IP
Network >
SIP >
Transport
Protocol =
Auto or TLS
5222 Static TCP RealPresenc No Provisioned No

e Resource by
Manager: RealPresenc
XMPP e Resource
Manager
310
Port Usage
Configuration
On By
Default?
(Low Configurabl
6514 Static TLS SYSLOG No Diagnostics > Yes -

System Log can be
Enable the Remote
Remote Log Server
Logging Address
field
Diagnostics >
System >
System Log
Settings >
Remote Log
Server
Transport
Protocol =
TLS
49152- Dynamic TCP H.245 Yes Admin Admin

65535 Settings > Settings >
Network > IP Network > IP
Network > Network >
Enable IP H. Firewall >
323 Fixed Ports >
TCP Ports
(1024-65535)
16384- Dynamic UDP RTP/RTCP Yes Admin Admin

32764 Video and Settings > Settings >
(Default) Audio Network > IP Network > IP
Network > Network >
Enable IP H. Firewall >
323 Fixed Ports >
UDP Ports
Admin
(1024-65535)
Settings >
Network > IP
Network >
Enable SIP
311
Security Profile Default Settings
Topics:
• Maximum Security Profile Default Settings

• High Security Profile Default Settings
• Medium Security Profile Default Settings
• Low Security Profile Default Settings
The RealPresence Group Series system has Maximum, High, Medium, and Low security profiles.
Related Links
Configure Security Profiles on page 82
Maximum Security Profile Default Settings

system. The following table shows the default values for specific settings when you use the Maximum
security profile.
Admin Settings Area Maximum
Range Default Value Configurable?
Place a Call
Contacts Search Box No value Yes
Speed Dial
Edit Search Box No value Yes
Manual Dial
Entry box No value Yes
VideoAudio Video Yes
Auto, 128, 256, 384, Auto Yes

512, 768, 1024, 1472,
1920, 2048, 3072,
3840, 4096, 6144
Auto, H.323, SIP Auto Yes
General Settings
System Settings
312
Call Settings
Auto Answer Point Yes, No, Do Not No Yes

to Point Video Disturb
Auto Answer Yes, No, Do Not No Yes

Multipoint Video Disturb
Recent Calls
Call Detail Report Checkbox Enabled Yes
Enable Recent Checkbox Disabled Yes

Calls
Home Screen Settings
Speed Dial Checkbox Disabled Yes
Calendar Checkbox Disabled Yes
Background Choose image file No file selected Yes
Startup Choose image file No file selected Yes

Background
Kiosk Mode Checkbox Disabled Yes
Home Screen Checkbox Disabled Yes

Icons
Address Bar None None Yes, for both the left and
right elements
IP Address
SIP Address
H.323 Extension
Pairing Code
RealPresence Choose image file No file selected Yes

Touch Background
Skype Mode Checkbox Disabled Yes
Pairing
313
Enable Polycom Touch Checkbox Disabled Yes

Device
Note: Disabling this
setting closes the SSH
port.
SmartPairing Disabled Disabled Read-only
Serial Ports
Mode
RS- Note: Off Off Yes

232 Some
Control
Mod systems
e support Camera Control
only a
Closed Caption
subset of
listed Pass Thru
modes.
Login Mode Range: None, Admin Admin password Yes

password only, only
Username/Password
Login prompt type None, Admin password Username/ Yes

only, Username/ Password
Password
Network
IP Network
Enable SIP Checkbox Enabled Yes
Transport Protocol Auto, TLS, TCP, UDP TLS Yes
Dialing Preference
Dialing Options
Scalable Video SVC then AVC SVC then AVC Yes

Coding Preference
AVC Only
(H.264)
Enable H.239 Checkbox Disabled Yes
Enable Audio-Only Checkbox Disabled Yes

Calls
314
TIP Checkbox Disabled Yes
Call Type Order Video Video Yes

Video Then Phone
Phone Then Video
VOICEDIALPREFERE
NCE_SIP_SPEAKERP
HONE (only displays if
Polycom SoundStation
IP 7000 is connected)
Video Dialing IP, H.323, SIP IP H.323 Yes

Order
Audio Dialing IP, H.323, SIP SIP Yes

Order Preference
1 (only displays if
Enable Audio-Only
Calls checkbox is
selected)
Audio Dialing IP, H.323, SIP H.323 Yes

Order Preference
2 (only displays if
Enable Audio-Only
Calls checkbox is
selected)
Audio/Video
Sleep
Enable Mic Mute in Checkbox Enabled Read-only

Sleep Mode
Video Inputs
General Camera Settings
Allow Other Checkbox Disabled Yes

Participant
s In a Call
to Control
Your
Camera
315
Enable Checkbox Disabled Yes

People
+Content
IP

Camera
Preset
Snapshot
Icons
Audio
Polycom Checkbox Disabled Yes

StereoSurround
Security
Global Security
Security Profile
Security Maximum Maximum Yes

Profile
High
Medium
Low
Authentication

Active
Directory
External
Authenticat
ion
Access
Enable Checkbox Enabled Yes

Network
Intrusion
Detection
System
(NIDS)

Web
Access
316
Allow Checkbox Disabled Yes

Access to
User
Settings
Restrict to Checkbox Enabled Read-only

HTTPS
Web 16-bit integer Grayed out (80) Read-only

access port
(http)
Note: You
cannot
select this
setting if
the
Restrict to
HTTPS
setting is
enabled.
Enable Checkbox Disabled Read-only

Telnet
Access

SNMP
Access
API
Port

SSH
Access
Lock Port Off, 2-10 Off Yes

after Failed
Logins
Port Lock 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30 1 minute Yes

Duration minutes,
1, 2, 4, 8 hours
Reset Port Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Lock
Counter
After
317

Allow List
Idle 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 10 Yes

Session 45, 60, 120, 240, 480
Timeout in
Minutes
Maximum 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 25 Yes

Number of 40, 45, 50
Active
Sessions
Encryption
Require Off Required for Video Yes

AES Calls Only
When Available
Encryption
for Calls Required for Video
Calls Only
Required for All Calls
Require Checkbox Enabled Yes

FIPS 140
Cryptograp
hy
Disable Checkbox Enabled Yes

TLS v1.0
Local Accounts
Account Lockout
Lock 2-10 3 Yes

Admin
Account
After Failed
Logins
Admin 1, 2, 3, 5 minutes 1 Yes

Account
Lock
Duration
Reset Off, [1..24] hours 1 Yes

Admin
Account
Lock
Counter
After
318
Lock User 2-10 3 Yes

Account
After Failed
Logins
User 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30 1 minute Yes

Account minutes,
Lock
1, 2, 4, 8 hours
Duration
Reset User Off, [1..24] hours 1 Yes

Account
Lock
Counter
After
Login Credentials
Use Room Checkbox Enabled Read-only

Password
for Remote
Access
Require Checkbox Enabled Yes

User Login
for System
Access
Password Requirements
Admin (Room, Remote), User (Room, Remote)
Reject 8-16 10 Yes

Previous
Passwords
Minimum Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

Password
Age in
Days
Maximum 30, 60, 90, 100, 110, 60 Yes

Password 120, 130, 140, 150,
Age in 160, 170, 180
Days
Minimum 1-4 4 Yes

Changed
Characters
319
Password 1-7 7 Yes

Expiration
Warning
Remote Access (Admin Remote, User Remote)
Minimum 8-16, 32 15 Yes

Length
Require Off, 1, 2, All 2 Yes

Lowercase
Letters

Uppercase
Letters

Numbers

Special
Characters
Maximum 1-4 2 Yes

Consecutiv
e Repeated
Characters
Can Checkbox Disabled Read-only

contain ID
or Its
Reverse
Form
User (Room), Admin (Room)

Length
Require Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Lowercase
Letters

Uppercase
Letters
Require Off,1,2,All Off Yes

Numbers
320

Special
Characters
Maximum 1-4 2 Yes

Consecutiv
e Repeated
Characters

contain ID
or Its
Reverse
Form
Meeting
Minimum Off, 1-20, 32 Off Yes

Length

Lowercase
Letters

Uppercase
Letters

Numbers

Special
Characters
Reject 8-16 10 Yes

Previous
Passwords

Password
Age in
Days
Maximum 1-4 2 Yes

Consecutiv
e Repeated
Characters
321
SNMP
Note: SNMP passwords are applicable only when the system uses SNMP v3.

Length

Lowercase
Letters

Uppercase
Letters

Numbers

Special
Characters
Reject 8-16 10 Yes

Previous
Passwords

Password
Age in
Days
Maximum 1-4 2 Yes

Consecutiv
e Repeated
Characters

contain ID
or Its
Reverse
Form
Security Banner
Enable Security Checkbox Enabled Yes

Banner
Banner Text DoDCustom DoD Yes
Local System Unicode characters, DoD Banner Text Yes

Banner Text 2048 bytes max
322
Remote System Unicode characters, DoD Banner Text Yes

Banner Text 2048 bytes max
Certificates
Certificate Options
Always Checkbox Enabled Yes

Validate
Peer
Certificates
from
Browser
Always Checkbox Enabled Yes

Validate
Peer
Certificates
from
Server
Revocation
Revocation OCSPCRL OCSP Yes

Method
Allow Checkbox Enabled Yes

Incomplete
Revocation
Checks
Servers
Directory Servers
Server Type Off Off Yes

Microsoft
LDAP
Polycom GDS
Registration Status N/A Disabled Read only
SNMP
Version1 Checkbox Disabled Yes
Version2c Checkbox Disabled Yes
Version3 Checkbox Enabled Yes
323
Provisioning Service Checkbox Disabled Yes
Calendaring Service

Calendaring
Service
Recording Service
Enable Recording Checkbox Disabled Yes

Service
Domain Name
User Name
Password
Server Address
Maximum
Default Configura
Diagnostics Area Range Value ble?
System
System Log Settings
Enable Remote Logging Checkbox Disabled Yes
Remote Log Server Transport Protocol UDP TLS Read only

TCP
TLS
Changing Maximum Security Profile Default Values

When you configure the system to use the Maximum Security Profile, the system forces you to change
the following settings from their default values:
• Admin account User Id
• User account User Id
• Admin room password
• Admin remote access password
• User room password
• User remote access password
324
Other Restrictions When Using the Maximum Security Profile

The following settings are not available in the “User Settings” menu (they are configurable only in their
respective sections of the Admin Settings):
• Camera > Allow Other Participants in a Call to Control Your Camera
• Meetings > Mute Auto Answer Calls
• Meetings > Auto Answer Point-to-Point Video
• Meetings > Auto Answer Multipoint Video
• Meetings > Allow Video Display on Web
High Security Profile Default Settings

system. The following table shows the default values for specific settings when you use the High security
profile.
Admin Settings Area High
Place a Call
Speed Dial
Manual Dial
Video Video Yes

Audio
Auto, 128, 256, 384, 512, Auto Yes

768, 1024, 1472, 1920,
2048, 3072, 3840, 4096,
6144
Auto Auto Yes

H.323
SIP
General Settings
System Settings
Call Settings
325
Auto Answer Point to Yes No Yes

Point Video
No
Do Not Disturb
Auto Answer Multipoint Yes No Yes

Video
No
Do Not Disturb
Recent Calls
Enable Recent Calls Checkbox Disabled Yes
Background Choose image file No file selected Yes
Startup Background Choose image file No file selected Yes
Home Screen Icons Checkbox Disabled Yes
Address Bar None None Yes, for both

the left and
IP Address
right elements
SIP Address
H.323 Extension
Pairing Code
RealPresence Touch Choose image file No file selected Yes

Background
Pairing

Device
Note: Disabling this setting
closes the SSH port.
326
SmartPairing Mode Disabled Disabled Yes

Automatic
Manual
Serial Ports
Mode
RS-232 Mode Off Off Yes

Note: Some Control
systems support
Camera Control
only a subset of
listed modes. Closed Caption
Pass Thru
Login Mode None, Admin password Admin password Yes

only, Username/Password only
Network
IP Network
Transport Protocol Auto TLS Yes

TLS
TCP
UDP
Dialing Preference
Scalable Video Coding SVC then AVC AVC Only Yes

Preference (H.264)
AVC Only
Dialing Options
Scalable Video Coding SVC then AVC SVC then AVC Yes
Preference (H.264)
AVC Only
Enable Audio-Only Calls Checkbox Disabled Yes
327

Video Then Phone
Phone Then Video
VOICEDIALPREFERENC
E_SIP_SPEAKERPHONE
(only displays if Polycom
SoundStation IP 7000 is
connected)
Video Dialing Order IP IP H.323 Yes

H.323
SIP
Audio Dialing Order IP SIP Yes

Preference 1 (only
H.323
displays if Enable Audio-
Only Calls checkbox is SIP
selected)
Audio Dialing Order IP H.323 Yes

Preference 2 (only
H.323
selected)
Audio/Video
Sleep
Enable Mic Mute in Checkbox Disabled Yes

Sleep Mode
Video Inputs

Participants In a
Call to Control
Your Camera
Enable People Checkbox Disabled Yes

+Content IP
Enable Camera Checkbox Disabled Yes

Preset Snapshot
Icons
328
Audio
Polycom Checkbox Disabled Yes

StereoSurround
Security
Global Security
Security Profile
Security Profile Maximum High Yes

High
Medium
Low
Authentication
Enable Active Checkbox Disabled Yes

Directory External
Authentication
Access
Enable Network Checkbox Enabled Yes

Intrusion
Detection System
(NIDS)
Enable Web Checkbox Enabled Yes

Access
Allow Access to Checkbox Disabled Yes

User Settings
Restrict to Checkbox Enabled Read-only

HTTPS
Web access port 16-bit integer Grayed out (80) Read-only

(http)
Note: You cannot
select this setting
if the Restrict to
HTTPS setting is
enabled.
Enable Telnet Checkbox Disabled Read-only

Access
329
Enable SSH Checkbox Enabled Yes

Access
Enable SNMP Checkbox Disabled Yes

Access
Lock Port after Off, 2-10 Off Yes

Failed Logins
Port Lock 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30 1 minute Yes

Duration minutes,
1, 2, 4, 8 hours
Reset Port Lock Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Counter After
Enable Allow List Checkbox Disabled Yes
Idle Session 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 45, 10 Yes

Timeout in 60, 120, 240, 480
Minutes
Maximum 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 25 Yes

Number of Active 45, 50
Sessions
Encryption
Require AES Off Required for Yes

Encryption for Video Calls Only
When Available
Calls
Required for Video Calls
Only
Required for All Video
Calls
Require FIPS 140 Checkbox Enabled Yes

Cryptography
Disable TLS v1.0 Checkbox Enabled Yes
Local Accounts
Account Lockout
Lock Admin Off 3 Yes

Account After
2-10
Failed Logins
330
Admin Account 1, 2, 3, 5 minutes 1 Yes

Lock Duration
Reset Admin Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Account Lock
Counter After
Failed Logins
Lock User 2-10 3 Yes

Account After
Failed Logins
User Account 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 1 minute Yes

Lock Duration minutes
1, 2, 4, 8 hours
Reset User Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Account Lock
Counter After
Failed Logins
Login Credentials
Use Room Checkbox Enabled Yes

Password for
Remote Access
Require User Checkbox Enabled Yes

Login for System
Access
Reject Previous Off, 1-16 10 Yes

Passwords

Password Age in
Days
Maximum Off, 30, 60, 90, 100, 110, 90 Yes

Password Age in 120, 130, 140, 150, 160,
Days 170, 180
Minimum 1-4 4 Yes

Changed
Characters
331
Password 1-7 4 Yes

Expiration
Warning
Minimum Length 1-16, 32 6 Yes

Lowercase
Letters

Uppercase
Letters
Require Numbers Off,1,2,All Off Yes
Require Special Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Characters
Maximum Off, 1-4 Off Yes

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
Can contain ID or Checkbox Disabled Read-only

Its Reverse Form

Lowercase
Letters
Require Off,1,2,All Off Yes

Uppercase
Letters
Require Numbers Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Characters

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
332

Its Reverse Form
Meeting
Minimum Length Off, 1-20, 32 Off Yes

Lowercase
Letters

Uppercase
Letters

Characters

Passwords

Password Age in
Days

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
SNMP

Lowercase
Letters

Uppercase
Letters
Require Numbers Off, 1, 2, All 1 Yes
Require Special Off, 1, 2, All 1 Yes

Characters
333

Passwords

Password Age in
Days

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters

Its Reverse Form
Certificates
Certificate Options
Always Validate Checkbox Enabled Yes

Peer Certificates
from Browser
Always Validate Checkbox Enabled Yes

Peer Certificates
from Server
Revocation
Revocation OCSPCRL OCSP Yes

Method
Allow Incomplete Checkbox Enabled Yes

Revocation
Checks
Security Banner
Enable Security Banner Checkbox Disabled Yes
Banner Text DoDCustom Custom Yes
Local System Banner Unicode characters, 2048 Null (no text) Yes
Text bytes max
Remote System Banner Unicode characters, 2048 Null (no text) Yes
Text bytes max
Servers
Directory Servers
334

Microsoft
LDAP
Polycom GDS
SNMP
Provisioning Service Checkbox Disabled Yes
Calendaring Service
Enable Calendaring Checkbox Disabled Yes

Service
Recording Service
Enable Recording Checkbox DIsabled Yes

Service
Domain Name
User Name
Password
Server Address
High
Diagnostics Area Range Default Value Configurable?
System
System Log Settings
Remote Log Server Transport UDP UDP Yes

Protocol
TCP
TLS
335
Changing High Security Profile Default Values

When you configure the system to use the High Security Profile, the system forces you to change the
following settings from their default values:
• Admin account room password
• User account room password
• Admin account remote access password
Configure Security Profiles
Medium Security Profile Default Settings

system. The following table shows the default values for specific settings when you use the Medium
security profile.
Admin Settings Area Medium
Range Default Configurable?

Value
Place a Call
Speed Dial
Manual Dial
VideoAudio Video Yes
Auto, 128, 256, 384, 512, 768, 1024, Auto Yes

1472, 1920, 2048, 3072, 3840, 4096,
6144
Auto Auto Yes

H.323
SIP
General Settings
System Settings
Call Settings
336

Value
Auto Answer Point to Yes No Yes

Point Video
No
Do Not Disturb
Auto Answer Multipoint Yes No Yes

Video
No
Do Not Disturb
Recent Calls
Enable Recent Calls Checkbox Enabled Yes
Background Choose image file No file Yes

selected
Startup Background Choose image file No file Yes

selected
Home Screen Icons Checkbox Disabled Yes
Address Bar None None Yes, for both the

left and right
IP Address
elements
SIP Address
H.323 Extension
Pairing Code
RealPresence Touch Choose image file No file Yes

Background selected
Pairing
337

Value

Device
Note: Disabling this setting
closes the SSH port.
SmartPairing Mode Disabled Disabled Yes

Automatic
Manual
Serial Ports
Mode
RS-232 Mode Off Off Yes

Note: Some Control
systems support
Camera Control
only a subset of
listed modes. Closed Caption
Pass Thru
Login Mode Range: None, Admin password only, Admin Yes

Username/Password password
only
Network
IP Network
Transport Protocol Auto, TLS, TCP, UDP TLS Yes
Dialing Preference
Scalable Video Coding SVC then AVC SVC then Yes

Preference (H.264) AVC
AVC Only
Dialing Options
Scalable Video Coding SVC then AVC SVC then Yes

Preference (H.264) AVC
AVC Only
338

Value

Video Then Phone
Phone Then Video
VOICEDIALPREFERENCE_SIP_SPEA
KERPHONE (only displays if Polycom
SoundStation IP 7000 is connected)
Video Dialing Order IP IP H.323 Yes

H.323
SIP
Audio Dialing Order IP SIP Yes

Preference 1 (only
H.323
selected)
Audio Dialing Order IP H.323 Yes

Preference 2 (only
H.323
selected)
Audio/Video
Video Inputs
Sleep
Enable Mic Mute in Sleep Checkbox Disabled Yes

Mode

Participants In a
Call to Control Your
Camera
Enable People Checkbox Enabled Yes

+Content IP
Enable Camera Checkbox Enabled Yes

Preset Snapshot
Icons
339

Value
Audio
Polycom StereoSurround Checkbox Disabled Yes
Security
Global Security
Security Profile
Security Profile Maximum Medium Yes

High
Medium
Low
Authentication
Enable Active Checkbox Disabled Yes

Directory External
Authentication
Access
Enable Network Checkbox Enabled Yes

Intrusion Detection
System (NIDS)
Enable Web Access Checkbox Enabled Yes
Allow Access to Checkbox Disabled Yes

User Settings
Restrict to HTTPS Checkbox Enabled Yes
Web access port 16-bit integer Grayed out Read only

(http) (80)
Note: You cannot
select this setting if
the Restrict to
HTTPS setting is
enabled.
Enable Telnet Checkbox Disabled Yes

Access
Enable SSH Access Checkbox Enabled Yes
340

Value
Enable SNMP Checkbox Disabled Yes

Access
Lock Port after Off, 2-10 Off Yes

Failed Logins
Port Lock Duration 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30 minutes, 1 minute Yes

1, 2, 4, 8 hours
Reset Port Lock Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Counter After
Idle Session 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 45, 60, 120, 240, 10,15,20,25, Yes
Timeout in Minutes 480 30,35,40,45,
50
Maximum Number 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 25 Yes
of Active Sessions
Encryption
Require AES Off When Yes

Encryption for Calls Available
When Available
Required for Video Calls Only
Required for All Video Calls
Require FIPS 140 Checkbox Enabled Yes

Cryptography
Disable TLS v1.0 Checkbox Enabled Yes
Local Accounts
Account Lockout
Lock Admin Off, 2-10 3 Yes

Account After Failed
Logins
Admin Account 1, 2, 3, 5 minutes 1 Yes

Lock Duration
Reset Admin Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Account Lock
Counter After
341

Value
Lock User Account Off, 2-10 3 Yes

After Failed Logins
User Account Lock 1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30 minutes 1 minute Yes

Duration
1, 2, 4, 8 hours
Reset User Account Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes

Lock Counter After
Login Credentials
Use Room Checkbox Disabled Yes

Password for
Remote Access
Require User Login Checkbox Disabled Yes

for System Access
Reject Previous Off, 1-16 Off Yes

Passwords
Minimum Password Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes

Age in Days
Maximum Password Off, 30, 60, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, Off Yes
Age in Days 150, 160, 170, 180
Minimum Changed Off, 1-4, All Off Yes

Characters
Password Off, 1-7 Off Yes

Expiration Warning
Require Lowercase Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Letters
Require Uppercase Off, 1, 2, All Off Yes

Letters
342

Value

Characters

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
Can contain ID or Checkbox Disabled Yes

Its Reverse Form

Letters

Letters

Characters

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters

Its Reverse Form
Meeting
Minimum Length Off, 1-20, 32 Off Yes

Letters

Letters

Characters
343

Value

Passwords

Age in Days

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters
SNMP

Letters

Letters

Characters

Passwords

Age in Days

Consecutive
Repeated
Characters

Its Reverse Form
Certificates
Certificate Options
Always Validate Checkbox Disabled Yes

Peer Certificates
from Browser
344

Value
Always Validate Checkbox Disabled Yes

Peer Certificates
from Server
Revocation
Revocation Method OCSPCRL OCSP Yes
Allow Incomplete Checkbox Enabled Yes

Revocation Checks
Security Banner
Banner Text DoDCustom Custom Yes
Local System Banner Text Unicode characters, 2048 bytes max Null (no text) Yes
Remote System Banner Unicode characters, 2048 bytes max Null (no text) Yes
Text
Servers
Directory Servers

Microsoft
LDAP
Polycom GDS
SNMP
Calendaring Service
Enable Calendaring Checkbox Disabled Yes

Service
Recording Service
345

Value
Enable Recording Service Checkbox DIsabled Yes
Recording Service
Domain Name
User Name
Password
Server Address
Medium
Diagnostics Area Range Default Value Configurable?
System
System Log Settings
Remote Log Server Transport UDP UDP Read only

Protocol
TCP
TLS
Changing Medium Security Profile Default Values

When you configure the system to use the Medium Security Profile, it forces you to change the following
settings from their default values:
• Admin account room password
• User account room password
Related Links
Configure Security Profiles on page 82
346
Low Security Profile Default Settings

system. The following table shows the default values for specific settings when you use the Low security
profile.
Low
Admin Setting
Place a Call
Contacts Search box No value Yes
Speed Dial Search box No value Yes
Recent Calls
Manual Dial Entry box No value Yes
Video
Video
Audio
Auto, 128, 256, 384,

512, 768, 1024, 1472,
Auto
1920, 2048, 3072,
3840, 4096, 6144
Auto
H.323 Auto
SIP
Admin Settings > General Settings > My

Information
Contact Information Entry boxes No value Yes
Location
Admin Settings > General Settings >

System Settings
System Name
System Name Entry box No value
Call Settings
347
Low
Admin Setting
Off, 1 hour, 2 hours, 3

hours, 4 hours, 5
hours, 6 hours, 7
Maximum Time in Call hours, 8 hours, 9 8 hours Yes
hours, 10 hours, 11
hours, 12 hours, 24
hours, 48 hours
Yes
Auto Answer Point to Point Video No No Yes

Do Not Disturb
Yes
Auto Answer Multipoint Video No No Yes

Do Not Disturb
Auto, Full Screen,

Mulitpoint Mode Discussion, Discussion Yes
Presentation
Display Icons in a Call Checkbox Enabled Yes
Enable Flashing Incoming Call Notification Checkbox Disabled Yes
Keypad
Preferred 'Place a Call' Navigation Contacts Keypad Yes

Recent Calls
Automatic Self View Control Checkbox Enabled Yes
Recent Calls
Enable Recent Calls Checkbox Enabled Yes
Maximum Number to Display 25, 50, 75, 100 100 Yes
Admin Settings > General Settings >

Calendar Checkbox Disabled
Background Choose Image File No file selected
348
Low
Admin Setting
Startup Background Choose Image File No file selected
Kiosk Mode Checkbox Disabled
Home Screen Icons Checkbox Disabled
None
IP Address
Address Bar SIP Address None Yes

H.323 Extension
Pairing Code
Image file not

RealPresence Touch Background Choose image file Yes
selected
Pairing > Enable Polycom Touch Device
Note: Disabling this setting closes the SSH

Checkbox Disabled Yes
port.
Disabled
SmartPairing Mode Automatic Disabled Yes

Manual
RS-232 Mode
Note: Some
Serial Ports > Mode RealPresence Group
Series systems support
only a subset of listed
modes.
Off
Control
Camera Control Off Yes
Closed Caption
Pass Thru
349
Low
Admin Setting
None
Admin Admin Password
Login Mode Yes
Password only Only
Username/Password
Network > IP Network
Auto
TLS
Transport Protocol TLS Yes
TCP
UDP
Dialing Preference
SVC then AVC

Scalable Video Coding Preference (H.264) SVC then AVC Yes
AVC Only
Dialing Options
SVC then AVC

Scalable Video Coding Preference (H.264) SVC then AVC Yes
AVC Only
Call Type Order Video Video No
IP H.323
Video Dialing Order IP H.323 Yes
SIP
Auto Dialing Order Preference 1

SIP
(only displays if Enable Audio-Only Calls SIP Yes
H.323
checkbox is selected)
Auto Dialing Order Preference 2

H.323
(only displays if Enable Audio-Only Calls H.323 Yes
SIP
checkbox is selected)
Audio/Video > Video Inputs > Sleep
350
Low
Admin Setting
No Signal
Display No Signal Yes
Black
Off
1 minute
3 minutes
15 minutes
Time Before System Goes to Sleep 30 minutes 15 minutes Yes
60 minutes
2 hours
4 hours
8 hours
Enable Mic Mute in Sleep Mode Checkbox Disabled Yes
Allow Other Participants in a Call to Control

Your Camera
Enable People+Content IP Checkbox Enabled Yes
Enable Camera Preset Snapshot Icons Checkbox Enabled Yes
Audio
Polycom StereoSurround Checkbox Disabled Yes
Security > Global Security > Security

Profile
Maximum
High
Security Profile Low Yes
Medium
Low
Authentication
Enable Active Directory External

Authentication
Access
351
Low
Admin Setting
Enable Network Intrusion Detection System

Checkbox Enabled Yes
(NIDS)
Enable Web Access Checkbox Enabled Yes
Allow Access to User Settings Checkbox Disabled Yes
Restrict to HTTPS Checkbox Enabled Yes
Web access port (http) Note:You cannot

select this setting if the Restrict to HTTPS 16-bit integer Grayed out (80) Read only
setting is enabled.
Enable Telnet Access Checkbox Disabled Yes
Enable SSH Access Checkbox Enabled Yes
Enable SNMP Access Checkbox Disabled Yes
Lock Port after Failed Logins Off, 2-10 Off Yes
1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30
Port Lock Duration minutes 1 minute Yes
1, 2, 4, 8 hours
Reset Port Lock Counter After Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes
1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 10,15,20,25,30,35,40

Idle Session Timeout in Minutes Yes
45, 60, 120, 240, 480 ,45,50
10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35,

Maximum Number of Active Sessions 25 Yes
40, 45, 50
Encryption Yes
Off
When Available
Require AES Encryption for Calls Required for Video When Available Yes
Calls Only
Required for All Video
Calls
Require FIPS 140 Cryptography Checkbox Enabled Yes
Disable TLS v1.0 Checkbox Disabled Yes
352
Low
Admin Setting
Local Accounts > Account Lockout Yes
Lock Admin Account After Failed Logins Off, 2-10 3 Yes
Admin Account Lock Duration 1, 2, 3, 5 minutes 1 Yes
Reset Admin Account Lock Counter After Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes
Lock User Account After Failed Logins Off, 2-10 3 Yes
1, 2, 3, 5, 10, 20, 30
User Account Lock Duration minutes 1 minute Yes
1, 2, 4, 8 hours
Reset User Account Lock Counter After Off, [1..24] hours Off Yes
Login Credentials Yes
Use Room Password for Remote Access Checkbox Disabled Yes
Require User Login for System Access Checkbox Disabled Yes
Admin
Minimum Length Off, 1-32 Off Yes
Require Lowercase Letters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes
Require Uppercase Letters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes
Require Numbers Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes
Require Special Characters Off, 1, 2, all Off Yes
Reject Previous Passwords Off, 1-16 Off Yes
Minimum Password Age in Days Off, 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30 Off Yes
30, 60, 90, 100, 110,

120, 130, 140, 150,
Maximum Password Age in Days Off Yes
160, 170, 180, 190,
200
Minimum Changed Characters Off, 1, 2, 3, 4, all Off Yes
Maximum Consecutive Repeated

Off, 1, 2, 3, 4 Off Yes
Characters
353
Low
Admin Setting
Password Expiration Warning Off, 1-7 Off Yes
Can Contain ID or Its Reverse Form Checkbox Selected Yes
User Room
30, 60, 90, 100, 110,

120, 130, 140, 150,
160, 170, 180, 190,
200

Off, 1, 2, 3, 4 Off Yes
Characters
Meeting
Maximum Password Age in Days none Off Yes
354
Low
Admin Setting
Minimum Changed Characters none Off Yes

Off, 1, 2, 3, 4 Off Yes
Characters
Password Expiration Warning none Off Yes
Remote Access
30, 60, 90, 100, 110,

120, 130, 140, 150,
160, 170, 180, 190,
200

Off, 1, 2, 3, 4 Off Yes
Characters
SNMP
355
Low
Admin Setting
Maximum Password Age in Days none Off Yes
Minimum Changed Characters none Off Yes

Off, 1, 2, 3, 4 Off Yes
Characters
Password Expiration Warning none Off Yes
Can Contain ID or Its Reverse Form Checkbox Not Selected Yes
Certificates > Certificate Options
Always Validate Peer Certificates from

Browser
Always Validate Peer Certificates from

Server
Revocation
Revocation Method OCSPCRL OCSP Yes
Allow Incomplete Revocation Checks Checkbox Enabled Yes
Security Banner
Banner Text DodCustom Custom Yes
Unicode characters,
Local System Banner Text Null (no text) Yes
2048 bytes max
Unicode characters,
Remote System Banner Text Null (no text) Yes
2048 bytes max
Servers > Directory Servers
Off
Microsoft
Server Type Off Yes
LDAP
Polycom GDS
356
Low
Admin Setting
SNMP
Version 1 Checkbox Disabled Yes
Version 2c Checkbox Disabled Yes
Version 3 Checkbox Disabled Yes
Calendaring Service
Enable Calendaring Service Checkbox Disabled Yes
Recording Service
Enable RealPresence Recording Suite Checkbox Disabled Yes
Registration Status Checkbox Status text Read Only
Domain Name
User Name
Enabled Yes
Password
Server Address
Diagnostics > System > System Log

Settings
UDP
Remote Log Server Transport Protocol TCP UDP Read only

TLS
357
Call Speeds and Resolutions
Topics:
• Point-to-Point Call Speeds

• Multipoint Call Speeds
• High-Profile Call Speeds and Resolutions
• Multipoint Resolutions for High Definition Video
• Resolution and Frame Rates for Content Video
Point-to-Point Call Speeds

The following table shows the maximum allowable H.323/SIP point-to-point call speeds for each type of
RealPresence Group Series system:
System Maximum Call Speed
RealPresence Group 300 3072 kbps
Multipoint Call Speeds

The following table shows the maximum allowable H.323/SIP call speeds for the number of sites in a call.
Maximum speeds can be further limited by the communications equipment. The multipoint option is
required for some of the capabilities shown in the table. RealPresence Group 300 and 310 systems do
not support multipoint calling.
Number of Sites in Call Max Speed for Each Site
3 3072 kbps
4 2048 kbps
5 1536 kbps
6 1152 kbps
7 (RealPresence Group 700 only) 1024 kbps
358
Number of Sites in Call Max Speed for Each Site
8 (RealPresence Group 700 only) 832 kbps
These values do not apply when the Microsoft Skype Interoperability option is enabled. When this option
is enabled, all calls are CCCP calls and are capped at 1920 kbps due to ICE restrictions.
High-Profile Call Speeds and Resolutions

The following table includes the H.264 high-profile resolutions and frame rates sent in calls between two
Resolutions and frame rates are based on the call speed and the Optimized for setting of your video
input.
Due to the complexities of system capabilities and the call types and scenarios in your environment, it
isn’t possible to provide the resolutions and frame rates for calls between a RealPresence Group Series
system and a different type of endpoint or multipoint resource. The systems attempt to provide the highest
resolutions and best frame rates in all types of calls.
The values for sharpness and motion are the same from 2 MB to 6 MB for systems that support higher
call speeds. The difference between NTSC and PAL cameras is how frame rates are calculated:
• NTSC 60 fps equals PAL 50 fps
• NTSC 30 fps equals PAL 25 fps
The following table shows the resolutions for People video on systems with NTSC cameras in H.264 high-
profile calls.
Call Speeds and Resolutions in High-Profile Calls
Camera Source
HD (1280x720x60) HD (1920x1080x60)
Call Speed Motion/ Max Frame Max Frame

(kbps) Sharpness Resolution Rate (fps) Resolution Rate (fps)
<160 Motion 512x288 60 512x288 60
160-511 Motion 640x368 60 640x368 60
512-831 Motion 848x480 60 848x480 60
832-895 Motion 1024x576 60 720x832 60
896-1727 Motion 1280x720 60 1280x720 60
>=1728 Motion 1280x720 60 1920x1080 60
<128 Sharpness 640x368 30 640x368 30
128-511 Sharpness 1024x576 30 1024x576 30
359
Camera Source
HD (1280x720x60) HD (1920x1080x60)
Call Speed Motion/ Max Frame Max Frame

(kbps) Sharpness Resolution Rate (fps) Resolution Rate (fps)
512-1023 Sharpness 1280x720 30 1280x720 30
>=1024 Sharpness 1280x720 30 1920x1080 30
The following table shows the resolutions for People video on systems with NTSC EagleEye Acoustic
cameras in H.264 high-profile calls.
Call Speeds and Resolutions in High-Profile Calls for EagleEye Acoustic
Camera Source
HD (1920x1080x30)
Call Speed (kbps) Motion/Sharpness Resolution Max Frame Rate (fps)
<128 Motion/Sharpness 640x368 30
128-511 Motion/Sharpness 1024x576 30
512-1023 Motion/Sharpness 1280x720 30
>=1024 Motion/Sharpness 1920x1080 30
Multipoint Resolutions for High Definition Video

Polycom supports high definition (HD) multipoint resolutions, which improve video quality in multipoint
conferences and increases maximum transmitting and receiving video resolutions. During a multipoint
video conference, if any endpoints in the conference do not support high resolution video and transmit
lower resolution video, all endpoints receive lower resolution video.
The maximum Multipoint Control Unit (MCU) transmitting and receiving resolutions are specified in the
following table. Note that changing from discussion to speaker does not alter the transmit of 960x544
from an endpoint and the receive of 1080p from the endpoints.
RealPresence Group 500 systems support one endpoint as a host system and up to 5 other endpoints in
a 6-way multipoint conference; RealPresence Group 700 systems support one endpoint as a host system
and up to 7 other endpoints in an 8-way multipoint conference.
Number of Endpoints in the Maximum Transmitting

Video Conference Resolutions Maximum Receiving Resolutions
2-4 endpoints 1080p, 30fps 960x544p, 30fps
5-8 endpoints 720p, 30fps 640x368p, 30fps
360
Resolution and Frame Rates for Content Video

The high frame rates with high resolution apply only to point-to-point calls above 832 kbps on
RealPresence Group Series systems. In addition, you must set Optimized for value of your Camera input
to Sharpness. Low frame rates apply if your call does not meet these requirements.
For multipoint calls, the maximum resolution and frame rate for content is 720p @ 30 fps.
Resolution
Dimension (w x h) Encode Resolution Sharpness Motion
640 x 480 640 x 480 30 60
704 x 576 704 x 480 30 60
352 x 288 352 x 240 30 60
352 x 240 352 x 240 30 60
176 x 144 176 x 120 30 60
704 x 240 704 x 288 30 60
1280 x 720 1280 x 720 30 60*
640 x 368 640 x 368 30 60
432 x 240 432 x 240 30 60
1920 x 1080 1920 x 1080 30 60
1024 x 576 1024 x 576 30 60
512 x 288 512 x 288 30 60
768 x 448 768 x 448 30 60
*Available only when the Quality Preference setting on your system is set to Content in Admin
Settings > Network > IP Network > Network Quality.
361

Polycom RealPresence Group Series - ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE 6.2.2 - August 2021

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Polycom RealPresence Group Series - ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE 6.2.2 - August 2021

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Polycom RealPresence Group Series - ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE 6.2.2 - August 2021

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ADMINISTRATOR GUIDE 6.2.

2 | August 2021 | 3725-63706-018A

Plantronics, Inc. (Poly — formerly Plantronics and Polycom)

Setting Up System Hardware.......................................................................... 21

Running the Setup Wizard...............................................................................27

Configuring General System Settings............................................................29

Set the Location................................................................................................................ 30

Using a Provisioning Service..........................................................................34

Activating System Options..............................................................................39

Join Scheduled Meetings.................................................................................................. 56

Configuring Network Settings.........................................................................57

Simplified ISDN Dialing..................................................................................................... 81

Securing the System........................................................................................82

Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol................................................................. 114

Configuring Call Settings.............................................................................. 121

Registering with a Directory..........................................................................132

Create a Favorites Group.....................................................................................135

Configuring Audio Settings...........................................................................141

Configuring Video Settings........................................................................... 150

Configure Monitor Settings...................................................................................162

Configuring a Camera or Camera Control System..................................... 165

Indicator Lights..................................................................................................... 191

Configuring Remote Control Behavior.........................................................193

Enabling Mobile Devices as Controllers...................................................... 198

Enabling Content Sharing............................................................................. 200

Configuring Call Recording...........................................................................207

Customizing the Local Interface................................................................... 210

Setting Up a Polycom RealPresence Touch Device....................................217

Choose the Home Screen Icons.......................................................................... 226

Setting Up a Polycom Touch Control Device...............................................238

Pair the Polycom Touch Control Device............................................................... 244

System Software Updates....................................................................................265

System Panel Views.......................................................................................291

Port Usage...................................................................................................... 301

Security Profile Default Settings...................................................................312

Call Speeds and Resolutions........................................................................ 358

• Related Poly and Partner Resources

Related Poly and Partner Resources

• High Definition Video Conferencing

High Definition Video Conferencing

User Interface Customization

Security Setting Management

Call Setting Configuration

Powering On and Off

Power On the System

Power Off the System

Powering On the RealPresence Group 700 System

Navigating the System

Access the System Web Interface

Search the Web Interface

• Mount and Position the System

Mount and Position the System

Note: Keep ventilation openings free of any obstructions.

Available Microphone Inputs by System

Microphone Inputs for RealPresence Group 300/310/500

Microphone Inputs for RealPresence Group 700

Set Up Third-party Microphones

SoundStructure Digital Mixer